Endeavor (2010) - Automotive MITSUBISHI - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Automobile - SUV
Brand	Mitsubishi
Model	Endeavor (2010)
Overall Length	190.8 in (4,846 mm)
Overall Width	73.6 in (1,870 mm) (17" tires) / 74.2 in (1,885 mm) (18" tires)
Overall Height (without crossbars)	69.6 in (1,769 mm) (17" tires) / 69.8 in (1,774 mm) (18" tires)
Wheelbase	108.3 in (2,750 mm)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (FWD)	5,159 lb (2,340 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (AWD)	5,346 lb (2,425 kg)
Payload Capacity	970 lb (440 kg)
Seating Capacity	5 persons
Engine Type	3.8L V6 (6G75) - 233.6 CID, 3,828 cc
Horsepower (approx)	225 hp @ 5,000 rpm
Torque (approx)	250 lb-ft @ 3,750 rpm
Transmission	4-speed automatic with Sports Mode
Drivetrain	Front-Wheel Drive or All-Wheel Drive
Fuel Tank Capacity	21.4 gal (81 L)
Fuel Type	Unleaded gasoline (premium recommended, 91 octane)
Tire Size	P235/65R17 or P255/55R18
Braking System	Power-assisted disc brakes with ABS, EBD
Safety Systems	Dual front airbags, side airbags, curtain airbags, seatbelt pretensioners, active stability control
Air Conditioning	Manual or Automatic climate control
Battery	12V, BCI Group 24
Engine Oil Capacity (with filter)	4.2 qt (4.0 L)
Coolant Capacity (FWD)	9.5 qt (9.0 L)
Coolant Capacity (AWD)	10.1 qt (9.6 L)
Recommended Oil	API SM or ILSAC certified, SAE 5W-20 or 5W-30

Frequently Asked Questions - Endeavor (2010) MITSUBISHI

What type of fuel does the Mitsubishi Endeavor 2010 require?

The Endeavor is designed for unleaded gasoline. Premium grade with a minimum octane number of 91 [(MON+RON)/2] is recommended for maximum performance. Avoid using leaded gasoline or methanol blends.

How do I adjust the driver's seat?

For manual seats, pull the adjusting lever up and slide the seat forward or backward. For power seats, push the switch in the desired direction. Always adjust the seat while the vehicle is stationary and ensure it locks securely before driving.

What is the towing capacity of the Endeavor?

With a towing kit, the vehicle can tow up to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) for a trailer with brakes. Without a towing kit, the maximum is 2,000 lb (907 kg) with brakes. Always follow the guidelines in the manual.

How do I use the cruise control?

Turn the cruise control lever to 'ON'. Accelerate to desired speed, then push the lever down to 'SET'. The speed is set. To increase speed, push the lever up; to decrease, push down. To cancel, pull the lever toward you or tap the brake.

What does the SRS warning light indicate?

The SRS warning light indicates a potential problem with the Supplemental Restraint System (airbags and pretensioners). If it stays on or flashes, have the system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi dealer as soon as possible.

How do I change a flat tire?

Park on a flat surface, engage parking brake, and place wheel chocks. Remove the spare tire (located under the rear), jack, and tools. Loosen lug nuts, raise vehicle with jack, remove flat, mount spare, tighten nuts partially, lower vehicle, then fully tighten in a star pattern.

What is the recommended tire pressure?

Check the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door sill for cold tire pressures. Typical values: Front and rear around 32-35 psi for standard tires. Adjust according to load and driving conditions.

How do I fold the rear seats?

Pull the release knobs located near the seatback tops and fold the seatbacks forward. Ensure the seatbacks lock securely when returned to the upright position. This creates additional cargo space.

How do I reset the tire pressure monitoring system?

After adjusting tire pressures to the correct levels, drive the vehicle at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) for a few minutes. The warning light should turn off automatically. If it blinks or remains on, consult the manual or a dealer.

Where is the jack stored?

The jack and tools are stored in the luggage area, typically under the floor panel or in a compartment. Refer to the Tools section on page 6-8 of the owner's manual for exact location.

USER MANUAL Endeavor (2010) MITSUBISHI

Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI ENDEAVOR.

We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly reading this Owner's Manual, you will gain an understanding of the many features that are included in the ENDEAVOR. The Owner's Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of your vehicle.

Please note that this manual applies to all ENDEAVOR models and explains all features including options. Some features explained in this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.

Please leave this Owner's Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will appreciate having access to the information contained here.

This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.

Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION appear.

These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

WARNING

Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if instructions are not followed.

CAUTION

Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

You will see another important symbol:

NOTE Gives helpful information.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read “driving precaution” and “off-road” driving guidelines in the “Driving safety” sections.

WARNING

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

©2009 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

Printed in U.S.A.

This vehicle is manufactured by Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. in U.S.A. under license from Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.

Table of contents

Overview
Quick index
General information	1
Seat and restraint systems	2
Features and controls	3
Driving safety	4
Comfort controls	5
For emergencies	6
Vehicle care and maintenance	7
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects	8
Specifications	9

Overview

Instruments and controls (Driver's area)

N00100201071

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.3-153 Turn signal lever P.3-157

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air bag (for driver's seat) P.2-35. Horn switch P.3-164

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Instrument cluster P.3-77

Steering wheel remote control switch (if so equipped) P.5-68

Wiper and washer switch P.3-159

Ignition switch P.3-34

Cruise control lever P.3-63

Instrument panel light dimmer control P.3-159

Front fog light switch (if so equipped) TCL switch P.3-59 P3-158

TA5000510

Instruments and controls (Instrument panel)

Overview

N00100201228

Overview

Instruments and controls (Floor console)

N00100201231

TA5001269

Interior (Front area)

Overview

N00100300987

Overview

Interior (Rear area)

N00100300990

Luggage area

Overview

N00106500370

Overview

Outside (Front)

N0100600935

Outside (Rear)

Overview

N00108600948

	10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3	11.4	11.5	11.6	11.7	11.8	11.9	12.0
									10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you're driving...

N00200700924

NOTE

● These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition key is first turned to "ON".

Warning light Do this Ref. page
Charging system warning light	●Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.	P.3-85
Oil pressure warning light	●Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil level.If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.	P.3-85
Brake warning light	●If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully released.●If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, stop and check the brake fluid level.●If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard braking and high speeds, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.	P.3-83

Quick index

Warning light Do this Ref. page
Automatic transaxle fluid temperature warning light	●Park your vehicle in a safe place.Idle the engine until the warning light goes off. If the light does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.	P.3-43
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”)	●Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assistance.	P.3-84
Anti-lock braking system warning light	●When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.●Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.Test the system as described on page 3-56.●If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.	P.3-55
SRS warning light	●It is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we recommend that you have the air bag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.	P.2-24, 2-44

Quick index

Warning light Do this Ref. page
ASC indicator/TCL indicator, TCL OFF indicator	●Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.Restart the engine and check to see if the indicator comes on again.●If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.●When this indicator comes on, the Traction control system or Active skid control system is not functioning and normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.	P.3-60
“N” indicator in the instrument cluster flashes slowly	●Have the automatic transaxle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.	P.3-42
Tire pressure monitoring system warning light	●If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible.(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 7-24.)Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.●If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.	P.3-71

Quick index

If you hear this sound...

N00200800677

Cartoon illustration of a person in a suit waving, with no text or symbols present

AA1000597

Sound Do this Ref. page
Constant tone when the driver's door is opened.	“Key reminder buzzer”A tone will sound if the driver's door is opened while the ignition key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.Remove the key to stop the tone.OR“Headlight reminder buzzer”A tone will sound if the driver's door is opened when the ignition key is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed from the ignition switch while the lights are on. Turn the lights off.The tone will stop automatically when the lights are automatically turned off.(See page 3-154 for auto-shutoff function.)	P.3-14, 3-35P.3-155

Quick index

Sound Do this Ref. page
Metallic squeal when you press the brake pedal while driving.	“Brake pad wear alarm”The brake pads are worn down to the serviceable limit.Have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.	P.3-54
Tone when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.	“Seat belt reminder buzzer”When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the tone will sound for about 6 seconds. If the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened 1 minute later, the tone will sound intermittently (12 times) when the vehicle is driven. If the driver’s seat belt subsequently remains unfastened while the vehicle is being driven, the tone will sound as a warning each time the vehicle stops and starts.When the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the tone will stop.	P.2-19
Tone when the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h).	“Door-ajar warning buzzer”Door, liftgate is not properly shut.If you shut the door, liftgate the tone will stop.	P.3-85
Wind buffeting when driving with one or both rear door windows opened.	“What to do if you hear wind buffeting when driving”Open the front door windows as well as the rear door windows.	P.3-25
When the headlights have flashed for three minutes, the horn will sound intermittently for three minutes.	“Theft-alarm system”The theft-alarm system is operating. To stop the alarm, turn the key in the driver’s door toward the front of the vehicle (the lock direction) or toward the rear of the vehicle (the unlock direction). Alternatively, use the keyless-entry transmitter to lock or unlock the doors, liftgate.	P.3-20

Quick index

If this problem occurs...

N00200900795

Problem Do this Ref. Page
Cannot turn the key.	From “LOCK” to “ACC”Turn the key while jogging the steering wheel in either direction.From “ACC” to “LOCK”Check the position of the selector lever.The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.	P.3-35, 3-36
Cannot shift the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position.	Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.Check that the ignition key is in the “ON” position.	P.3-40
The windows are fogged up.	1. Set the mode selection dial to the “or ” position.2. Turn on the blower.	P.5-12, 5-23
The engine does not start.The lights do not come on.The lights are dim.The horn does not honk.The horn sound is weak.	Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.	P.6-2, 7-16

Quick index

Problem Do this Ref. page
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicator is at the “II” (hot) position.Steam comes out of the engine compartment.	The engine is overheated.Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.	P.6-5
The vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.	Move the selector lever rhythmically between “Sports Mode” and “R” (REVERSE) positions, while pressing lightly on the accelerator pedal.	P.6-25

WARNING

• When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
• Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.

If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

Quick index

Problem Do this Ref. page
The brakes are not functioning properly after driving through water.	Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P.3-50
The automatic transaxle does not shift when accelerating and/or the vehicle does not easily begin to move.	There may be a problem in the automatic transaxle.Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.Shift the lever into 2nd gear of the sports mode when starting the vehicle. If the vehicle is on a level road, shift the lever back to “D” (DRIVE) position.(This method may or may not work depending on the type of malfunction.)	P.3-46
A tire is punctured.	1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.	P.6-12

General information

Fuel selection....1-2

Filling the fuel tank....1-4

Modification of your vehicle .....1-7

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts .....1-9

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements. . .1-9

General information

Fuel selection

N00301000736

Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gasoline only. It is equipped with a fuel filler tube especially designed to accept only a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispensing nozzle.

WARNING

●Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. Whenever you refuel your vehicle, stop the engine and keep flames, sparks, and smoking materials away from the vehicle. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas.

CAUTION

● Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will damage the engine, catalytic converter, and the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gasoline is illegal, and will void your warranty coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, and oxygen sensors.

Gasoline detergent additives

In the United States, fuel suppliers are required by law to add detergents to their gasoline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and your emission-control system working properly.

Octane requirement

Unleaded gasoline having an octane number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON may be used, though it recommended your vehicle be operated on premium grade unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane number of 91 [(MON+RON)/2], or 95 RON. To get maximum performance, premium gasoline is recommended.

MON: Motor Octane Number

RON: Research Octane Number

Oxygenated gasoline

Gasoline sold at some service stations contains oxygenates such as ethanol and MTBE, although the oxygenates may not be identified by those names. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in your vehicle.

Ethanol (Gasohol)

A mixture of 10 % ethanol (grain alcohol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used in your vehicle, provided the octane number is at least as high as that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

Methanol

Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline containing methanol (wood alcohol). Using this type of alcohol could adversely affect the vehicle's performance and damage critical parts of the vehicle's fuel system.

Reformulated gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and is specially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline has no adverse effect on vehicle performance or on the durability of the engine and fuel system.

MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl)

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasolines to increase the octane number.

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends using gasolines without MMT.

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Sulfur in gasoline

Your vehicle may have been designed to satisfy California's low-emission regulations based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. Gasoline sold in parts of the country other than California is allowed to have a higher sulfur content. Using such gasoline could adversely affect the vehicle's catalytic converter and cause the engine malfunction indicator ("SERVICE ENGINE SOON" or "CHECK ENGINE") to come on. Illumination of this indicator while you are using high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehicle's emission-control system is malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer may suggest you try using a different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to determine whether the problem is fuel-related.

NOTE

●Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems such as poor starting, stalling during idling, abnormal engine noise, and poor acceleration. If you experience any of these problems, try using a different brand of gasoline. If the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “CHECK ENGINE”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible by the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

General information

●Repeatedly driving short distances at low speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel system and engine, resulting in poor starting and poor acceleration. If these problems occur, you are advised to add a detergent additive to the gasoline when you refuel the vehicle. The additive will remove the deposits, thereby returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a genuine Mitsubishi cleaning additive. Using an unsuitable additive could make the engine malfunction. For details, please contact the nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Filling the fuel tank

N00301100867

WARNING

●Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You could be burned, seriously injured or killed when handling it. When refueling your vehicle, always turn the engine off and keep away from flames, sparks, and smoking materials. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas.
- Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to get rid of your body's static electricity by touching a metal part of the car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on your body could create a spark that ignites fuel vapor.
●Perform the whole refueling process (opening the fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not let any other person come near the fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to help you and that person was carrying static electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
●Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until refueling is finished. If you moved away and did something else (for example, sitting on a seat) part-way through the refueling process, you could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity.
●Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel contains toxic substances.
- Keep the doors and windows closed while refueling the vehicle. If they were open, fuel vapor could get into the cabin.

Fuel tank capacity

21.4 gal (81 L)

Refueling

1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear driver side of your vehicle.
   To open the fuel tank filler door, hook a finger behind the door, and pull the door toward you.

1. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly turning the cap counterclockwise.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical device with labeled components A and B, showing internal components and flow direction (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A- Remove
B-Close

WARNING

●Since the fuel system may be under pressure, remove the fuel tank filler cap slowly. This relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have built up in the fuel tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.

General information

1. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly on correct handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the tank port as far as it goes.

CAUTION

- Your vehicle can only be operated using unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and catalytic converter damage will result if leaded gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and consequently, this must never be attempted.

1. When the nozzle stops automatically, do not try to add more fuel.

CAUTION

- To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top-off" the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle's paintwork. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it off with a soft cloth.

1. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap slowly clockwise until you hear clicking sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler door closed.

WARNING

●Make sure the fuel cap is securely closed. If the fuel cap was loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a fire.

CAUTION

- If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, use only the cap specified for your model vehicle.

NOTE

- If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while driving, the engine malfunction indicator ("SERVICE ENGINE SOON" or "Check engine light") may come on when the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs a self check. Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until you hear clicking sounds.

The indicator will go off after driving several times. If the indicator does not go off, contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

Modification of your vehicle

N00301600048

This vehicle should not be modified with non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Modification with non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

General information

Installation of accessories

N00301700049

CAUTION

●Before any electrical or electronic accessories are installed, consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

●The installation of accessories, optional parts, etc., should only be carried out within the limits prescribed by law in the driving area and in accordance with the guidelines and warnings contained within the documents accompanying this vehicle. Only Mitsubishi Motors approved accessories should be fitted to your vehicle.
- Improper installation of electrical parts could cause fire. Refer to the “Modification/alteration to the electrical or fuel systems” section within this owner’s manual.
● Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle without an external antenna may cause electrical system interference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.
●Tires and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used.

Refer to the “Specifications” section for information regarding wheel and tire sizes.

General information

WARNING

- If you choose to use a cellular phone while driving, you must not allow that usage to distract you in the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident.

Refer to and follow all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving.

Important point!

Due to the large number of accessory and replacement parts provided by different manufacturers in the market, it is not always possible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to check whether the attachment or installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts will affect the driving safety of your Mitsubishi-vehicle.

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems

N00301800040

Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is important that any accessory that is to be fitted, or any modifications carried out which involve the electrical or fuel systems, should be carried out in accordance with Mitsubishi Motors guidelines.

CAUTION

- Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer concerning any such accessory fitment or modification. If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or improper installation methods are used (protective fuses not included, etc.), electronic devices may be adversely affected, resulting in a fire or other accident.

General information

Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts

N00301400105

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are designed and manufactured to meet high standards of performance, and are recommended for all of your maintenance needs. Also available from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are a wide variety of accessories to personalize your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors authorized accessories to choose from to tailor your new vehicle to your own personal preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer's Parts Manager has information on various audio systems, protection items, as well as interior and exterior accessories available for your specific model.

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

N00300100017

Certain components of this vehicle, such as airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate materials.

Special handling may apply. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

	10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3	11.4	11.5	11.6	11.7	11.8	11.9	12.0
									10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3

Seat and restraint systems

Seats 2-2
Seats and restraint systems. 2-3
Front seats 2-3
Rear seats 2-10
Head restraints 2-12
Seat belts 2-15
Seat belt use during pregnancy .....2-22
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems .2- 23
Child restraints. 2-25
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts. . . . . . . 2-35
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag ..2-35

Seat and restraint systems

Seats

N01408400424

AA1006948

1 - Front seat

● To adjust the seat forward or backward → P.2-5
● To adjust the seatback → P.2-6
●To adjust the seat height (Driver's side, Power seat only) → P2-7
- To adjust the lumbar support (Driver's side only) → P.2-9
● Heated seats (if so equipped) → P.2-9

2 - Rear seat

● Folding the seatbacks forward → P.2-10
Arm rest → P2-11

Seats and restraint systems

N00401600166

Your vehicle has seat belts and other features that help protect you and your passengers in an accident.

Seat belts are the most important safety device. When worn properly, seat belts can reduce the chance of serious injury or death in various types of crashes. For added protection during a severe frontal collision, your vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with air bags for the driver and passengers. The seats, head restraints, and door locks also are safety equipment, which must be used correctly.

Always check the following before you drive:

●That everyone in your vehicle is properly wearing their seat belt.
●That infants and small children are properly secured in appropriate child restraints in the rear seat.
●That all doors are fully closed and locked.
●That seatbacks are upright, with head restraints properly adjusted.

Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can help reduce the risk of injury or death, however, by following the instructions in this manual.

Front seats

N00401800344

Position the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel and safely operate the vehicle.

Manual seat Power seat

Line drawing of two car seat compartments with seat covers and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

AA0094898

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

• Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
  ●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is securely locked into position.
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver's air bag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.
  To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death during deployment of the passenger's air bag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the front passenger's seat as far back as possible.
  ●Always place children 12 years old and under in the rear seat and use appropriate child restraints.

CAUTION

●Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unexpected accident might occur.
- Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an accident.
●When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your hand or leg.
- When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay careful attention to the rear seat passengers.

To adjust the seat forward or backward

N00401900286

Manual seat

Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in place.

Line drawing of a car seat with a magnified inset showing the seat's side view (no text or symbols)

WARNING

●To make sure that the seat is securely locked, try to move it forward or backward without using the adjusting lever.

Seat and restraint systems

Power seat

Push the switch to adjust the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the switch, and the seat will lock at that position.

1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle)
2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehicle)

NOTE

●To prevent the battery from running down, operate the power seat with the engine running.

Seat and restraint systems

To adjust the seatback

N00402000314

Manual seat

To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then lean backward to a comfortable position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in place.

CAUTION

●The reclining mechanism used in the seatback is spring loaded, and will cause the seatback to return quickly to the vertical position when the lock lever is operated. When pulling the lever, sit close to the seatback or hold the seatback with your hand to control its return motion.

Power seat

Adjust the seatback angle by operating the switch as indicated by the arrows.

1- To move forward
2- To recline backward

NOTE

●To prevent the battery from running down, operate the power seat with the engine running.

WARNING

●To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death.

To adjust the seat height (Driver's side, Power seat only)

N00402100214

Front and/or rear parts of the seat cushion height can be adjusted.

NOTE

●To prevent the battery from running down, operate the power seat with the engine running.

Front part of the seat cushion

Operate the switch to raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion.

1- Raise
2- Lower

Seat and restraint systems

Rear part of the seat cushion

Operate the switch to raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion.

1- Raise
2-Lower

Whole seat cushion

Operate the center of the switch to raise or lower the whole seat cushion.

1- Raise
2-Lower

Seat and restraint systems

To adjust the lumbar support (Driver's side only)

N00402200143

A lumbar support is included in the seatback of the driver's seat.

1- Strong

2-Weak

Heated seats (if so equipped)

N00435600222

The heated seats can be operated when the ignition key is in the "ON" position.

1- Heater high (for quick heating)
2- Heater off
3- Heater low (to keep the seat warm)

The indicator light (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.

Seat and restraint systems

CAUTION

• Switch off the seat heaters when not in use. Operate the heaters at high for quick heating. After the seat has become warm, set the heater to low to keep it warm. Slight variations in the seat temperature may be felt while using the heated seats. This is caused by the operation of the heater's internal thermostat and does not indicate a malfunction. If the following types of persons use the heated seats, they might become too hot or receive minor burns (red skin, heat blisters, etc.):
  • Children, elderly persons, ill persons
• Person with sensitive skin
  • Excessively fatigued persons
• Persons under the influence of alcohol or sleep-inducing medication (cold medicine, etc.)
  ●Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into it.
• Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other material with high heat insulation properties on the seat while using the heater; doing so could cause the heater element to overheat.
• When cleaning the seat, do not use benzene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic solvents; doing so could damage not only the surface of the seat, but also the heater.
• If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use.

Rear seats

N01402500058

Folding the seatbacks forward

N00402900111

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide additional luggage compartment space.

Pull the left and/or right release knobs, and fold the rear seat-backs forward.

3D diagram of a car interior showing internal components and a magnified view of the handle mechanism (no text or symbols)

NOTE

- Confirm that the seatback locks securely when it is returned.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

• Do not allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment while the vehicle is in motion. People who are not properly seated and restrained can be seriously injured or killed in an accident.
  ●To avoid reducing rearward vision, do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of the seatback.
  ● Firmly secure cargo and luggage. Unsecured cargo and luggage can move during braking or in an accident, causing serious injury or death.

Arm rest

N00403000223

Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown. The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to the "Cup holder" on page 3-206.)

3D rendering of a car backseat with seatbelt and seat, showing internal seating arrangement and a curved arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Seat and restraint systems

Head restraints

N00404300496

Padded head restraints for the seats can reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear.

The head restraints are equipped in the illustrated position.

To maximize the effectiveness of your head restraint, adjust the head restraint to the proper position. For the driver and front passenger, adjust the seatbacks to the upright position before adjusting the head restraints. Sit back against the seatback with your head close to the head restraint.

Line drawing of car seat compartments with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• In order to minimize the risk of a neck injury due to a rear impact, the head restraint must be adjusted to the proper position before vehicle operation. For the driver and front passenger, the seatbacks must be adjusted to the upright position before adjusting the head restraints. The driver should never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.
  ●Driving without the head restraints in place can cause you and your passengers serious injury or death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when the seat is occupied.
  ●Never place a cushion or similar device on the seat-back. This can adversely affect head restraint performance by increasing the distance between your head and the restraint.

Adjustment of the head restraint height

To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, adjust the head restraint height so that the center of the restraint is at your eye level when seated. Any person too tall for the restraint to reach their eye level when seated should raise the restraint to the highest locked position.

●To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
●To lower the restraint, push down on it while pressing the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrow.
●After adjusting the height, push down on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

Diagram showing two views of a car seat with arrows indicating motion, no text or symbols present

To remove

Press the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrow. Then pull the head restraint up and out of the seatbacks.

Diagram of a car seat with labeled components and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols beyond labels)

WARNING

●To help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident, the head restraints must be properly installed and positioned to proper height before vehicle operation.

To install

First check that the head restraint is facing in the right direction as shown in the previous illustration, and then insert it into the seatback. Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint locks into place.

Seat and restraint systems

CAUTION

- Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out as shown in the illustration. Then pull the head restraint up to make sure that it is locked in place and will not come out of the seatback.

CAUTION

●The shape and size of the head restraint differs according to the seat. Always use the correct head restraint provided for the seat and do not install the head restraint in the wrong direction.

AA0094713

Simple line drawing of a human figure with no text or symbols

Simple line drawing of a human figure with a rounded head and curved body (no text or symbols)

AA0095013

Seat belts

N00406000282

Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help reduce the risk of injury to the driver and passenger in the event of an accident. Always use the provided seat belts.

Carefully review the following information for proper seat belt usage.

WARNING

●To help reduce the risk of injury or death in an accident, seat belts and child restraints must always be used. Refer to “Child restraints” on page 2-25 for additional information.
●Never use one seat belt for more than one person.
●Never carry more people in your vehicle than there are seat belts.
●Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
●Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put it behind you or under your arm.
●Always wear the lap belt as low as possible across your hips, not around your waist.
●Never modify or alter the seat belts in your vehicle.
- To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver's air bag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

●To reduce the risk to a front seat passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying air bag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated all the way back and upright in their seat, and moves the seat as far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag” on page 2-35 for additional information.
●Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.
●Children 12 years old and under should always ride in the rear seat and be properly restrained. This reduces their risk of serious injury or death in an accident, especially due to a deploying front passenger air bag. Refer to “Child restraints” on page 2-25 for additional information.
●Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system. Children 12 years old and under should be seated only in the rear seat to reduce their risk of serious injury or death in an accident, especially from the deployment of a front passenger air bag.
●Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing child safety seat and positioned in the rear seat.
●In the event of an accident, all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attachment hardware, should be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to determine whether replacement is necessary.

Seat and restraint systems

Seat belt instructions

N00406200330

All seats are equipped with a seat belt which uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with an emergency locking retractor.

This system is designed to provide both comfort and safety. It permits full extension and automatic retraction of the belts during normal vehicle operation. A sensing device inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the retractor in the event of a sudden change in the vehicle's motion.

NOTE

- For instructions on installing a child restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to “Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt” on page 2-31.

1. Occupants should always sit back in their seats with their backs against the upright seatback. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death during deployment of the air bag, adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle. The front passenger seat should also be moved as far back as possible. Refer to "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag" on page 2-35. Also refer to "To adjust the seat forward or backward" on page 2-5.

Line drawing of a person sitting with hands near a chair (no text or symbols)

WARNING

●To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion.

Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death.

Seat and restraint systems

1. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the webbing so that it easily pulls across your body.

Illustration of a person receiving medical or surgical pressure, showing hand placement and tool (no text or symbols)

AA0011532

Seat and restraint systems

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate. Push the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click". Pull up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is locked securely in the buckle.

Line drawing of a person wearing a seatbelt with a diagonal brace, no text or symbols present

1. The lap part of the belt must always be worn low and snug across the hips. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to take up any slack in the lap belt.

Illustration of a person sitting on a seat using a bandage device, no text or symbols present

NOTE

- If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled out, pull it once with force and let it retract all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

NOTE

●With the exception of the seat belt for the driver, the seat belts in all other seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function (see page 2-31). When the ALR function has been activated, the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.

WARNING

• Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and is worn as low as possible across the hips, not around the waist. Failure to follow this instruction will increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.

• Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt performance.

• To release the belt, press the button on the buckle and allow the belt to retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists in the webbing. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Driver's seat belt reminder/warning light

N00418400238

A tone and warning light are used to remind the driver to fasten the seat belt.

When the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the warning light will come on and a tone will sound for about 6 seconds. If the driver's seat belt remains unfastened approximately 1 minute later, the warning light will flash and the tone will sound intermittently (12 times each) when the vehicle is driven. If the driver subsequently unfastens the seat belt while driving, the warning light and tone will issue further warnings. And if the seat belt remains unfastened, the warning light and tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a stop. When the seat belt is fastened, the warnings will stop.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

●In order to reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, always wear your own seat belt. Do not allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or she is also seated and wearing a seat belt. Children should additionally be restrained in a secure child restraint system.

Front passenger seat belt warning light

N00418300149

The front passenger seat belt warning light is located between the central vents in the instrument panel.

The light normally comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and goes off a few seconds later. The light comes on when a person sits on the front passenger seat but does not fasten the seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is subsequently fastened.

WARNING

●Do not install any accessory or sticker that makes the light difficult to see.

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (front seats)

N00406300272

To move the anchor down, press the lock knob (A) and slide the anchor down to the desired position.

To move the anchor up, slide the anchor up to the desired position.

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

WARNING

●Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder without touching your neck. The shoulder belt should not be able to fall off your shoulder. Failure to follow this instruction can adversely affect seat belt performance and increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.
- Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when the vehicle is not in motion.
●Make sure the anchor is securely locked in position after adjusting it.

Seat and restraint systems

Seat belt extender

N00406700162

When your seat belt, even fully extended, is not long enough, a seat belt extender must be obtained. The extender may be used for either of the front seats.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

AA0011574

WARNING

●The extender should only be used if the existing belt is not long enough. Anyone who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an extender can adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.
- When not required, the extender must be removed and stowed.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

N01406800105

Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, pregnant women are more likely to be seriously injured or killed in an accident if they do not wear seat belts.

WARNING

●To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to pregnant women and unborn children in an accident, pregnant women should always wear a seat belt. The lap portion of the seat belt should be worn snug and low across the hips and below the rounding. Consult your doctor if you have any additional questions or concerns.

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

N00417700524

The driver's and front passenger's seats each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner system.

Pre-tensioner system

The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner system. In moderate-to-severe frontal collisions or when a rollover or overturning of the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner system operates simultaneously with the deployment of the front air bags or curtain air bags.

The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within the seat belt retractors (A). When activated, the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt webbing and increase seat belt performance.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond label)

Seat and restraint systems

The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes the following components:

1- SRS warning light
2- Front impact sensors
3- Seat belt pre-tensioners
4- Seat belt buckle switches
5- Air bag control unit

The air bag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "START" position. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring.

The pre-tensioner seat belts will operate only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "START" position.

Seat and restraint systems

When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, some smoke is released and a loud noise will be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, as it may cause some temporary irritation to people with breathing problems.

Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may not activate in certain collisions, even though the vehicle may appear to be severely damaged. Such non-activation does not mean that something is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather that the collision forces were not severe enough to activate it.

WARNING

●The seat belt pre-tensioner system is designed to work only once. After the seat belt pre-tensioners have been activated, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire seat belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

SRS warning light

N00408700052

This warning light tells you if there is a problem involving the SRS air bags and the pre-tensioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warning light” on page 2-44.

Force limiter system

N00408900083

In the event of an accident, the seat belt force limiter system will help reduce the force applied to the driver and front seat passenger.

Child restraints

N00407100639

When transporting infants or small children in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint system must always be used. This is required by law in the U.S. and Canada.

Child restraints specifically designed for infants and small children are offered by several manufacturers. Choose only a child restraint system with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions Safety Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufacturer's statement of compliance on the box and child restraint itself.

The child restraint system should be appropriate for your child's weight and height, and should properly fit your vehicle's seat.

For detail information, refer to the instruction manual accompanying the child restraint system.

Guidelines for child restraint system selection

All children should be properly restrained in a restraint device that offers the maximum protection for their size and age.

Be sure to check local, state, or provincial requirements for child size and age that may vary from the recommendations listed below.

●Children less than 1 year old and children less than 20 pounds (9 kg) MUST ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.
●Children older than 1 year of age and who weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must be in a forward-facing restraint used only in the rear seat.

Seat and restraint systems

Children who weigh more than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should use a suitable child seat or a booster seat (including a booster cushion) in the rear seat until the vehicle's lap/shoulder belt fits them properly.

WARNING

●All children must be seated in the rear seat, and properly restrained. Accident statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat, rather than in the front seat.
- Any child who is too large to use a child restraint should ride in the rear seat and wear the lap and shoulder belt properly. The shoulder belt must be positioned over the shoulder and across the chest, not across their neck, and with the lap belt positioned low on the child's hips, not across their stomach. If necessary, a booster seat (including a booster cushion) should be used to help achieve a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster seat (including a booster cushion) manufacturer's instructions. Only use a booster seat (including a booster cushion) that is certified as complying with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions Safety Regulations.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

●Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING

●Your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger air bag. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS or INFANT RESTRAINTS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger air bag. During deployment of the air bag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraints or infant restraints must only be used in the rear seat.

WARNING

●FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS should always be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If one must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child.

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat with a dashed arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

AA0017130

WARNING

• It is important to use an approved rear-facing infant restraint until the infant is one year old (unless the infant outgrows the seat sooner). This allows the infant's neck and spine to develop enough to support the weight of their head in the event of an accident.
• When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer and follow the directions in this manual. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death to your child in an accident or sudden stop.
  ●After installation, push and pull the child restraint system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the child or other occupants in the event of an accident or sudden stop.
• When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt, or remove it from the vehicle, in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident.

Seat and restraint systems

NOTE

Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it in the rear seat to make sure there is a good fit. Because of the location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some manufacturer's child restraint systems.

If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has been tightened, choose another manufacturer's child restraint system.

Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the child restraint system that you have, the child restraint can be attached using one of the following two methods:

• To the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the child restraint is compatible with the LATCH system (See page 2-30).
• To the seat belt (See page 2-31).

Installing a child restraint system using the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for children) system

N00418800027

Lower anchor locations

The outboard seating positions in the rear seat of your vehicle are equipped with lower anchors for attaching child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system.

NOTE

●The symbols on the seatback show the location of the lower anchor points.

Tether anchor locations

N00418900158

Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the headliner, located above the rear seat. These are for securing a child seat tether strap to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your vehicle.

Interior view of a car with seats and overhead lights, showing a person sleeping down on the seat (no text or symbols)

Seat and restraint systems

Examples of child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system

N00419000143

A: Rear-facing child restraint

B: Front-facing child restraint

C: Child restraint system lower anchor connectors

D: Tether strap

(These are only examples.)

Seat and restraint systems

Using the LATCH system

N00419100098

1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, remove the head restraint from the location where you wish to install the child restraint.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).

2

1. Push the anchor connectors on the child restraint system into the lower anchors (C) in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Remember, the lower anchors provided with your vehicle are designed to secure suitable child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system in the outboard positions of the rear seat only. The anchor connectors are NOT designed to secure a suitable child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat.

NOTE

In order to secure a child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system, use the lower anchor points in the outboard positions of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the vehicle's seat belt. The vehicle's seat belt, however, MUST be used to secure a child restraint system in the center position of the rear seat.

WARNING

• If there is any foreign material in or around the lower anchors, remove it before installing the child restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is away from, not looped through or otherwise interfering with, the child restraint system. If foreign matter is not removed and/or the seat belt interferes with the child restraint system, the child restraint system will not be secured properly, could detach and move forward in the event of sudden braking or an accident, and could result in injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
  ●When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust the seat where the child restraint system is installed.

• Open the cover for the tether anchor by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (4).

• Latch the tether strap hook (D) of the child restraint system to the tether anchor (E) as illustrated below (5) and tighten the tether strap so it is securely fastened.

1. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to be sure it is firmly secured.

WARNING

●Child restraint tether anchors are designed only to withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Seat and restraint systems

Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt (with emergency/automatic locking mechanism)

N00407300312

With the exception of the driver, the seat belt in all other seating positions can be converted from normal Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. This means that when you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function. Always use the ALR child restraint installation function when you install a child restraint system using the seat belt.

Children 12 years old and under should always be restrained in the rear seat, whenever possible, although the front passenger seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.

WARNING

- When you install a child restraint system using the seat belt, always make sure the retractor has been switched to the ALR child restraint installation function. The ALR function will keep the child restraint system tightly secured to the seat. Failure to convert the retractor to the ALR function may allow the child restraint system to move forward during sudden braking or an accident, resulting in serious injury or death to the child or other occupants.

Seat and restraint systems

Installation

1. Place the child restraint system in a rear seating position.
2. Route the seat belt through the child restraint system according to the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. Then insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure you hear a "click" when you insert the latch plate into the buckle.

Illustration of a person kneeling to lift a car seat, with motion arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. To activate the ALR child restraint installation function, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out of the retractor until it stops. Then let the belt feed back into the retractor.

Line drawing of a person kneeling beside a car seatbelt, holding the seats (no text or symbols)

1. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is in the ALR function, you will not be able to pull it out. If the webbing can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR function has not been activated and you will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.

2. After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt allowing the slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child restraint system will not be secure. It may help to put your weight on the child restraint system and/or push on its seatback while pulling up on the belt. (see illustration).

Illustration of a person performing a physical maneuver with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Seat and restraint systems

If your child restraint system requires the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in accordance with the following procedures. (For the tether anchor locations, refer to “Tether anchor locations” on page 2-29.)

1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, remove the head restraint from the location where you wish to install the child restraint system.
2. Open the cover for the tether anchor by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (7).
3. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint system to the tether anchor (B) as illustrated below (8) and tighten the tether strap so it is securely fastened.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

●Child restraint tether anchors are designed only to withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

1. Before putting your child in the restraint, push and pull the restraint in all directions to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this before each use. If the child restraint system is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 through 8.
2. To remove a child restraint system from the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, remove the child from the restraint. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt from the restraint and let the belt fully retract.

Children who have outgrown child restraint systems

N00407600533

Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses their stomach, a commercially available booster seat (including a booster cushion) must be used, to raise the child so that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the lap belt remains positioned low across their hips. The booster seat (including a booster cushion) should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Cushions Safety Regulations.

WARNING

●Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system, to reduce their risk of serious injury or death in an accident.
●A child should never be left unattended in, or unsupervised, around your vehicle. When you leave the vehicle always take the child out as well.
●Children can die from heat stroke if left or trapped inside the vehicle, especially on hot days.
- Keep your vehicle locked when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children.

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

N00407000221

The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow them to retract until completely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts. The color may rub off and the webbing strength may be affected.

Regularly check your seat belt buckles and their release mechanisms for positive engagement and release of the latch plate. Check the retractors for automatic locking when in the Automatic Locking Retractor function.

The entire seat belt assembly should be replaced if the webbing shows any obvious cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any section of the webbing from broken fibers, or severe fading from sunlight. All of these conditions indicate a weakening of the belt, which may adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.

WARNING

- Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the seat belt assemblies. This work should be done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer perform the work could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could result in a serious injury or death in an accident.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - air bag

N00407700648

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), which includes air bags for the driver and passengers.

The SRS front air bags are designed to supplement the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems by providing those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS driver and front passenger air bags, together with sensors at the front of the vehicle and sensors attached to the front seats, form an advanced air bag system.

The SRS side air bags and the curtain air bags are also designed to supplement the seat belts. The SRS side air bags provide the driver and front passenger with protection against chest injuries by deploying the bag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions. The SRS curtain air bags provide the driver and passengers on the front seat and second row outboard seat with protection against head injuries by deploying a bag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions and by deploying both bags when a roll-over is detected.

The SRS air bags are NOT a substitute for use of the seat belts. For maximum protection in all types of accidents, seat belts must ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or rides in this vehicle (with infants and small children in an appropriate child restraints in the rear seat, and older children buckled in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraints” on page 2-25.

WARNING

●IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY EVEN WITH AN AIR BAG.

• Seat belts help keep the driver and passengers properly positioned. This reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, and reduces the risk of serious injuries or death when the air bags inflate.
  During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained or improperly restrained driver or passengers can move forward into direct contact with, or within close proximity to, the air bag when it begins to inflate.
  The beginning stage of air bag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injuries or death if the occupant comes in contact with the air bag at this time.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in rear impact collisions, and in lower-speed frontal collisions because the air bags are not designed to inflate in those situations.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle in a collision or rollover.

WARNING

●IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED.

• A driver or front passenger sitting too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during air bag deployment can be seriously injured or killed.
• Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force. If the driver and front passenger are not properly seated and restrained, the air bag may not provide the proper protection and can cause serious injuries or death when it inflates.
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death due to a deploying driver's air bag, always properly wear your seat belt and adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible, maintaining a position that still allows the driver to have good control of the steering wheel, brake, accelerator, and other vehicle controls.
• To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying passenger's air bag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated upright and all the way back in the seat, and positions the seat as far back as possible.
• Seat all infants and children in the rear seat, properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.

WARNING

●Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force. Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or the instrument panel.
●Do not put your feet or legs on or against the instrument panel.

WARNING

- Infants and small children should never ride unrestrained, or lean against the instrument panel. They should never ride held in your arms or on your lap. They can be seriously injured or killed in an accident, especially when the air bags inflate. Infants and children should be properly seated in the rear seat in an appropriate child restraint system. Refer to "Child restraints" on page 2-25.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

●NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS or INFANT RESTRAINTS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger air bag. During deployment of that air bag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraints or infant restraints must only be used in the rear seat.

WARNING

●FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS should be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If they must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child.

Illustration of a baby sitting in a car seat with a dashed arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Older children should be seated in the rear seat with their seat belt properly worn, and with an appropriate booster seat (including a booster cushion) if needed. Refer to "Children who have outgrown child restraint systems" on page 2-34.

How the Supplement Restraint System works

N00407800346

The SRS includes the following components:

1- Driver's air bag
2- SRS warning light
3- Passenger's air bag off indicator
4- Passenger's front air bag
5- Front impact sensors
6- Driver's seat position sensor
7- Passenger's seat weight sensors
8- Air bag control unit

Seat and restraint systems

9- Side air bag modules
10- Curtain air bag modules
11- Side impact sensors

The air bag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "START" position. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring.

The air bags will operate only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "START" position.

Seat and restraint systems

When the impact sensors detect a sufficient front or side impact to deploy the air bag(s), the appropriate air bag(s) will be deployed.

When the air bag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy.

When air bags deploy, some smoke is released accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale the smoke as it may cause temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems.

After deployment, the air bags will quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bags inflated.

Air bag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, and does not prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION

●Air bags inflate very quickly and with great force. In certain situations, contact with an inflating air bag may cause small cuts, abrasions, and bruises.

Event Data Recording

N01418600054

Your vehicle is equipped with an “EDR” - Event Data Recorder which is capable of collecting and storing data in the event of an air bag deployment.

The EDR may record the following information:

●Condition of specific vehicle systems;
●Whether the driver and front passenger seat belts were buckled;
●Diagnostic code(s)

Driver's seat position sensor

N00417900092

The driver's seat position sensor is attached to the seat rail and provides the air bag control unit with information on the seat's fore-aft position. The air bag control unit controls deployment of the driver's front air bag in accordance with the information it receives from this sensor.

If there is a problem involving the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to "SRS warning light" on page 2-44.

WARNING

• If the SRS warning light comes on, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.
• Please observe the following instructions to ensure that the driver's seat position sensor can operate correctly.

- Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to “Front seat” on page 2-3.

- Do not recline the seatback more than necessary when driving.

- Do not place metallic objects or luggage under the front seat.

- If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the sensor inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

Passenger's seat weight sensors

N0041S0001S8

The passenger's seat weight sensors are attached to the seat rails and provide the air bag control unit with information regarding the weight on the front passenger seat. The air bag control unit controls deployment of the passenger's front air bag in accordance with the information it receives from this sensor.

The passenger's front air bag will not deploy in an impact when the weight on the seat is sensed to be less than approximately 66 pounds (30 kg). In this case, the passenger's air bag off indicator will come on.

Refer to "Passenger's air bag off indicator" on page 2-43.

If there is a problem involving the passenger's seat weight sensors, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to “SRS warning light” page 2-44.

WARNING

- If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible:

• The SRS warning light does not initially come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" or "START" position.
• The SRS warning light does not go out after several seconds.
• The SRS warning light comes on while you are driving.

WARNING

• To ensure that the passenger's seat weight sensors can correctly sense the weight being applied to the seat, observe the following instructions. Failure to follow these instructions can adversely affect the performance of the passenger's air bag system.
• Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to “Front seat” on page 2-3.
• Do not recline the seatback more than necessary.
• Never have more than one person (adult or child) sitting on the seat.
• Do not place anything between the seat and the floor console.
• Do not hang anything on the front passenger's seatback.
• Do not remove the head restraints.
• When attaching a child restraint system, secure it firmly.
• Do not place luggage or other objects on the seat.
• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
• Do not modify or replace the seat and seat belt.
• Do not place luggage or other objects under the seat.
• Do not place the floor mat on the seat rails.
• Do not expose the sensors to liquids or vapors.
• Do not subject the sensors to shock.
• Do not allow rear-seat occupants to push the front passenger seat with their feet or force the front passenger seat upward.
• Do not allow rear-seat occupants to grasp the front passenger's seatback or put their arms around it.
• When attaching a child restraint system in the rear seat, make sure it does not interfere with the front seat.

WARNING

- If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the sensors inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

Passenger's air bag off indicator

N00418100235

The passenger's air bag off indicator is located between the central vents in the instrument panel.

The indicator normally comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and goes out a few seconds later. In the following situations, the indicator will stay on to show that the passenger's front air bag is not operational.

• The passenger's seat weight sensors sense a weight of less than approximately 66 pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger seat.
  ●The front passenger's seat is not occupied.

When the weight applied to the front passenger seat is sensed to be approximately 66 pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes out to show that the passenger's front air bag is operational.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

- If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have the air bag system in your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible:

• The passenger's air bag off indicator comes on when an adult is sitting on the front passenger seat.
• The passenger's air bag off indicator does not come on when the front passenger's seat is not occupied.
• The passenger's air bag off indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The passenger's air bag off indicator comes on and goes out repeatedly.

- Do not attach any accessory to your vehicle that makes the passenger's air bag off indicator difficult or impossible to see.

You must be able to see the passenger's air bag off indicator and verify the status of the passenger's air bag system.

Seat and restraint systems

SRS warning light

N00408300393

There is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. The system checks itself each time the ignition is turned on.

When the ignition key is in the "ON" or "START" position, the SRS warning light should come on for several seconds and then go out. This means the system is working properly.

If there is a problem involving one or more of the SRS components, the warning light will come on and stay on.

The SRS warning light is shared by the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and the seat belt pre-tensioner system.

WARNING

- If any of the following conditions occur, the SRS and/or seat belt pre-tensioners are not working properly and you should immediately have it inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer:

• The SRS warning light does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" or "START" position.
• The SRS warning light does not go out after several seconds.
  • The SRS warning light comes on while driving.

Driver's and passenger's front air bag system

N00407900217

The driver's air bag is located under the padded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. The front passenger's air bag is contained in the instrument panel above the glove compartment. The driver's air bag and the front passenger's air bag are designed to deploy at the same time. However, the front passenger's air bag does not deploy when the front passenger seat is not occupied or when the weight sensor in the front passenger seat senses a weight on the seat of less than approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).

Seat and restraint systems

Seat and restraint systems

Deployment of front air bags

N01408000417

The front air bags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...

Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15mph (25 km/h) or higher

Simple line drawing of a car with a light bulb emitting exhaust smoke, no text or symbols present

Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows

Top-down diagram of a car's front view showing dashboard and rearview (no text or symbols)

AA1000542

The front air bags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical condition is shown in the illustration to the left.

The front air bags are designed to deploy only in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions within the shaded area between the arrows in the illustration to the right.

The front air bags will deploy if the impact to the vehicle's main structure is above a specific threshold level. The threshold level is approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If the impact to the vehicle's main structure is below this threshold level, the front air bags may not deploy. This threshold level may also be higher if the vehicle hits something that

absorbs the impact, either by bending or moving (for example, another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard rail).

The beginning stage of air bag inflation is the most forceful, and can cause serious injuries or death if you are too close to the deploying air bag. Accordingly, it is important that you always wear the available seat belt.

The front air bags MAY NOT DEPLOY when ...

In certain types of frontal collisions, the front air bags may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicle's body structure is designed to absorb the impact and deform in order to help protect the occupants. Some typical situations where the front air bags may not deploy are shown in the illustrations.

Because the front air bags do not protect the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object

Side-view line drawing of a car with visible headlights and seat, no text or symbols present

Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck

Line drawing of a car speeding past a truck (no text or symbols)

Oblique frontal impact

Simple line drawing of a car with motion lines indicating speed or airflow (no text or symbols)

AA2000389

Seat and restraint systems

The front air bags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when ...

The front air bags are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations.

Because the front air bags do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

AA2000392

The front air bags MAY DEPLOY when ...

The front air bags may deploy if the underside of the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe impact (undercarriage impact). Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations.

Because the front air bags may deploy in certain types of unexpected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, and these unexpected impacts can move you out of position, it is important to always wear your seat belts properly. When worn properly, seat belts can help maintain your distance from the air bags when they begin to inflate. The beginning stage of air bag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injury or death if you are close to the deploying air bag.

Collision with an elevated median/island or curb

Line drawing of a car on a track with motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

Line drawing of a car speeding on a road with motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground

Line drawing of a car on a slope with motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

AA2000406

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

• Do not attach anything to the steering wheel's padded cover, such as trim material, badges, etc. These could strike and injure an occupant if the air bag inflates.
• Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the instrument panel above the glove compartment. Such items could strike and injure an occupant if the air bag inflates.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a coffee mug and no-smoking symbol (no text or labels)

WARNING

• Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of, the windshield. They could restrict the air bag inflation, or strike and injure an occupant, when the air bag inflates.
  ●Do not place objects, such as packages or pets, between the air bags and the driver or the front passenger. Such objects can adversely affect air bag performance, or cause serious injury or death when the air bag deploys.
• Immediately after air bag inflation, some parts of the air bag system will be hot. Do not touch them. You could be burned.
  ●The air bag system is designed to work only once. After the air bags deploy, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire air bag system must be inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Side air bag system

N00408100362

The side air bags (A) are contained in the driver and front passenger seatbacks.

The side air bag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat.

Seat and restraint systems

A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehicles with side air bags.

Seat and restraint systems

Curtain air bag system

N00419200161

The curtain air bags are contained in the front pillars and roof side rail. The curtain air bag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat.

Also, when the air bag control unit detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy.

2

Line drawing of two people seated in a car, one wearing a headset and the other in a suit (no text or symbols)

WARNING

●The side air bags and curtain air bags can cause serious injury or death to anyone too close to the air bag when it deploys. To reduce the risk of injury from deploying side air bags and curtain air bags, all occupants must be properly restrained and seated well back, upright, and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean against the door.

WARNING

●In order to reduce the risk of injury from a deploying side air bag, do not allow any rear seat passengers to hold onto the back of either front seat. Special care should be taken with children.
- Do not place any objects near or around the front of either front seatback. Such objects can interfere with proper side air bag deployment and cause injury during deployment of the side air bag.
- Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on the back of either front seat. They can interfere with proper side air bag deployment.
- Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats that have side air bags. Covers can interfere with proper side air bag deployment and adversely affect side air bag performance.

WARNING

- Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other object where the curtain air bag (B) deploys, such as on the windshield, side door glass or front and rear pillars and roof side or assist grips. When the curtain air bag inflate, the object may be hurled with great force or the curtain air bag may not inflate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.

Seat and restraint systems

WARNING

• Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object on the coat hook. If the curtain air bag was activated, any such item could be propelled away with great force and could prevent the curtain air bag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.
  ●Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Rear-facing child restraints MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.
  ●Front-facing child restraints should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. If a front-facing child restraint must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, and make sure that the child stays in the child restraint, properly restrained and away from the door.
• Do not allow a child to lean against or sit close to the passenger door, even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. The child's head should also not lean against or be close to the section of the seatback where the side air bag and curtain air bag are located. It is dangerous if the side air bag and curtain air bag deploys. Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead to serious injury or death to the child.
  ●Work done on or in the vicinity of the side air bag and curtain air bag system components should be done only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Improper work methods can cause accidental side air bag and curtain air bag deployment, or render a side air bag and curtain air bag inoperable. Either of these situations can result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

- Do not place luggage heavier that specified on the roof carrier. Such luggage may cause the curtain air bags inflate accidentally, which could result in serious injury or death.

Deployment of side air bag and curtain air bag

N00408200190

The side air bag and curtain air bag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when ...

The side air bag and curtain air bag are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe side impact to the middle of the passenger compartment.

Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy.

The typical situation is shown in the illustration.

Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body's side structure

Top-down line drawing of a car with two cars and motion lines indicating speed or flow (no text or symbols)

When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle (Curtain air bag only)

Simple line drawing of a car speeding with motion lines (no text or symbols)

AA3003576

Seat and restraint systems

The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in an accident. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

The side air bag and curtain air bag MAY NOT DEPLOY when ...

In certain types of side collisions, the side air bag and curtain air bag may not deploy, even if the deformation of the body seems to be large, because the vehicle's body structure is designed to absorb the impact and to deform in order to help protect the occupants. Also, depending on the location of the impact, the side air bags and curtain air bags may not deploy simultaneously. Some typical situations where the side air bag and curtain air bag may not deploy are shown in the illustrations.

Because the side air bags and curtain air bags do not protect the occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

Seat and restraint systems

Side impact in an area away from the passenger compartment

Simple line drawing of two cars with motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collision with the side of vehicle

Line drawing of a person riding a motorcycle on a car, with motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object

Line drawing of a van and a car with exhaust lines, no text or symbols present

AA2000419

Oblique side impact

Line drawing of two cars with radiating lines indicating collision or motion (no text or symbols)

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side air bag only)

Simple line drawing of a car with motion lines indicating speed (no text or symbols)

AA3000490

The side air bag and curtain air bag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when ...

The side air bag and curtain air bag are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations.

Because the side air bags and curtain air bags do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.

AA2001399

Seat and restraint systems

SRS servicing

N00408500643

WARNING

●Any maintenance performed on or near the components of the SRS should be performed only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else to do any service, inspection, maintenance or repair on any SRS components or wiring. Similarly, no part of the SRS should ever be handled, removed or disposed by anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS components or wiring could result in an accidental air bag deployment or could make the SRS inoperable. Either of these situations could result in serious injury or death.
- Do not modify your steering wheel or any other SRS component or related vehicle part. For example, replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications to the front bumper or body structure can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury.
- If your vehicle has received any damage, you should have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to make sure it is in proper working order.
- Do not modify your front seats, center pillar or center console. Such modifications can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury. Also, if you discover any tear or open seam in the seat fabric near the side air bag, have the seat inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

WARNING

- If you find a crack in or damage to the front pillar, rear pillar, or roof side rail where the curtain air bag is located, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

• When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to another person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the applicable sections in this owner's manual.
• If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can be made safe for disposal.

- If any of the following parts needs to be modified for use by a handicapped person, the advanced air bag system will be greatly affected. Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

• Driver's seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt
• Steering wheel
• Instrument panel

[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]

To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P. O. Box 6400

Cypress, CA 90630-0064

[For vehicles sold in Canada]

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 41009

4141 Dixie Road

Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

Seat and restraint systems

[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico]

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Inc.

call 1-800-981-0452 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Inc.

Customer Service Department

P.O. Box 192216

SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

[For vehicles sold in Guam]

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc. call [phone] or write to:

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.

P.O. Box 6066

TAMUNING

GUAM 96931

[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors call [phone] or write to:

Triple J Motors

P.O. Box 500487

SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

[For vehicles sold in American Samoa]

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:

Pacific Marketing, Inc.

P.O. Box 698

PAGO PAGO,

AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799

Seat and restraint systems

Warning labels

N00408600181

Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS are located in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

Interior view of a car dashboard with camera module and buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

*: Located in the passenger's side as well.

Features and controls

Break-in recommendations .....3-2

Keys 3-2

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system). 3-3

Keyless entry system 3-7

Door locks 3-13

Power door locks 3-15

"Child safety locks" for rear door 3-15

Liftgate. 3-16

Inside liftgate release 3-18

Theft-alarm system 3-20

Power windows 3-23

Sunroof (if so equipped) 3-26

Parking brake 3-28

Steering wheel tilt lock lever 3-29

Inside day/night rearview mirror .....3- 30

Outside rearview mirrors .....3- 32

Ignition switch 3-34

Steering wheel lock 3-36

Starting. 3-37

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .....3- 39

Automatic transaxle 3-39

Full-time all-wheel drive (if so equipped) .....3-47

All-wheel drive operation 3-48

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation....3-50

Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive vehicles. 3-51

Service brake 3-53

Anti-lock braking system. 3-54

Power steering system....3-57

Active stability control (ASC) 3-58

Cruise control....3-63

Tire pressure monitoring system ..... 3-69

Rear-view camera (if so equipped) 3-75

Instrument cluster 3-77

Indicator and warning light package ..... 3-82

Indicator 3-83

Warning lights 3-83

Multi center display (if so equipped) 3-86

Combination headlights and dimmer switch. . . . 3-153

Turn signal lever 3-157

Hazard warning flasher switch 3-158

Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..... 3-158

Instrument panel light dimmer control ..... 3-159

Wiper and washer switch 3-159

Electric rear window defogger switch. 3-163

Horn switch 3-164

Hands-free Bluetooth ^® cellular phone interface system with voice recognition (if so equipped) 3-164

Sun visors 3-194

Vanity mirror 3-195

Power outlet (if so equipped) 3-195

Digital clock (if so equipped) 3-197

Interior lights. 3-197

Accessory boxes 3-203

Glove compartment. 3-204

Floor console box/Tissue holder 3-204

Cup holder....3-206

Bottle holder 3-207

Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) 3-207

Tonneau cover (if so equipped). 3-208

Luggage hooks 3-209

Coat hook 3-210

Features and controls

Break-in recommendations

N00508700255

Advanced automobile manufacturing techniques permit you to operate your new vehicle without requiring a long break-in period of low-speed driving.

However, you can add to the future performance and economy of your vehicle by observing the following precautions during the first 300 miles (500 km).

Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during the break-in period.

●Avoid revving the engine.
●Avoid rough driving such as fast starts, sudden acceleration, prolonged high-speed driving and sudden braking. These would have a detrimental effect on the engine and also cause increased fuel and oil consumption, which could result in malfunction of the engine components. Be particularly careful to avoid full acceleration while in low gear.
- Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the seating capacity (See “Cargo load precautions” on page 4-12).
●Refrain from towing a trailer or other vehicle (See "Trailer towing" on page 4-15).

Keys

N01508800474

Two keys are provided.

The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Line drawing of a key inserted into a car key (no text or symbols)

NOTE

●The key number (A) is stamped on the key number plate as shown in the illustration.

Make a record of the key number and store the key and key number plate in separate places, so that you can order a key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer if the original keys are lost.

●The key is a precision electronic device with a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to prevent damage.

- Do not leave where it may be exposed to heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on top of the dashboard.

- Do not take the remote control transmitter apart.

- Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong impacts.

- Keep the remote control transmitter dry.

- Keep away from magnetic objects such as key holders.

- Keep away from devices that produce magnetism, such as audio systems, computers and televisions.

- Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.

- Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high temperature or high humidity.

- As your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer, the engine is designed so that it will not start if the ID code registered in the immobilizer computer and the key's ID code do not match. Refer to the section entitled "Electronic immobilizer" for details and key usage.

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

N00509100618

The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions), using a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle's electronics.

Features and controls

NOTE

●In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to recognize the registered ID code from the key. This means the engine will not start even when the key is turned to the "START" position.

- When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or magnetic object (Type A)

- When the key grip contacts metal of another key (Type B)

- When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizing keys (including keys of other vehicles) (Type C)

●In cases like the above, move the offending object(s) away from the key and turn the key back to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. Then try to start the engine again. If the engine does not start, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

●Electronic immobilizer is not compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
●A system failure is suspected when the ignition key is turned to the “START” position, and the engine does not start. In such a case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

CAUTION

- Do not make any alterations or additions to the immobilizer system. Alterations or additions could cause failure of the immobilizer.

Replacement keys

Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle.

If you lose the key, you can order a key from your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by referring to the key number.

To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the vehicle keys must be changed.

Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.

Additional keys

To add a key, you need to register the ID code to the vehicle. Registering the ID code can be done by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it can be done by yourself (except for vehicles sold in Canada).

For you to register the ID code yourself, follow the "Customer key programming" procedure below.

If you choose to have your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and any remaining keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

●You are provided with 2 keys, but you may add up to 6 more keys.

Customer key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)

You can program new keys to the system if you have 2 valid (already registered) keys and blank (not registered) immobilizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer) by doing the following:

1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the ignition to the "ON" position for 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition to the "LOCK" position and remove the first key.
3. Within 30 seconds of turning the first key to the "LOCK" position, insert the second valid key into the ignition and turn it to the "ON" position. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer indicator will start blinking.

Features and controls

1. When the immobilizer indicator starts blinking, turn the second valid key to the "LOCK" position and remove it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank immobilizer key into the ignition and turn it to the "ON" position. Perform this operation no more than 30 seconds after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking. When registration of the ID code is complete, the immobilizer indicator will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an error occurs, the immobilizer indicator will go off during the procedure.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a car icon and a small connector detail (no text or symbols)

1. If you wish to register another key, perform the process again from step 1.

NOTE

●It is not possible to register a key if:

• the immobilizer indicator goes off during the procedure

- the immobilizer indicator does not come on for 3 seconds after turning the ignition to the "ON" position with a blank immobilizer key

●The procedure will be terminated automatically if:

- a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the first key is turned to the "LOCK" position to the moment when the second key is turned to the "ON" position

- a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the second key is turned to the "LOCK" position to the moment when the blank immobilizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors dealer) is turned to the "ON" position

- more than 30 seconds elapse after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking

General information

Your electronic immobilizer operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

●This device may not cause harmful interference.
●This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

- Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Keyless entry system

N00509000789

Press the remote control transmitter buttons to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.

It can also help you signal for attention by setting off the panic alarm.

1- LOCK ( ) button
2- UNLOCK (button
3- PANIC button
4- Indicator light

To lock

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the doors and the liftgate. When they are locked with the dome light in the "DOOR" position, the dome light will blink once. The turn signal lights will also blink once.

Features and controls

NOTE

- If you press the LOCK button (1) after locking the doors and the liftgate, the horn will sound once to confirm that they are locked.

To unlock

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the driver's door only. Press the UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all the doors and the liftgate.

When the driver's door only or all doors and the liftgate are unlocked with the dome light in the "DOOR" position, the dome light will turn on for 15 seconds. The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

NOTE

- In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to change the settings for unlocking the doors with the remote control transmitter. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

Answerback function

The keyless entry system answerback functions from the horn and turn signal lights can each be turned on or off as desired. This is done with the key removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE

●The answerback function is not provided when the key is in the ignition switch.

Horn deactivation/reactivation

The answerback function can be set in the following three ways.

Each time the answerback function is set, a tone will sound to tell you the condition of the answerback function.

One chime: The horn will sound if the doors and the liftgate are locked with the keyless entry system.

Two chimes: The horn will not sound, even if the doors and the liftgate are locked with the keyless entry system.

Three chimes: The horn will sound if the doors and the liftgate are already locked and the keyless entry system is used.

In this mode, the horn will only sound when the keyless entry LOCK button is pressed again to reconfirm that the doors and the liftgate are locked.

1. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time.

2. Release the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the UNLOCK button in step 1.

NOTE

- In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to change the answerback function provided by the horn. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

Turn signal light deactivation/reactivation

The answerback function from the turn signal lights indicating when the doors and the liftgate are locked or unlocked can be turned on or off separately.

A tone will sound once when the function has been turned on, and twice if it has been turned off.

To deactivate/reactivate the answerback function for locking of the doors and the liftgate, take the following steps:

1. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button (1) during this time.
2. Release the LOCK button and then release the UNLOCK button within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 1.

To deactivate/reactivate the answerback function for unlocking of the doors and the liftgate, take the following steps:

1. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the LOCK button (1) during this time.
2. Release the UNLOCK button and then release the LOCK button within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK button in step 1.

NOTE

- In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to change the answerback function provided by the turn signal lights. For details, refer to "Setting and customization" on page 3-108.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:

1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than 1 second.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will sound intermittently for about 3 minutes.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the remote control transmitter.

NOTE

●The indicator light (4) comes on each time a button is pressed.
●The keyless entry system does not work if the key is in the ignition.
●The remote control transmitter can be used from about 40 feet (12 m) away. However, this distance may change if your vehicle is near a TV transmitting tower, a power station, or a radio station.
- If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when all doors and the liftgate are closed and no doors and the liftgate are opened within about 30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will automatically re-lock.

In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to change the time that elapses until automatic relocking. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

Features and controls

• If the following conditions are observed after pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) button on the remote control transmitter, the battery in the remote control transmitter may need to be replaced.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not come on.
• If you lose your remote control transmitter, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a replacement.
• If you wish to obtain an additional remote control transmitter, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum of 4 remote control transmitters can be programmed for your vehicle.

In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to confirm the number of registered remote control transmitter. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

NOTE

- Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

- Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter battery

1. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the notch in the remote control transmitter case and use it to open the case.

Features and controls

1. Remove the remote control transmitter from the remote control transmitter case. Then, open the remote control transmitter using the method described in step 1.

2. Remove the old battery.

NOTE

- Be sure to perform the procedure with the Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you open the remote control transmitter case, the buttons may come out.

Features and controls

1. Install a new battery with the + side (A) down.

1. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.

2. Place the remote control transmitter in the remote control transmitter case, then securely close the remote control transmitter case.

3. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works.

NOTE

●You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric appliance store.
●Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can replace the battery for you if you prefer.

CAUTION

- When the remote control transmitter case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal components.

Door locks

N00509200417

WARNING

●Make sure all doors are tightly closed and locked while driving.
- Locked doors, in combination with the use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk of ejection in an accident.
- Locked doors can help keep passengers, especially small children, from opening doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
- Locked doors can help prevent outsiders from gaining access to your vehicle when you slow or come to a stop.
●Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. Children who get into unlocked vehicles may not be able to get out. Children trapped inside vehicles can quickly be overcome by heat and suffer serious injury or death due to heat stroke.
●Never leave children unattended inside a vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat stroke, children can activate switches and controls, resulting in an injury or fatal accident.

Features and controls

To lock or unlock the door with the key (driver's door only)

Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the door. After checking that the door is locked, turn the key back to the center and remove it.

1- Insert or remove the key
2-Lock
3- Unlock

Features and controls

To lock or unlock the door from the inside

Move the lock knob to the lock position to lock the door. All doors should be kept locked while driving.

1-Lock
2- Unlock

The driver's door can be unlocked without using the lock knob by pulling on the inside door handle.

To lock the door without using the key

1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked position.
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehicle. Close the door.

Side-by-side comparison of a car's side door and side door, showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Key reminder buzzer

ND15496(K123

If you open the driver's door while the ignition key is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position, a tone will sound, reminding you to remove the key.

Lock out protection

ND1549700111

If the key is in the ignition switch when you push the lock knob forward with the driver's door or passenger's door open, the lock knob will automatically return to the unlocked position.

Power door locks

N00509300476

NOTE

- Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock could activate the power door locking systems built-in protection circuit and prevent the system's from operating. If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the power door lock switch.

To lock and unlock by the power door lock switch

1-Lock

2- Unlock

All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked or unlocked by pressing the power door lock switch on the driver's or the front passenger's door.

Features and controls

"Child safety locks" for rear door

N00509400220

1- To lock

2- To release

Child safety locks help prevent rear passengers, especially children, from opening the rear door using the inside door handle. A lock lever for the child safety lock is provided on each rear door.

When the lever is in the lock position (1), the rear door cannot be opened using the inside door handle.

To open the rear door when the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, pull the outside door handle.

When the lever is in the release position (2), the child safety lock is released and the rear door can be opened using the inside door handle.

Features and controls

WARNING

●Always keep the doors tightly closed and locked when driving. An unlocked door may be accidentally opened by a passenger, especially by a child who could fall out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there is a greater risk of someone being thrown from the vehicle in an accident.

Liftgate

N00510100184

WARNING

• It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and even death.
• When opening and closing the liftgate, make sure that there are no people nearby and be careful not to hit your head or pinch your hands, neck, etc.

CAUTION

- Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns.

NOTE

- Locking/unlocking of the driver's door by using the keyless entry system also locks/unlocks the liftgate.

To open

Pull the liftgate handle upwards to open the liftgate.

Line drawing of a car's front bumper and side grille (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

●Make sure there is no one standing nearby when opening the liftgate.

NOTE

●It is not possible to open the liftgate while the battery is disconnected.

To close

Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illustrated and let it go before the liftgate closes completely. Gently slam the liftgate from the outside so that it is completely closed.

CAUTION

●To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not attempt to close the liftgate without letting go of the liftgate grip.
●Before starting the vehicle, be sure to confirm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate opens while driving the vehicle, objects stored in the luggage area could fall out onto the road.

Features and controls

NOTE

●Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations illustrated to support the liftgate. Please observe the following in order to prevent damage or improper operation:

• Do not hold the gas struts when closing the liftgate. Also, do not push or pull the gas struts.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape, etc., to the gas struts.
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts.

Line drawing of a car trunk with open lid and attached suspension system, labeled B (no text or symbols beyond label)

Inside liftgate release

ND0509800152

The inside liftgate release is designed to provide a way to open the liftgate in the case of discharged battery.

The liftgate release lever (see illustration) is mounted on the liftgate.

You and your family should familiarize yourselves with the location and operation of the liftgate release lever.

To open

1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate.

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

Features and controls

1. Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the opening. Then push on it to unlock the liftgate.

1. Push out on the liftgate to open the liftgate.

CAUTION

●Always keep the release lever lid on liftgate closed when driving so that your cargo cannot accidentally bump the lever and open the liftgate.

Features and controls

Theft-alarm system

NO0510200114

The theft-alarm system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the second is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “disarmed” stage. If triggered, the system provides both audible and visual alarm signals.

Armed stage

ND1510300128

Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Make sure that the engine hood is locked.
3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by power door lock switch or the remote control transmitter.

Arm the system and leave.

Simple line drawing of a car and a walking person (no text or symbols)

AA0010971

NOTE

●The system is also armed by locking your vehicle using the following procedures when you leave the vehicle.

• With either the driver's door or passenger's door open, set the inside lock knobs on both doors to the locked position and then close the door.
• With either the driver's door or passenger's door open, lock all doors and the liftgate using the power door lock switch and then close the door.

After completion of the steps above, the theft-alarm indicator (A) will illuminate for approximately 20 seconds and keeps blinking on and off, indicating that the system is armed.

Technical diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond labels)

NOTE

●The system will be armed even if the engine hood is open, but when the system is set, be sure that the engine hood is locked.
●The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm indicator (located in the front center of the dashboard) is illuminated, all doors or the liftgate is unlocked by remote control transmitter.
●The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the ignition key is turned to the "ON" or "ACC".
●The system will not be armed if a door is not completely closed. If this happens, rearm the system as described above.
●The driver should not arm the system until first confirming that all passengers have left the vehicle. If the driver arms the system with passenger(s) in the vehicle, the alarm may be activated when the passenger(s) open the door.

Alarm stage

N00510400129

The alarm will be activated if any of the following occur while the vehicle is parked and the system is armed.

1. One of the doors or the liftgate is opened without the remote control transmitter.
2. The engine hood is opened from the outside.

Type of alarm

When the alarm is activated:

1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 minutes.
   After 3 minutes the headlights automatically shut off.
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3 minutes.

NOTE

●The alarm will continue to operate for 3 minutes. At the end of that period, the alarm will automatically shut off to save battery power. The system will then be rearmed until the proper disarming step is taken.

Alarm deactivation

The alarm can be deactivated in the following ways.

●By using the remote control transmitter to lock or unlock the door or the liftgate.
●Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.

Features and controls

Disarmed stage

N00510500117

The system will be disarmed when either of the following steps are taken:

1. All doors or the liftgate is unlocked by the remote control transmitter.
2. The ignition key is turned to the "ACC" or "ON" position.
3. If the UNLOCK button is pressed when all doors and the liftgate are closed and no door is opened within approximately 30 seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.

Disarm...by remote control transmitter

Line drawing of a person standing beside a car door with a sensor icon (no text or symbols)

AA0071224

NOTE

●Once the system has been disarmed, it cannot be rearmed except by repeating the arming procedure.

Testing the theft-alarm system

ND0510600075

Use the following procedure to test the system:

1. Lower the driver's window.
2. Arm the system as explained in "Armed stage".
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator comes on and flash in approximately 20 seconds.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the driver's side door by using the inside door lock knob and opening the door.
5. Check to be sure that the horn sounds intermittently and the headlights blink on and off when the door is opened.
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors or the liftgate by the remote control transmitter or using the key.

NOTE

●To make sure the alarm sounds when the engine hood is opened, open the engine hood by using the engine hood release lever when the system is in the “armed” stage.

Power windows

N00510800309

1- Open (down)
2- Close (up)

NOTE

●Never try to operate the main switch and sub switch in different directions at the same time. This will freeze the window in position.
●Operating the power windows repeatedly with the engine stopped will run down the battery. Use the window switches only while the engine is running.

WARNING

●Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.
●Never leave the vehicle without removing the key.
●Never leave a child alone in the vehicle.

Features and controls

Main switch

The main switch located on the driver's door can be used to operate all the door windows.

The windows will move while the switch is pressed and stop when the switch is released.

1- Driver's door window switch
(To open the driver's door window all the way, you do not need to hold the switch down for the entire time.)
2- Front passenger door window switch
3- Left rear door window switch
4- Right rear door window switch
5- Window lock switch

Sub switch

1-Close
2-Open

Each sub switch can be used for its own passenger door window, unless the driver's window lock switch is activated.

NOTE

●The rear door windows open only half-way.

Timer function

The power windows can be run up or down when the ignition key is in the "ON" position.

The door windows can be opened or closed for a 30 seconds period after the ignition key is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. However, once the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened, the power windows cannot be operated.

Features and controls

Lock switch

N00549000039

When this switch is in the lock mode, the passenger door switches cannot be used to open or close the door windows, and the main switch will open or close only the driver's door window. To unlock the switch, press it again.

1-Lock
2- Unlock

WARNING

●Before driving with a child in the vehicle, be sure to lock the window switch to make it inoperative. Children tampering with the switch could easily trap their hands or heads in the window.

What to do if you hear wind buffeting when driving

N00551400014

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a booming or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting when driving with one or both rear door windows down or partially opened. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear door windows open, open the front door windows as well as the rear door windows to minimize the condition.

Features and controls

Sunroof (if so equipped)

N00511000526

WARNING

●Do not stick your head, hands or anything else in the sunroof opening.
●Before operating the sunroof, make sure that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.).
●Never leave a child (or other person who is incapable of safely operating the sunroof switch) alone in the vehicle.

3

The sunroof can be opened and closed with the ignition key in the "ON" position.

To open

Press the switch (1), the sunroof automatically opens and the sunroof will stop several centimeters this side of the full open position. Press the switch (1) again, and the sunroof will be fully open.

To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch.

NOTE

●The sunroof stops just before reaching the fully open position. If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in this position, wind buffeting is lower than with the sunroof fully open.

To close

The sunroof closes while the switch (3) is pressed.

To tilt up

When the switch (2) is pressed, the rear edge of sunroof raises for ventilation.

To tilt down

Press the switch (3).

Timer function

The sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. The sunroof can be opened or closed for a 30 seconds period after the ignition switch is turned off. However, once the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operated until the ignition switch is turned on again.

Safety mechanism

If a hand or head is trapped in the closing sunroof opening, the safety mechanism will cause the sunroof to re-open automatically. The opened sunroof will become operational again after a few seconds.

If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or more times consecutively, normal closing of the sunroof will be aborted. To return the sunroof to normal operation:

1. Press the switch (3) repeatedly, setting the sunroof in the tilt up position.
2. Once the tilt up position has been reached, press and hold the switch (3) for at least 3 seconds.
3. Press the switch (3) again to fully close the sunroof.
4. After pressing the switch (1) to perform full opening, press the switch (3) to fully close the sunroof.

NOTE

- Do not stop the sunroof before it is completely opened or closed in steps 3 and 4 above. If this should happen repeat the process from step 1.

CAUTION

●The safety mechanism is deactivated just before the sunroof closes. This allows the sunroof to close completely. Therefore be especially careful that fingers are not trapped in the sunroof opening.

1. The sunroof should now operate in the normal manner.

NOTE

• When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to close the sunroof and remove the ignition key.
• Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is frozen closed (after snowfall or during extreme cold).
• Do not sit on or place heavy luggage on the sunroof or roof opening edge.
• Do not apply any force that may cause damage to the sun-roof.
  ●Release the switch when the sunroof has reached a completely open or completely closed position.
• If the sunroof does not operate when the sunroof switch is operated, release the switch and check whether something is trapped by the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, have the sunroof checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
• Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if a ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed. Depending on the model of ski carrier or roof carrier, the sunroof may contact the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up.
• Be sure to close the sunroof completely when washing the vehicle or when leaving the vehicle.
• Do not put any wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber) around the sunroof opening. If it is waxed, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
  ●After washing the vehicle or after rain be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.
• Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof only while the engine is running.

Features and controls

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened or closed manually while the sun-roof is closed.

When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade will also open automatically.

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, seatbelt, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

- Do not attempt to close the sunshade when the sun-roof is opened.

●Be careful that hands are not trapped when closing the sunshade.

NOTE

- Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before closing the sun-shade.

Parking brake

N00511400184

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then set the selector lever to "P" (PARK) position.

To apply

Hold the brake pedal (A) down with your right foot.

Fully depress the parking brake pedal (B) with your left foot.

NOTE

●Be aware that if you step on the parking brake pedal after the parking brake has been applied, this will release the parking brake.

If you want to reapply the parking brake, release the brake once, and step on the pedal again.

Features and controls

To release

Hold the brake pedal (A) down with your right foot.

Depress the parking brake pedal (B) by your left foot again until you hear it "click".

Illustration of a car's seatbelt mechanism showing clockwise shift and turn-up motion (no text or symbols)

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade, away from the curb on an uphill grade.

CAUTION

●Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and brake warning light is off. If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake, the brakes will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and possible brake failure.

Steering wheel tilt lock lever

N00511500097

To adjust the steering wheel height, release the tilt lock lever while holding the steering wheel by hand, and raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired height.

After adjustment, securely lock the lever by pulling it downward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift (no text or symbols visible)

1- Locked

2- Released

Features and controls

WARNING

●After adjusting, make sure the lock lever is secured in the locked (1) position.
- Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving. This can be dangerous.
- When releasing the tilt lock lever {moving it to the position (2)}, be sure to hold the steering wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering wheel may slip down too suddenly.

Inside day/night rearview mirror

N00511600216

Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after making any seat adjustments so as to have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Do not attempt to adjust the inside rearview mirror while driving. This can be dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driving.

Features and controls

Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the view through the rear window.

To adjust the vertical mirror position

It is possible to move the mirror up and down to adjust its position.

Diagram of a hand holding a car with a curved arrow indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

To reduce the glare

The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving.

1-Daytime position
2- Night position

Features and controls

Outside rearview mirrors

N00512200020

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after making any seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirrors while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driving.
• Your passenger's side mirror is convex. The objects you see in the mirror will look smaller and farther away than they appear in a regular flat mirror. Do not use this mirror to estimate the distance of vehicles following you when changing lanes.

To adjust the mirror position

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

Move the lever (A) to the same side as the mirror you wish to adjust.

L- Left outside mirror adjustment
R- Right outside mirror adjustment

Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror position.

1-Up
2-Down
3-Right
4- Left

NOTE

●After adjusting, return the lever to the “•” (off) position.

Features and controls

To fold the mirror

The outside mirror can be folded in toward the side window to prevent damage when parking in tight locations.

Diagram of a car side mirror with dashed lines indicating rotation, no text or symbols present

Heated mirror (if so equipped)

N00549300058

When the rear window defogger switch is pressed, the outside rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Current will flow through the heater element inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or condensation.

The indicator light (C) will illuminate while the defogger is on. The heater will be turned off automatically in about 17 minutes.

Diagram of three circular components with internal features and a labeled component 'C' (no text or symbols beyond label)

Features and controls

Ignition switch

N00512400530

LOCK

The engine is off and the steering wheel is locked. The key can be inserted and removed only when the switch is in this position.

ACC

Allows operation of electrical accessories with the engine off.

ON

The engine runs and all accessories can be used.

START

Engages the starter. After the engine starts, release the key and it will return automatically to the "ON" position.

NOTE

- If your vehicle is equipped with ignition switch illumination, the ignition switch will be illuminated:

• The ignition switch illumination comes on while the driver's door is opened and remains on for about 30 seconds after the driver's door is closed.
• When you remove the ignition key from the ignition switch, it will be illuminated for about 30 seconds.

However, it will go off even while the illumination comes on if the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position.

- Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code which the transponder inside the key sends must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer.

(Refer to the section "Electronic immobilizer" on page 3-3.)

- Your vehicle is equipped with Daytime Running Lights. When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the low beam of the headlight will illuminate dimly. (Refer to “Combination headlights and dimmer switch” on page 3-153.)

To remove the key

N00550900012

First set the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position, and then turn the key to the "LOCK" position and remove it.

NOTE

●The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set in the "P" (PARK) position.

CAUTION

- If the engine is turned off while driving, the power brake booster will stop functioning and braking efficiency will be reduced. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater effort to manually steer the vehicle.

Features and controls

CAUTION

- Do not leave the key in the "ON" position for a long time when the engine is not running. This will cause the battery to run down.

●Do not turn the key to the "START" position when the engine is running. It will damage the starter motor.

Key reminder buzzer

N(01551(000)65

If the driver's door is opened while the ignition key is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position, a tone will sound.

Features and controls

Steering wheel lock

N00512500081

To lock

Remove the key at the "LOCK" position.

Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.

To unlock

Turn the key to the "ACC" position while moving the steering wheel slightly.

CAUTION

• Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
• If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the key to the "ACC" position to unlock the steering wheel.

NOTE

- If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn the key from "LOCK" to "ACC". Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or to the right as you turn the key.

Starting

N00512600590

Tips for starting

• Do not operate the starter motor continuously for longer than 15 seconds as this could run the battery down or damage the starter motor. If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to the “LOCK” position, wait a few seconds, and then try again. Trying repeatedly with the engine or starter motor still turning will damage the starter mechanism.
• If the engine will not start because the battery is weak or discharged, refer to “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 6-2) for instructions.
  ●The engine is warmed up enough for driving when the coolant temperature gauge indicator starts to move. A longer warm up period will only consume extra fuel.

WARNING

●Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle out of the area. Carbon monoxide gas, which is odorless and extremely poisonous, could build up and cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

●Do not push-start the vehicle.
- Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive at high speeds until the engine has had a chance to warm up.

Features and controls

CAUTION

●Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor will be damaged.

Starting the engine

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel injection system, which automatically controls the release of fuel. There is usually no need to depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.

The starter should not be run for more than 15 seconds at a time.

To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds between attempts to restart the engine.

Normal conditions

To start your vehicle:

Make sure all occupants are properly seated with seat belts fastened.

1. Insert the ignition key.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
3. Make sure the selector lever is in the "P" (PARK) position.
4. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position and make certain that all warning lights are functioning properly before starting the engine.
5. Turn the ignition key to the "START" position without pressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key when the engine starts.

Features and controls

NOTE

●Minor noises may be heard on engine start-up. These will disappear as the engine warms up.

At extremely cold ambient temperature

If the engine won't start, press the accelerator pedal about halfway down while cranking the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

CAUTION

- When starting the engine, make sure that you hold the brake pedal down. During very cold weather, if you start the engine with your foot on the accelerator pedal, switch to the brake pedal as soon as the engine has started.

Startability of automatic transaxle vehicle with ambient temperature of -31 °F (-35 °C) or lower

When the ambient temperature is -31 ^ ( -35 ^ ) or lower, it may not be possible to start from a standstill even with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position.

This phenomenon occurs because the transaxle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a problem. If it occurs, place the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.

The transaxle will warm up, and you will be able to start normally.

Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up operation.

Flooded engine

If the engine has flooded during starting, first run the starter for 5 to 6 seconds while holding down the accelerator pedal. Release the ignition key (return to "ON" position) and the accelerator pedal. Wait a moment, then without depressing the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to the "START" position for another 5 to 6 seconds. Release the ignition key if the engine starts. Repeat as necessary if the engine fails to start, or contact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Engine block heater (if so equipped)

N00551100079

The engine block heater warms the engine coolant to promote engine startability in extremely cold weather. It also shortens the engine's warmup time, thus promoting fuel economy.

To use the engine block heater

1. Stop the engine.
2. The plug for the engine block heater is located in the front bumper opening on the driver's side. Open the cover (A) and insert the plug in a grounded 110 V AC outlet.

WARNING

●To prevent electrical shock, do not use the engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or two-pronged adapter.

Automatic transaxle

N00513200131

Designed for the most efficient control and equipped with self-adapting capabilities, the electronically controlled transaxle used in your vehicle selects the most favorable gear for each type of driving and road condition.

DRIVING UPHILL

The transaxle may not shift to a higher gear if the computer determines your current speed would be affected.

For smoother operation, the transaxle may not shift if you release the throttle while climbing a steep hill. This is normal because the computer controls the shifting. After reaching the top of the hill, your normal gear shift function will resume.

DRIVING DOWNHILL

When traveling down steep grades and using the brakes, the computer may automatically select a lower gear. This helps engine braking efforts, reducing your need to use the brakes.

CAUTION

●The electronically controlled transaxle system is strictly intended to provide supplementary functions. When driving downhill under certain conditions, when the automatic transaxle is cold immediately after starting, no automatic downshift may be made. The driver should move the selector lever to shift down to a lower gear (3rd gear or 2nd gear), which will permit the engine to begin braking.

Features and controls

NOTE

●During the break-in period or immediately after reconnecting the battery, your vehicle may not shift smoothly. This does not indicate a problem in the transaxle. Shifting will become smoother once the transaxle has been shifted several times by the electronic control system.

Selector lever operation

N00513800283

As an additional safety precaution, models equipped with an automatic transaxle have a shift-lock device that holds the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position. To move the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) position to another position, follow the steps below.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the selector lever to the desired position.

NOTE

●The selector lever cannot be moved from "P" (PARK) to another position if the ignition key is at the "LOCK" position, or has been removed, or if the brake pedal is not pressed and held down.

The transaxle has 4 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The individual gears are selected automatically, depending on the position of the selector lever, the speed of the vehicle and the position of the accelerator pedal.

The selector lever has 2 "gates": the main gate (A) and the manual gate (B).

NOTE

- For information on manual gate operation, refer to “Sports mode” on page 3-44.

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions, and is equipped with a lock button (C) to prevent inadvertent selection of the wrong gear.

3D rendering of a robotic arm interacting with a metallic component (no visible text or symbols)

Features and controls

graph TD
    A["Downward Arrow"] --> B["Upward Arrow"]
    C["Upward Arrow"] --> D["Downward Arrow"]
    E["P"] --> F["Upward Arrow"]
    G["R"] --> H["Upward Arrow"]
    I["N"] --> J["Downward Arrow"]
    K["D"] --> L["Downward Arrow"]
    M["+"] --> N["Upward Arrow"]
    O["-"] --> P["Downward Arrow"]
    Q["Downward Arrow"] --> R["Downward Arrow"]

↓	The lock button must be pushed while the brake pedal is depressed to move the selector lever.
↓	The selector lever will move without pushing the lock button.
↓	The lock button must be pushed to move the selector lever.

WARNING

- If the lock button is always pressed when using the selector lever, the lever may be accidentally shifted into the "P" (PARK) or "R" (REVERSE) position. Do not press the lock button when making shifts shown by the illustration.

Features and controls

WARNING

●Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the selector lever into a gear from the "N" (NEUTRAL) position. When beginning to drive, do not shift the selector lever from the "N" (NEUTRAL) position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This will cause the vehicle to "jump" forward or backward.

NOTE

- If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock device activates to prevent the selector lever from being moved from the "P" (PARK) position.

Selector lever position indicator/ "N" indicator

ND0513900239

A- Selector lever position indicator

When the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the indicator in the instrument cluster comes on to show the position of the selector lever (i.e. "PARK", "DRIVE", "REVERSE", etc.).

B- "N" indicator

If the "N" indicator blinks with the "D" (DRIVE) position or "Sports mode" being selected, the automatic transaxle may be malfunctioning.

Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

Automatic transaxle fluid temperature warning light

N00514000110

The automatic transaxle fluid temperature warning light comes on when the automatic transaxle fluid temperature becomes abnormally high. Normally the warning light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, and then will go out after a few seconds.

CAUTION

- If the light comes on while driving, reduce the engine speed and stop the vehicle in a safe area. Then set the selector lever to "P" (PARK) position and idle the engine until the warning light goes off. When the warning light goes off, resume normal driving. If the warning light does not go off, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Selector lever positions (Main gate)

N00514200213

"P" PARK

This position locks the transaxle to prevent the vehicle from moving. The engine can be started from the "PARK" position.

"R" REVERSE

Move the lever to this position only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

CAUTION

●Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” or “R” position while the vehicle is in motion, the transaxle may be damaged.

Features and controls

"N" NEUTRAL

At this position, the transaxle is disengaged. It is the same as the neutral position on a manual transaxle and should be used when the vehicle is not moving for an extended length of time during driving, such as in a traffic jam.

WARNING

●Never move the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving since you could accidentally slip it into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position, damaging the transaxle.
●To prevent the vehicle from rolling when stopped on a slope, the engine should be started in the "P" (PARK) position, not in "N" (NEUTRAL).
●Always keep your foot on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in "N" (NEUTRAL), or when shifting into or out of "N" (NEUTRAL), to prevent rolling.

"D" DRIVE

This position is used for most city and highway driving. Engine shifting and braking are done automatically as needed, depending on road conditions.

NOTE

●For information on manual gate operation, please refer to "Sports mode" on page 3-44.

Sports mode

N00514400172

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the selector lever from the "D" position into the manual gate. To return to "D" range operation, push the selector lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly simply by moving the selector lever backward and forward. Sports mode allows gear shifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Manual gate

+ (SHIFT UP)

Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

- (SHIFT DOWN)

Pull the lever backward once to shift down one gear.

CAUTION

●Upward shifts do not take place automatically in sports mode. The driver must make upward shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, making sure the engine rpm remains below the red zone on the tachometer.
- By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (SHIFT DOWN) twice, it is possible to skip one gear (i.e., 3rd to 1st or 4th to 2nd). Since sudden engine deceleration or acceleration can cause a loss of traction, downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's speed.

NOTE

• In sports mode, only the 4 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to the "R" (REVERSE) or "P" (PARK) position in the main gate.
  ●To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gear shifts when the selector lever is operated, such as 4th gear at low speed.
  ●In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

• When pulling away from a standstill on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward to the + (SHIFT UP) position. This causes the transaxle to select 2nd gear, which is better for safe driving on slippery roads. Push the selector lever to the - (SHIFT DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear.

• Move the selector lever gently between the manual and main gates and between positions in the manual gate. Excessive force could damage the selector lever.

• When sports mode is selected, the "D" indicator goes out.

Sports mode indicator

N00538800024

In sports mode, the currently selected gear is indicated by the indicator shown on the instrument cluster.

Features and controls

Operation of the automatic transaxle

N00514500229

CAUTION

●Before selecting a gear with the engine running and the vehicle stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the gear is engaged, especially when the engine speed is high, at fast idle or with the air conditioning operating, the brakes should only be released when you are ready to drive away.
●Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all times. Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency.
●To prevent sudden acceleration, never run the engine at high rpms when shifting from the "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL).
●Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot is resting on the brake pedal will affect braking efficiency and may cause premature wear of brake pads.
Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal pressed. This can damage the transaxle.

Passing acceleration

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position (when passing another vehicle) push the accelerator to the floor. The automatic transaxle will automatically downshift.

NOTE

●In sports mode, downshifts do not take place when the accelerator is depressed all the way to the floor.

Waiting

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic lights, the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationary with the service brake.

For longer waiting periods with the engine running, the selector lever should be placed in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position.

CAUTION

●To avoid transaxle overheating, never try to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by using the accelerator pedal. Always apply the parking brake and/or service brake.
●Unexpected acceleration may occur if the selector lever is in a position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
Prior to moving off after having stopped the vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in "D" (DRIVE) position or "Sports mode" position.

Parking

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position.

When the automatic transaxle makes no gear change

If the transaxle does not change gears while driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be that there is something unusual happening in the transaxle, causing a safety device to activate. Have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving uphill, shift the selector lever into 2nd gear of the sports mode.
   This method might not work depending on the type of transaxle malfunction.
2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level road, move the selector lever back to "D" (DRIVE).

NOTE

- When the “N” indicator in the instrument cluster blinks, it means that there is an abnormal condition in the transaxle. Refer to “Selector lever position indicator/“N” indicator” on page 3-42.

Full-time all-wheel drive (if so equipped)

N00517200025

Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement. But its unique all-wheel drive system allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads, to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar locations.

Not only does this ensure better handling on dry, paved roads but also permits better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud.

But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or towing in rough conditions.

It is particularly important to note that full-time all-wheel drive may not give sufficient hill climbing ability and engine braking on steep slopes. You should try to avoid driving on steep slopes with full-time all-wheel drive.

Also, you must exercise caution when driving on sand and mud and when driving through water because sufficient traction may not be available in certain circumstances.

Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or mud.

All-wheel drive operation requires special driving skills.

Carefully read the “All-wheel drive operation” section on page 3-48 and take care to drive safely.

Features and controls

All-wheel drive operation

N00530600101

All-wheel drive vehicles provide better traction and control than front-wheel drive vehicles on slippery surfaces (for example, snow, sand, mud etc.). However, their capabilities are not without limits.

When using all-wheel drive on rough roads (snow, sand, mud etc.), it is important to operate the vehicle correctly.

WARNING

• Do not over-rely on the all-wheel drive vehicles. The all-wheel drive vehicles, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances.
  Reckless driving can lead to accidents. Always drive carefully, taking into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.
• Improperly operating this vehicle on or off-pavement can cause an accident or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in the owner's manual.
• Keep your speed low and don't drive faster than conditions permit.

NOTE

●Driving on rough roads can be hard on a vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be sure all scheduled maintenance and service has been done, and that you have inspected your vehicle. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
●Mitsubishi is not responsible to the operator for any damage or injury caused or liability incurred by improper and negligent operation of a vehicle. All techniques of vehicle operation depend on the skill and experience of the operator and other participating parties. Any deviation from the recommended operating instructions above is at their own risk.
●Note that the stopping distance required of the all-wheel drive vehicle differs very little from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle. When driving on a snow-covered road or a slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you keep a sufficient distance between your vehicle and the one ahead of you.
●The driving posture should be more upright; adjust the seat to a good position for easy steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear the seat belt.
●After driving on rough roads, check each part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly with water. Refer to the "Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation" section and "Vehicle care and maintenance" sections.

Driving on snowy or icy roads

Gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

NOTE

●The use of snow tires is recommended.

●Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, avoid sudden braking, and use engine braking (downshifting).

CAUTION

●Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration, and sharp turning; such operations could cause skidding and loss of control.

Driving on sandy or muddy roads

Gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, and drive at low speed.

CAUTION

- Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly on sandy surfaces. In comparison with normal road surfaces, the engine and other drive-system components are put under excessive strain when driving on such a surface. This could lead to accidents.

- If the needle in the temperature gauge approaches the overheating zone or the "N" indicator starts to blink quickly (i.e., about twice every second) while the vehicle is being driven, immediately locate a safe place, stop the vehicle there, and begin the appropriate procedure to rectify the overheating problem. (Refer to the "Engine overheating" on page 6-5 and the "Automatic transaxle fluid temperature warning light" on page 3-43.)

Features and controls

WARNING

- When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that the area around the vehicle is clear of people and physical objects. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly launch forward or backward, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

NOTE

●Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and turning; such operations could result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
- If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or muddy roads, it can often be moved with a rocking motion. Move the selector lever alternately between “Sports mode” and “R” (REVERSE) position, while applying slight pressure to the accelerator pedal.
●Driving rough road can cause rust on the vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible after such use.

Climbing/descending sharp grades

Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill climbing ability and engine braking on steep slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even though your vehicle has full-time all-wheel drive.

Turning sharp corners

On rough roads, the basic turning technique is to drive at a low speed and gradually steer to suit the surface.

Features and controls

Driving through water

N00537800069

If the electrical circuits become wet, further operation of the vehicle will be impossible; therefore, avoid driving through water unless absolutely necessary. If driving through water is unavoidable, use the following procedure:

Check the depth of the water and the terrain before attempting to drive through it. Drive slowly to avoid creating excessive water splashing.

CAUTION

●Never drive through water that is deep enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust pipe. Do not change gears while driving through water.
Frequent driving through water can adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and take the necessary measures to prepare, inspect, and repair the vehicle.
●After driving through water, apply the brakes to be sure they are functioning properly. If the brakes are wet and not functioning properly, dry them out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect each part of the vehicle carefully.

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

N00530700072

After operating the vehicle in rough road conditions, be sure to perform the following inspection and maintenance procedures:

• Check that the vehicle has not been damaged by rocks, gravel, etc.
  ●Carefully wash the vehicle with water.

Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal in order to dry out the brakes. If the brakes still do not function properly, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible to have the brakes checked.

• Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clogging the radiator core.
  ●After driving through water, check the engine, transaxle and differential oil. If the oil or grease is milky or cloudy because of water contamination, it must be replaced with new oil.
• Check the inside of the vehicle. If water entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
  ●Inspect the headlights. If water is in the headlight housing, have it drained at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
  ●Have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice replace the grease in the wheel bearings.

Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive vehicles

N00530800129

Tires and wheels

Since the driving torque can be applied to the four wheels, the driving performance of the vehicle when operating in all-wheel drive is greatly affected by the condition of the tires.

Pay close attention to the tires.

●Install only the specified tires on all wheels. Refer to "Tires and wheels" on page 9-7.
- Be sure all four tires and wheels are the same size and type.

When it is necessary to replace any of the tires or wheels, replace all four.

●All tires should be rotated before the wear difference between the front and rear tires is recognizable.

Good vehicle performance cannot be expected if there is a difference in wear between tires. Refer to the “Tire rotation” on page 7-27.

●Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

CAUTION

●Always use tires of the same size, type, and brand that have no wear differences. Using tires of different size, type, brand or degree of wear, will increase the differential oil temperature and result in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will be subject to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious problems.

Features and controls

Towing Jacking up all-wheel drive vehicles

AA3000487

CAUTION

- Do not tow full-time all-wheel drive vehicles with the front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. If you tow full-time all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type C or Type D equipment.

WARNING

●Do not crank the engine while jacking up the vehicle. The tire on the ground may turn and the vehicle may roll off the jack.

Service brake

N00517500204

Brake pedal

Overuse of the brake can cause poor brake response and premature wear of the brake pads.

When driving down a long or steep hill, use engine braking by shifting the transaxle into a lower gear of the sports mode.

WARNING

- Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emergency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is securely held in place.

CAUTION

- It is important not to drive the vehicle with your foot resting on the brake pedal when braking is not required. This practice can result in very high brake temperatures, premature pad wear, and possible damage to the brakes.

Features and controls

Power brakes

N00517600247

Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes for more braking force with minimal brake pedal effort.

Your brakes are designed to operate at full capacity, even if the power assist is lost.

If the power assist is lost, the effort needed to press the brake pedal is greater.

If you should loose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still work.

If the power brake unit or either of the two brake hydraulic systems stops working properly, the rest of the brake system will still work, but the vehicle will not slow down as quickly.

You will know this has happened if you find you need to depress the brake pedal down further, or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if the brake warning light comes on.

WARNING

●Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Keep the engine running whenever your vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the engine while driving, the power brake booster will stop working and your brakes will not work as well.

- If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic system stops working properly, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately.

Features and controls

Brake pad wear alarm

N00532500087

The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a metallic squeal when the brake pads have worn down enough to need service. If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

WARNING

●Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to stop, and can cause an accident.

Anti-lock braking system

N00517900224

The anti-lock braking system helps prevent the wheels from locking up when braking. This helps you keep control of your vehicle and its direction.

Driving hints

- When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden braking), steering is slightly different from normal driving conditions. Use the steering wheel carefully.

●Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the anti-lock braking system, leave a greater braking distance when:

- Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.

- Driving on uneven road surfaces.

●Operation of anti-lock braking system is not restricted to situations where brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also prevent the wheels from locking when you drive over manholes, steel roadwork plates, road markings, or any uneven road surface.

- When the anti-lock braking system is in use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrating and hear a unique sound. You may also feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.

In this situation, simply hold the brake pedal down firmly. Do not pump the brake, which will result in reduced braking performance.

CAUTION

●The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent accidents. It is your responsibility to take safety precautions and to drive carefully.
●To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking system, be sure all four wheels and tires are the same size and the same type.

Anti-lock braking system warning light

N00531600414

This light comes on in the event of a malfunction in the anti-lock braking system. It will also come on as a self-check for a few seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. Always make sure that the light goes out before beginning to drive.

CAUTION

- If the anti-lock braking system warning light comes on and stays on after starting the engine or while driving, it means that the anti-lock braking system is not working and that only the standard brake system is available. (The standard brake system will still work properly.) If this happens, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

Features and controls

If the warning light illuminates while driving

N00531700356

●Since there is always a risk of your vehicle becoming unstable if you apply the brakes suddenly, be sure to brake gently and do not attempt high-speed driving. Be sure to stop the vehicle in a safe place. Test the system by restarting the engine and driving at a speed of about 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
- If the light goes out, there is no abnormal condition. If the light does not go out after driving as instructed here, or if it comes on again, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning. Only the ordinary braking system is functioning. If this happens, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and have the system checked as soon as possible.

NOTE

●After your vehicle is driven a short distance after starting the engine, you will hear a whining sound and the sound of a motor operating coming from the engine compartment. These are the normal sounds the anti-lock braking system makes when performing a self-check. It does not indicate a malfunction.
●The anti-lock braking system can be used after the vehicle has reached a speed over approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops working when the vehicle slows below approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
●After driving on snow or icy roads, remove any snow and ice which may have be left around the wheels. On vehicles that have an anti-lock braking system, be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the cables located at each wheel.

Features and controls

Power steering system

N00518000189

The power steering system has mechanical steering capability in case the power assist is lost. If the hydraulic pressure is interrupted for some reason (such as engine stalling), you will still be able to steer your vehicle.

If the power assist is lost, you will notice it takes much more effort to steer and that there is much more "free play" in the steering wheel. If this happens, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

WARNING

●Never turn off the engine while the vehicle is moving, or your ability to steer the vehicle may be seriously reduced.

CAUTION

●Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the way in one direction. This can cause damage to the power steering system.

Features and controls

Active stability control (ASC)

N00505900083

The active stability control (ASC) takes overall control of the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function to help maintain the vehicle's control and traction. Also refer to the following pages on the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function.

Anti-lock braking system → P3-54

Traction control function → P.3 -58

Skid control function → P3-60

CAUTION

• Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. This system, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving can lead to accidents. It is the driver's responsibility to drive carefully. This means taking into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.
• Be sure to use the same specified type and size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the ASC may not work properly.
• Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC may stop functioning properly.

NOTE

●A whining sound may be heard from the engine compartment in the following situations. The sound is associated with the ASC self-check operations. It does not indicate a malfunction.
- When the ignition key is set to the "ON" position.
- When the vehicle is driven for a while after the engine is turned on.
- When the ASC is activated, you may feel a vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whining sound from the engine compartment.
This indicates that the system is operating normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
- When the anti-lock braking system warning light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.

Traction control function

NDI506D00036

On slippery surfaces, the traction control function prevents the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a stopped condition. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle turns while pressing the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION

• When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be sure to install snow tires and drive the vehicle at moderate speeds.
• When a tire such as a compact spare tire that is different in size from the standard tire has been installed, make sure that the traction control function is turned off.

TCL switch

N00506100024

The traction control function is automatically activated when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position. You can deactivate the system by pressing the TCL switch.

When the traction control function is deactivated, the TCL OFF indicator will be illuminated. To reactivate the traction control function, press the TCL switch again; the TCL OFF indicator is turned off.

CAUTION

●For safety reasons, the TCL switch should be operated when your vehicle is stopped.
●Be sure to keep the TCL on while driving in normal circumstances.

Features and controls

NOTE

- When moving out of mud, sand or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not allow the engine speed to increase. In such situations, temporarily deactivate the TCL, using the TCL switch.

Features and controls

Skid control function

N005062001012

The skid control function is designed to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle on slippery roads or during rapid steering maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine output and the brake on each wheel.

NOTE

●The skid control function operates at speeds of about 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

ASC indicator, TCL OFF indicator

ND0506300042

The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, and should turn off after a few seconds.

If the indicator stays on or does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

§ indicator blinks when the ASC is operating.

TCL OFF indicator is illuminated when the traction control function is deactivated.

CAUTION

- When Indicator blinks, the ASC is operating, which means that the road is slippery or that your vehicle's wheels are beginning to slip. If this happens, drive slower with less accelerator input.

NOTE

- When a spare tire has been put on your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire will be lower, making it more likely that the indicator will blink.

CAUTION

- If an abnormal condition occurs in the system while driving, the and indicators or indicator alone will illuminate. In these cases, follow these procedures:

CAUTION

|If the and indicators continuously illuminate|

- If the temperature of the braking system increases excessively due to continuous brake control on a slippery road surface, the Sand Indicators will illuminate, and operation of the ASC will be suspended to protect the brake system. (Normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.) Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the temperature in the braking system has come down, the Sand TCL OFF indicators will be turned off and the ASC will start operating again.

- If the and indicators do not go out even through the above procedure is followed, there could be a problem in the system. Stop the engine and restart the engine again and check whether the and indicators go out. If the indicators go out, there is no abnormal condition.

If the Sand Indicators remain on even after your vehicle is driven a short distance after restarting the engine, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

Features and controls

CAUTION

[If the Indicator alone illuminates]

- Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Restart the engine again and check whether the Indicator goes out. If the indicator goes out, there is no abnormal condition.

If the Indicator alone remains on even after your vehicle is driven a short distance after restarting the engine, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

CAUTION

- If the front-wheel drive vehicle is towed with the ignition key in the "ON" position and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the ASC may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep the ignition key in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, keep the ignition key in the "ACC" position.

Refer to "Towing" on page 6-23.

AA0015963

Cruise control

N00518300443

Cruise control is an automatic speed control system. It lets you keep the same driving speed. Cruise control can be used at speeds of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. It is especially useful for freeway driving. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

A - Main switch

B - Cruise control lever

CAUTION

- For safety reasons, deactivate cruise control system using the main switch (A) when you are not using the cruise control system. (Refer to "To deactivate" on page 3-68.)

Features and controls

CAUTION

●Cruise control is not recommended when driving conditions will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, or slippery, or on a steep downhill.

NOTE

●Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on uphills or downhills.
●Your speed may drop on a steep uphill. You may have to use the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed.
- Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep downhill. You must use the brake to control your speed. If your speed increases too much, turn off the cruise control. (Refer to “To deactivate” on page 3-68.)

Features and controls

Cruise control indicator

N00550100160

This indicator will come on when the cruise control main switch is "ON".

To activate

N00518400183

1. Momentarily push in the main switch (A) at the end of the cruise control lever.

1. Pull the lever (B) down while driving at the desired speed.

NOTE

• If the main switch is on when the ignition key is turned off, cruise control will be on automatically the next time you start the engine. The "CRUISE" control indicator will also be on. You will need to reset the speed however, if you want to use cruise control.
• If the battery voltage is insufficient, the memory data for the main switch will be erased.

As a result, the "CRUISE" control indicator may not come on when you restart the engine.

If this happens, push in the main switch once again to activate the system.

Features and controls

To increase the set speed

N00518500230

There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.

Cruise control lever

Pull the cruise control lever up and hold it while driving at the set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase.

When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your cruising speed is now set.

To increase your speed in small amounts, press the cruise control lever up for less than 1 second and release it. Each time you press the lever up, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Features and controls

Accelerator pedal

Press the accelerator pedal to reach your desired speed. Pull the cruise control lever down for a moment, then release it.

To decrease the set speed

ND0518600130

There are 2 ways to reduce the set speed.

Cruise control lever

Pull the cruise control lever down and hold it while driving at the set speed, and you will slow down (coast) gradually.

When your desired low speed is reached, release the lever.

To slow down in small amounts, press the cruise control lever down for less than 1 second and release it.

Each time you press the lever down, your vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Features and controls

Brake pedal

Press the brake pedal (which disengages the cruise control), then pull the cruise control lever down momentarily to set a new desired cruise speed.

To accelerate for passing

N00518700085

Press the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When you release the pedal, the cruise control will return to your set speed.

Mechanical diagram showing a foot pressing a pedal and a hand pressing the pedal (no text or symbols present)

Features and controls

To deactivate

N005188001510

The cruise control can be turned off as follows:

1. Push the main switch (A) at the end of the lever. (Main switch OFF)
2. Pull the cruise control lever (B) toward you.
3. By slightly tapping the brake pedal or pressing down on it to slow your speed.

The cruise control is turned off automatically in any of the following ways:

1. When your speed slows to about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more below the set speed because of a hill, etc.

2. When your speed slows to about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

3. When the active stability control starts (ASC) operating. Refer to "Active stability control (ASC) system" on page 3-58.

WARNING

- Although the cruise control will be disengaged when shifting to the "N" position, never move the selector lever to the "N" position while driving. You would have no engine braking and could cause a serious accident.

To resume the set speed

N00518900188

If the speed memory has not been erased, resume the previously set speed by pulling the cruise control lever up while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or higher.

Under either of the following conditions, however, using the switch does not allow you to resume the previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:

●The ignition key is turned OFF.
●The main switch is turned OFF.

Features and controls

Tire pressure monitoring system

N00530200266

The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The system only indicates when a tire is significantly under-inflated.

WARNING

●The 17-inch steel spare tire and compact spare tire do not have a tire inflation pressure sensor.
When the 17-inch steel spare tire or compact spare tire is used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible to replace or repair the original tire.

Features and controls

NOTE

●The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for regularly checking tire inflation pressures. Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures as described in "Tires" on page 7-20.

●The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is installed in the illustrated location.

- On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has the metallic air valve (B), replace grommet (C) with a new one when the tire is replaced. - On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has the rubber air valve (D), replace rubber valve (D) and screw (E) with new ones when the tire is replaced.

For details, please contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Tire pressure monitoring system warning light

N00554800064

When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, this light normally illuminates and goes off a few seconds later. If one or more of the vehicle tires is significantly under-inflated, however, this light will remain illuminated while the key is in the “ON” position.

Refer to “If the warning light illuminates while driving” on page 3-73 and take the necessary measures.

NOTE

• Tire pressure monitoring system doesn't monitor the spare tire in luggage room, even if the tire inflation pressure sensor is equipped.
  ●Tire pressure monitoring system monitors the 18-inch aluminum spare tire when it is used.

CAUTION

- If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, it means that the tire pressure monitoring system is not working properly. Have the system inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.

CAUTION

• If a malfunction is detected in the tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. The warning light will issue further warnings each time the engine is restarted as long as the malfunction exists.
  Check to see whether the warning light goes off after few minutes of driving.
  If it then goes off during driving, there is no problem.
  However, if the warning light does not go off, or if it blinks again when the engine is restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
  In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when the warning light appears while driving, avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.

Features and controls

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure tell-tale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

If the warning light illuminates while driving

N00532800282

1. If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates, avoiding hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. You should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at the same time. Refer to "Tires" on page 7-20.

NOTE

• When inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, do not apply excessive force to the valve stem to avoid breakage.
  ●After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve cap on the valve stem. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve, resulting in damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor.

• Do not use metal valve caps, which may cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion and damage of the tire inflation pressure sensors.
  ●Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.

• If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light remains illuminated after you have been driving for about 20 minutes after you adjust the tire inflation pressure, one or more of the tires may have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a puncture, have it repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

- If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates while you are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire adversely affects vehicle performance and can result in an accident.

CAUTION

• If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire could lead to an accident.
  ●The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may not illuminate immediately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid leak.

NOTE

●To avoid the risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors, have any punctured tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by your warranty.
- Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray on any tire. Such a spray could damage the tire inflation pressure sensors. Have any puncture repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Features and controls

The tire pressure monitoring system may not work normally in the following circumstances:

●A wireless facility or device using the same frequency is near the vehicle.
●Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders and/or on the wheels.
●The tire inflation pressure sensors' battery is exhausted.
●Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine wheels are being used.
●Wheels that are not fitted with tire inflation pressure sensors are being used.
●Wheels whose ID codes are not memorized by the vehicle are used.

NOTE

●Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambient temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to large variations in ambient temperature, the tire inflation pressures may be underinflated (causing the warning light to come on) when the ambient temperature is relatively low. If the warning light comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Whenever the tires and wheels are replaced with new ones

N00532900108

If you use new wheels with new tire inflation pressure sensors, their ID codes must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system. Have tire and wheel replacement performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel replacement is not done by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by your warranty.

CAUTION

●The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of the sensors.

N00533000089

General information

Your tire pressure monitoring system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

●This device may not cause harmful interference.
●This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

- Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

N00546200030

When the selector lever is in the "R" (REVERSE) position with the ignition switch in the "ON" position, the rear-view image will be displayed on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multicomunication System in the center panel.

When the selector lever is shifted out of the "R" (REVERSE) position, the screen will return to the previous display.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the rear-view camera to clear the area behind your vehicle. Always check visually behind and all around your vehicle for persons, animals, obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to do so can result in vehicle damage, serious injury or death.
●The rear-view camera is an aid system for backing up, but it is not a substitute for your visual confirmation.
●The view on the screen is limited, and objects outside the view, such as under the bumper or around either corner of the bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.

Features and controls

Location of rear-view camera

The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at the left side of the liftgate handle.

Line drawing of a truck rearview with a close-up inset showing the side profile of the front wheel (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

• If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the lens with clean water and gently wipe with a clean, soft cloth.
  ●To avoid damaging the camera;

- Do not rub the cover excessively or polish it by using an abrasive compound.

- Do not disassemble the camera.

- Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.

- Do not spray the camera and its surroundings with high-pressure water.

- Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.

Features and controls

Screen image

Reference guide marks and upper surface of the rear bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.

●Five guide marks in red (B) indicates approximately 20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.
●Each row of green guide marks (1 to 4) indicates approximately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the vehicle body.
●Every single green guide mark indicates distance from the rear bumper.

AA0090630

1: Approximately at the rear edge of the rear bumper
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
4: Approximately 118 inches (300 cm)

CAUTION

●The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle lens. As a result, images and distances shown on the screen are not exact.
●Actual distance may be different from distance indicated by the guide marks on the screen, depending on the loading condition of the vehicle and road surface condition.

NOTE

●Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
- It is possible to set the display language of the screen to English, Spanish or French. For details, please refer to the separated owner's manual for "Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System".
●Under certain circumstances, it may become difficult to see an image on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly.

• In a dark area, such as at night.
- When water drops or condensation are on the lens.
- When sun light or headlights shine directly into the lens.

→ When the camera picks up extremely bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the rear bumper, a bright vertical line may appear on the screen.

Features and controls

Instrument cluster

N00519000144

1- Tachometer
2- Speedometer
3- Fuel gauge
4- Odometer/Trip odometer
5- Trip odometer reset button
6- Engine coolant temperature gauge

AA1000148

Features and controls

Speedometer

N00519100015

The speedometer shows your vehicle's speed.

Tachometer

N00519200032

The tachometer shows engine revolutions per minute. This allows the driver to determine the most efficient gear range and engine speed combinations.

This gauge also assists in evaluating engine performance.

CAUTION

●The red zone indicates an engine speed beyond the range of safe operation.

Select the correct gear to control the engine speed so that the tachometer indicator does not enter the red zone.

Odometer/Trip odometer

N00519500426

When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, an "ODO" or "TRIP" indicator is displayed.

1- Odometer
2- Trip odometer
3- Reset button

Every time the reset button (3) is pressed lightly (less than one second), the indicators are changed.

ODO-Odometer

The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has traveled.

TRIP-Trip odometer

The trip odometer shows the distance traveled since the last time it was reset.

There are two trip odometer displays: And. B

TRIP A can be used to measure the distance traveled since the current trip began.

At the same time, TRIP can be used to measure the distance from a second location.

Features and controls

To reset the trip odometer

To zero the counter, press and hold the reset button for more than one second. Only the currently displayed value will be reset.

If TRIP □ is displayed, for example, only TRIP □ be reset.

NOTE

●Both TRIP And TRIP can measure trips up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
●Even when the engine has been stopped, the odometer/trip odometer indication is given for about 30 seconds if any of the following steps is taken.

• The ignition key is turned to the "OFF" position.
• Any door or the liftgate is opened.
• The odometer/trip odometer reset button is pressed.
• If the battery is disconnected for a long time, both of these displays will be reset to "0".

Features and controls

Fuel gauge

N00519600052

This gauge shows the amount of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

AA0005540

CAUTION

- Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of gas could cause damage to the catalytic converter.

NOTE

• It takes a little time after refueling for the gauge to register the newly added fuel.
• If you refuel when the ignition key is in the "ON" position, the gauge may differ from the actual level.

Fuel tank filler door mark

The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler door is located on the left side of the vehicle (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page 1-4).

Low-fuel warning light

N00532000239

The warning light comes on with the ignition key in the "ON" position when the fuel level is getting low.

Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

●On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low-fuel warning light may indicate incorrectly.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

N00519700095

This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature. If the temperature is low when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the indicator will remain at the "C" (cold) position until the engine begins to warm up.

The indicator will normally stay near the center while driving, but may rise slightly in stop-and-go traffic or when the engine is under a heavy load.

AA0005553

CAUTION

●Take care to keep the engine operating temperature within the normal range while driving. If the indicator enters the "H" (hot) position, the engine is overheating (Refer to "Engine overheating" on page 6-5).

Features and controls

Features and controls

Indicator and warning light package

N01519800735

1- Engine malfunction indicator ("SERVICE ENGINE SOON" or "Check engine light") → P.3-84
2- Cruise control indicator → P.3-64
3- High beam indicator → P.3-83
4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning lights → P.3-83
5- Front fog light indicator (if so equipped) → P.3-83
6- Selector lever position indicator → P3-42 Sports mode indicator → P.3-45
7- Automatic transaxle fluid temperature warning light → P343
8- ASC indicator → P.3-60 TCL indicator → P.3-60
9- TCL OFF indicator → P3-60
10- Seat belt reminder/warning light → P.2-19
11- Door-ajar warning light → P.3-85

12- Oil pressure warning light → P.3-85
13- Charging system warning light → P.3-85
14- Immobilizer indicator → P3-3
15- Tire pressure monitoring system warning light → P3-71
16- SRS warning light → P.2-24, 2-44
17- Anti-lock braking system warning light → P3-55
18- Brake warning light → P.3-83
19- Low-fuel warning light → P.3-80

Indicator

N00519900042

Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning lights

N00520000144

The arrows will flash in time with the corresponding exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is used.

Both arrows will flash when the hazard warning flasher switch is pressed.

NOTE

- If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if the indicator stays on without flashing, check for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or turn signal connection.

High beam indicator

N00520100031

A blue light comes on when the headlights are on high beam.

Front fog light indicator (if so equipped)

N01520200159

This indicator comes on while the front fog lights are on.

Features and controls

Warning lights

N00520300121

Brake warning light

N00520400294

This light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position (engine off).

When the engine is started, the light should go off.

The light will illuminate under the following conditions:

●When the parking brake pedal is engaged.
- When the brake fluid level in the reservoir falls to a low level.
●When the brake circuit is not operating correctly.

Before driving your vehicle, release the parking brake and make certain that the brake warning light has gone out.

CAUTION

●Brake performance or your ability to control the vehicle may be compromised or the vehicle may become unstable if the brakes are applied suddenly in the following situations:

• The brake warning light does not illuminate when the parking brake is applied or does not turn off when the parking brake is released.
• The brake warning light remains illuminated during driving.
• If any of the above situations occur, stop the vehicle in a safe location, avoiding any sudden brake application, and contact your nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Features and controls

CAUTION

●The vehicle should be brought to a stop in the following manner when brake performance has deteriorated while driving.
- Press the brake pedal harder than usual.
- Should the brakes fail, shift down to a lower gear to reduce your speed and slowly depress the parking brake pedal to park your vehicle. Press the brake pedal to operate your rear brake lights to alert vehicles behind you.

3 Engine malfunction indicator ("SERVICE ENGINE SOON" or "Check engine light")

This indicator is a part of the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system which monitors the emissions, engine, and automatic transaxle control systems. If a problem is detected in one of these systems, this indicator comes on. When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, this indicator normally comes on and goes off a few seconds later.

This indicator will come on if the fuel tank filler cap is not properly tightened. If the indicator comes on and stays on after refueling, stop the engine and check that the cap is properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise until you hear clicking sounds.)

If this indicator does not go off after several seconds or lights up while driving, have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

CAUTION

●Driving for a long time with the engine malfunction indicator on may cause more damage to the emission control system. This could also affect fuel economy and drivability.
- If this indicator does not come on when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, have the system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
- If the indicator comes on while the engine is running, avoid driving at high speeds.
During vehicle operation with the indicator on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indicator on, you must depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual since the engine idling speed is higher than usual and the vehicle with an automatic transaxle has a stronger tendency to creep forward.

NOTE

- Do not disconnect the battery cable when the Engine malfunction indicator ("SERVICE ENGINE SOON" or "Check engine light") is on. The engine electronic control module stores critical OBD information (especially exhaust emission data), which may be lost if the battery cable is disconnected while the engine malfunction indicator is on. This will make it difficult to diagnose the cause of future problems.

Charging system warning light

N00520600166

This light comes on in the event of a malfunction in the charging system or when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position (engine off). When the engine is started, the light should go out. Check to make sure that the light has gone out before driving.

CAUTION

- If the warning light stays on after the engine has started, the battery charging system may be malfunctioning. In this case, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and have the system checked.

Features and controls

Oil pressure warning light

N00520700154

This light comes on when the engine oil pressure is below normal. If the light stays on while driving, stop the engine as soon as possible. Do not run the engine until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.

CAUTION

• If this light comes on when the engine oil level is not low, have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
  ●This warning light does not show the amount of oil in the crankcase. This can only be determined by checking the oil level with the dipstick with the engine turned off.

Door-ajar warning light and buzzer

N00520900286

This light comes on when any door, the liftgate is open or not completely closed.

When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 mph (8 km/h) and any door, the liftgate is open or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times and the warning light will flash 4 times to inform the driver that any door, the liftgate is not properly shut.

CAUTION

●Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar warning light is off.

Features and controls

NOTE

• The light remains on for a certain period and then goes out automatically after about 30 minutes. Refer to “Interior light auto-cutout function (dome light and other lights)” on page 3-203.
• In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to stop the warning lamp from flashing and to stop the tone from functioning. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.
• In a vehicle with a multi center display, if any of the doors (including the liftgate) is not completely closed while the ignition key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position, a picture showing which of the doors (including the liftgate) is ajar appears on the multi center display screen. For details, refer to "Door open warning" on page 3-107.

Multi center display (if so equipped)

N00522100064

When the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the display turns on automatically.

WARNING

- When operating the system for a prolonged period, make sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated area to avoid the accumulation of toxic fumes inside and outside of the passenger compartment.

CAUTION

●The driver should not operate the display while the vehicle is in motion.
- When operating the system, stop the vehicle in a safe area.

NOTE

• Putting a cellular phone in the monitor's small storage compartment may weaken the phone's reception. This is typical and does not mean that something is wrong with the system.
• Use of wireless devices such as transceivers near the monitor may make the screen go dark temporarily. This is typical and does not mean that something is wrong with the system.

●The following are special characteristics of liquid crystal displays, and do not mean that something is wrong with the system.

• The appearance of small black patches and spots of red, blue and green lights.
• The display goes dark, turns red or moves slowly during cold weather.
• The color and brightness of the display change according to your angle of view.

Features and controls

Features and controls

Controls and display

ND0533100093

TA1001564

1- Electronic compass This display shows the compass direction of the vehicle.
2- Digital clock → P.3-90
3- Road surface freeze warning → P.3-92
4- Outside temperature → P.3-92
5- Audio This display shows the audio condition. Refer to "Audio" on page 3-96.
6- Display for function buttons This display shows the options available for each function button.
7- Function buttons These buttons can select the options shown in the display.

8- Maintenance reminder → P3-115 It is possible to set the dates when maintenance tasks (engine oil replacement, oil filter replacement, etc.) were last performed and the driving distances before the maintenance tasks have to be performed again. "Record maintenance" → P3-115

9- DISP button This button can change the display. "Change of display" → P.3-89 "Setting and customization" → P.3-108

Change of display

N00533200052

Every time the "DISP" button is pressed lightly, the display can be changed to the following:

1- Main display
2- Electronic compass → P.3-93
3- Air conditioning → P3-95
4- Audio → P.3-96
5- Digital clock/Calendar → P.3-90
6- Digital clock → P.3-90
7- Trip computer → P.3-96

Features and controls

Change of display brightness mode

When the light switch is in the “ ^20 Or “” position, pressing the “BRIGHT” function button causes the brightness to change to that seen when the headlight switch is “OFF”. To return the brightness to the original level, press the “BRIGHT” function button again.

TA0021042

NOTE

- When the light switch is "OFF", the "BRIGHT" function button is not displayed.

Digital clock/Calendar

N00522200049

The digital clock (A) is shown with all displays. The calendar (B) is shown only with the calendar and digital clock display.

TA0020595

NOTE

●Disconnecting the battery cable causes the time and date memory to be erased. If it has been disconnected, readjust the date and time by following the procedure.

Adjusting the time

CAUTION

●It is dangerous to adjust the time while driving the vehicle. Adjust the time when the vehicle is safely parked.

NOTE

●Every time the "DISP" button is pressed lightly, the monitor will return to the previous display.

1. Press the "HOUR" function button to adjust the hour setting. Press the "MIN" function button to adjust the minute setting.

Features and controls

1. Press the "HOUR+/MIN+" or "HOUR-/MIN-" function button to change to the desired number. Pressing "HOUR+/MIN+" or "HOUR-/MIN-" function button for more than 2 seconds will fast forward to the desired change. To change AM to PM, keep pressing to advance the time.

When the hour has been adjusted, press the "SET" function button. The display will return to its previous display.

Display for adjustment of minute setting

TA0015454

NOTE

●Seconds are not displayed, but the count begins from 0 seconds when the "SET" function button is pressed.

Adjusting the calendar

Refer to "Date setting" on page 3-130.

Features and controls

Outside temperature

N00522300079

This value (A) shows the temperature of outside the vehicle.

NOTE

●The outside temperature is not shown with the calendar and digital clock display or with the digital clock display.
● The unit for the outside temperature can be set to °F or to °C. Refer to “Outside temperature unit” on page 3-121.
● The outside temperature can be displayed from -40 ^ ( -40 ^ ) to 122 ^ ( 50 ^ ).
- When the outside temperature is over 122 °F (50 °C) or below -40 °F (-40 °C), the display will remain 122 °F (50 °C) or -40 °F (-40 °C).
●The outside temperature displayed may differ from the actual temperature on account of surrounding conditions, driving conditions, etc.

Road surface freeze warning

N00535300086

When the outside temperature indication drops to 37 ^ ( 3 ^ ) or lower, the road surface freeze warning symbol (B) flashes for approximately 30 seconds then comes on steadily.

When the outside temperature indication subsequently rises to 43^ F ( 6^ C) or higher, the symbol goes off.

CAUTION

●There is a danger the road might be icy, even when this symbol is not illuminated, so please take care when driving.

Features and controls

NOTE

- If the condition for illumination of the road surface freeze warning symbol is satisfied while the monitor is set to not give a display, the symbol just flashes for approximately 30 seconds then goes off.

Electronic compass

N00522400113

The electronic compass (A) shows the direction of the vehicle by the 8 directions using the earth's magnetic field.

Features and controls

NOTE

- The electronic compass may not show the correct direction in the following places where the earth's magnetic field is disrupted.

In these cases, the correct direction will be displayed once the vehicle returns to a place where the earth's magnetic field is stable.

- Vehicle in tunnels or parked in buildings

- Expressways, near railroads, underneath railroad cables, or over subways

- Near transformer stations or high voltage power lines

●Do not attach ski racks, antennas, or any other object to the vehicle by means of a magnet.

Such magnets will affect the operation of the electronic compass.

Compass variance

Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance.

Compass variance is the difference between the earth's magnetic north and the true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for this compass variance, your compass could give false readings.

Refer to "Compass zone code setting" on page 3-131.

Compass direction adjustment

This compass is self-calibrating, which means it automatically makes corrections against magnetization of its components when the vehicle is running. It should not be necessary to manually calibrate the compass. If the indicated direction appears to be wrong, first check the compass variance.

If the compass variance is correct, but the compass still shows the wrong direction, calibrate the compass as described.

Refer to "Compass calibration" on page 3-133.

Air conditioning (For vehicles with automatic air conditioning)

N00533300082

This display shows the current status of the air conditioning. For instruction on how to use the air conditioning, refer to "Automatic air conditioning" on page 5-14.

NOTE

- If an air conditioning system adjustment is made when an indication other than that for the air conditioning is shown, the display gives the air conditioning indication momentarily then returns to its previous display.

1- Front defroster indicator

This illuminates when the vent is switched to (defroster).

2- Blower speed indicator

This display shows the level of air flow by the number of bar lines.

Features and controls

3- Mode selection indicator

This indicates which mode has been selected.

4- AUTO mode indicator

This illuminates when the air conditioning is working in the automatic mode (when both the blower switch and the mode selection dial are switched to "AUTO").

5- Rear window defogger indicator

This illuminates when the rear window defogger is switched on. Refer to "Electric rear window defogger switch" on page 3-163.

6- Air selection indicator

This display indicates whether the air conditioning is taking in air from outside or recirculating air from inside the passenger compartment.

7- Preset temperature display

This display shows the preset temperature.

8- Air conditioning indicator

This illuminates when the air conditioning is operating.

Features and controls

Audio (For vehicles with AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger)

N00533400100

This display shows the condition of the audio. For instruction on how to use the audio, refer to "Audio system" on page 5-30.

TA0021097

NOTE

- If an audio system adjustment is made when an indication other than that for the audio is shown, the display gives the audio indication momentarily then returns to previous display.

Trip computer

N00500200010

The trip computer shows driving information and environmental information. It can also be used as a stopwatch and as a timer.

Change of trip computer display

N00500400025

Every time the "NEXT" function button is pressed lightly, the display can be changed.

Combined display → Average speed → Average fuel economy → Stopwatch → Countdown timer → Elevation/Barometer → Outside temperature

TA0020146

Combined display

N00500500026

The combined display shows the following information:

1. Momentary fuel economy → P3-97
2. Average speed → P.3-98
3. Average fuel economy → P.3-99
4. Reset mode

"To reset the display" P.3-105

1. Driving range → P.3-98

NOTE

●The display unit (ex. miles or km) can be changed as desired. (Refer to "Display unit selection" on page 3-106 or "Units customization" on page 3-120.)

Features and controls

●The figure of the display varies according to the conditions under which a vehicle is travelling (road conditions, the manner in which the vehicle is being driven, etc.). Observe display for reference because the figure of the display may differ from the actual figure.

Momentary fuel economy

N00500600027

This gauge shows the momentary fuel economy (in mpg or L/100 km).

Features and controls

Driving range

N00500700028

This value shows the distance (in miles or km) that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

NOTE

• If the driving range drops below 30 miles (50 km) while the driving range is displayed, the display shows “--”. When this occurs, replenish the fuel tank as soon as possible.
• When the system cannot provide a definite value for the driving range, the display shows “---”.
  ●The driving range varies depending on road conditions, the manner of driving and other related factors. Consequently, the display should be used only as a guide. It is recommended to add fuel as soon as the low-fuel warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates. (Refer to “Low-fuel warning light” on page 3-80.)
  ●Refueling will update the driving range indication.
• The driving range displayed is based on previous fuel economy data. Disconnecting the battery cable will result in the deletion of existing fuel consumption data, which will affect the unit's calculations.
  ●The driving range figure can occasionally increase if the vehicle is stopped on an incline. This is normal, as the fuel has moved in the tank because of the incline.

Average speed

N00500800029

The average speed (B) from the time when the display was last reset to the present moment is shown with a graph. For instructions on resetting the display, refer to “To reset the display” on page 3-105.

TA0020175

NOTE

●The range (A) for which historical data are shown in the graph can be changed. Refer to “Graph indication” on page 3-106.
●The unit for the average speed can be set to mph or km/h. Refer to “Display unit selection” on page 3-106 or “Units customization” on page 3-120.
- When the system cannot provide a definite value for average speed, it is displayed as “--”.

- When the ignition switch is turned on, the average speed which was being displayed when the ignition switch was previously turned off will be displayed once again.

Average fuel economy

N00500900033

The average fuel economy (B) from the time when the display was last reset to the present moment is shown together with a graph. For instructions on resetting the display, refer to “To reset the display” on page 3-105.

NOTE

●The range (A) for which historical data are shown in the graph can be changed. Refer to “Graph indication” on page 3-106.

●The unit for the average fuel economy can be set to mpg or L/100 km. Refer to “Display unit selection” on page 3-106 or “Units customization” on page 3-120.

Features and controls

- When the system cannot provide a definite value for average fuel economy, it is displayed as “--.”

- When the ignition switch is turned on, the average fuel economy which was being displayed when the ignition switch was previously turned off will be displayed once again.

●Average fuel economy varies according to the conditions under which a vehicle is travelling (road conditions, the manner in which the vehicle is being driven, etc.).

Actual fuel economy may differ from the displayed average fuel economy.

Features and controls

Stopwatch

N00501100029

It is possible to measure the time taken for a journey.

1. Press the "START" function button to start the stopwatch.

NOTE

- When the stopwatch has been started, the "START" function button becomes a "STOP" function button.

1. To stop the stopwatch, press the "STOP" function button. If you wish to subsequently start the stopwatch again without resetting it, press the "START" function button again.

2. To reset the stopwatch, press the "RESET" function button after stopping the stopwatch.

NOTE

●While the stopwatch is running, pressing the "RESET" function button does not cause the display to be reset.

- If the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position while the stopwatch is running, stopwatch operation is suspended. When the ignition switch is next turned to the "ON" position, the stopwatch automatically starts running again.

●The stopwatch display can show a time up to 23:59:59. When this time is exceeded, the display returns to 0:00:00 and the stopwatch continues running.

Countdown timer

N00501200020

It is possible to set a duration (up to 24 hours) and then view the remaining time as the timer counts down to zero.

1. Press the "SET" function button to view the timer setting display.

Features and controls

1. Press the "SELECT" function button to put the cursor on the item (hours/minutes) you wish to set.

Then use the “function button to set your desired time. Pressing” function button for more than 2 seconds will fast forward to the desired change.

Press the "SET" function button to finish setting the timer duration. The display will return to its previous display.

NOTE

●The timer duration cannot be set in units of seconds.

Features and controls

1. Press the "START" function button to start the timer. To stop the timer before it has reached 0:00:00, press the "STOP" function button.

NOTE

• If the timer reaches 0:00:00 while another display is showing, a tone sounds once and the display changes to the countdown timer for seven seconds.
  If the "DISP" function button is pressed at this time, the countdown timer disappears and the previous display appears again.
• When the countdown timer has started, the "START" function button becomes the "STOP" function button.
  ●Even if the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position while the countdown timer is running, the countdown timer continues counting down to 0:00:00.

●Normally, a tone sounds to indicate that the countdown timer has reached 0:00:00. It is possible to make a setting so that the tone does not sound at this time. For details, refer to “Timer buzzer setting” on page 3-126.
4. To reset the countdown timer, press the "SET" function button for at least 2 seconds. The display will return to 0:00:00.

TA0020247

NOTE

●Even if the "SET" function button is pressed while the countdown timer is running, the countdown timer will not be reset.
- If the "SET" function button is pressed lightly one time, the previously set timer duration will be shown. To change the timer duration setting, perform the procedure again from step 1.

Elevation/Barometer

N00501300063

The elevation (A) of the vehicle's present location and a barometer (C) are shown together with a graph. For instructions on resetting the historical data in the graph, refer to "To reset the display" on page 3-105.

Features and controls

NOTE

●The range (B) for which historical data are shown in the graph can be changed. Refer to “Graph indication” on page 3-106.
●The unit for elevation can be set to feet or meters. Refer to "Display unit selection" on page 3-106 or "Units customization" on page 3-120.
●The display can show elevations up to 12,000 feet (4,000 meters).
●The altimeter displays the elevation to the nearest 200 feet (50 meters). When the vehicle is below sea level, the elevation is shown as 0 feet (0 meters).
●The unit for the atmospheric pressure can be set to in.Hg, hPa, kPa, or mb. Refer to “Units customization” on page 3-120.
●The display can show the atmospheric pressure in the range from 18.1 in.Hg (614 hPa) to 31.2 in.Hg (1,058 hPa).
●The altimeter works by using changes in atmospheric pressure. This means it may be affected by changes in the weather and other conditions, and show a figure different from the real elevation.
●Fluctuations in air pressure may change the figure displayed even when the vehicle remains in the same place. This is normal.

Features and controls

Outside temperature

N00501600037

The outside temperature (B) is shown with a graph. For instructions on resetting the historical data in the graph, refer to "To reset the display" on page 3-105.

TA0020263

CAUTION

●There is a danger the road might be icy, even when the outside air temperature figure is not flashed, so please take care when driving.

NOTE

●The range (A) for which historical data are shown in the graph can be changed. Refer to “Graph indication” on page 3-106.
- The unit for the outside temperature can be set to °F or °C. Refer to the “Units customization” on page 3-120.
● The outside temperature can be displayed from -40 °F (-40 °C) to 122 °F (50 °C).
●The outside temperature displayed may differ from the actual temperature on account of surrounding conditions, driving conditions, etc.
- When the outside temperature is over 122 °F (50 °C) or below -40 °F (-40 °C), the display will remain 122 °F (50 °C) or -40 °F (-40 °C).

To reset the display

N00501700025

The reset mode changes each time the "AUTO/MANUAL" function button is pressed once (for less than 1 second).

Features and controls

●Manual reset mode

If you reset the display at the time when you want to start the measurements, average speed/average fuel economy/elevation/outside temperature from that point of time can be displayed.

Push the "AUTO/MANUAL" function button for more than 2 seconds.

A- Automatic reset mode

M- Manual reset mode

●Automatic reset mode

When 4 hours have passed after the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position, the display is automatically reset.

NOTE

●While the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the automatic reset mode is permanently selected. If you wish to make continuous measurements, select the manual mode.

- When the indications in one display is reset, the data for other displays are reset at the same time.

Features and controls

Graph indication

N00501800039

The average speed, average fuel economy, elevation, and outside temperature are each shown as a graph at the same time as being shown numerically.

The range for which historical data are shown in the graphs changes each time the "RANGE" function button is pressed lightly.

-3 hours: The average value is added to the graph every 6 minutes. Data for a maximum of three hours are shown in the graph.
-12 hours: The average value is added to the graph every 24 minutes. Data for a maximum of twelve hours are shown in the graph.

NOTE

- When the range for which historical data are shown is changed for one graph, it also changes for the other graphs.

Display unit selection

N00501900027

When you want to select the other unit, pressing the function button (A) for more than 3 seconds changes the unit as follows.

Mode Unit
Driving range miles	→ km → miles
Average speed mph	→ km/h → mph
Average fuel economy mpg	→ L/100km → mpg
Elevation feet (ft)	→ m → feet (ft)

Features and controls

NOTE

- When the unit is changed for one display, it is automatically also changed for the other displays.

Door open warning

N00501300037

When any of the doors or the liftgate is not fully closed, a door open warning (A) is shown.

It is possible to turn off the indication by gently pressing the "DISP" button.

NOTE

●It is possible to operate the display using the function buttons while the door open warning is being shown.
●It is possible to customize the manner in which the door open warning is shown.
For details, refer to "Setting and customization" on page 3-108.

Features and controls

Setting and customization

N00533500055

It is possible to adjust/set/customize the specifications and displays of the items shown in the table below.

Item Condition			Reference page
Display	Display brightness adjustment	*1	P.3-112
	Turn off display	*1	P.3-114
	Record maintenance	*1, *3	P.3-115
	Display settings	*1, *3	P.3-118
	Units	*1, *3	P.3-120
	Door open warning	*1, *3	P.3-123
	Rheostat synchronization	*1, *3	P.3-125
	Timer buzzer setting	*1, *3	P.3-126
	History	*1, *3	P.3-127
	Opening display setting	*1, *3	P.3-128
Calendar Date setting		*1, *3	P.3-130
Compass	Zone code setting	*2, *3	P.3-131
	Compass calibration	*2, *3	P.3-133

Item Condition			Reference page
Customization	Lights	^*1 , ^*3	P.3-135
	Wipers	^*1 , ^*3	P.3-139
	Keyless entry system & power door lock system	^*1 , ^*3	P.3-142
	Buzzers	^*1 , ^*3	P.3-147
	Number of keyless entry registration	^*1 , ^*3	P.3-150
	Defaults	^*1 , ^*3	P.3-151

Condition

*1 Adjustment/setting/customization is possible with the ignition key in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
*2 Adjustment/setting is possible with the ignition key in the "ON" position.
*3 Setting/customization is possible when the vehicle speed is no higher than 1mph (2 km/h).

Basic operation

N00535400087

CAUTION

●It is dangerous to operate the display while driving the vehicle. Operate the display only when the vehicle is safely parked.

NOTE

●Every time the "DISP" button is pressed lightly, the monitor will return to the previous display.
- When the "BACK" function button is shown, pressing it causes the monitor to return to the previous display.

1. Press the "DISP" button for at least 2 seconds to change the display.

Features and controls

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• “1. Display brightness adjustment” → P3-112
• “2.Turn off Display” → P3-114
• "3.Record Maintenance" → P.3-115
- “4. Next menu (Operable only with vehicle stationary)” → Proceed to step 3 of this procedure.

Features and controls

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

TA0020739

• “1. Date setting” → P3-130
- "2. Compass setting" Proceed to step 5 of this procedure.
- “3.Display settings, customization, other setting.(Refer to owner's manual when setting)” → Proceed to step 4 of this procedure.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

TA0018846

• “Display customization” → Proceed to step 6 of this procedure.
• “Vehicle customization” → Proceed to step 7 of this procedure.
• "Number of keyless entry registration" P.3-150

• “Defaults” → P.3-151

• Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• "Zone code setting" → P3-131
• “Compass calibration” → P3-133

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• “Display settings” → P3-118
- “Units” P3-120
• "Door open warning" → P3-123
• “Other settings” → P.3-124

Features and controls

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

TA0018862

• "Lights"
→ Refer to "Lights customization" on page 3-135
• “Wipers”
→ Refer to “Wipers customization” on page 3-139
- "Keyless entry system & power door lock system"
→ Refer to “Keyless entry system & power door lock system customization” on page 3-142
• "Buzzers"
→ Refer to “Buzzers customization” on page 3-147

Display brightness adjustment

N00533800074

It is possible to adjust the display brightness that is seen when the light switch is "OFF".

When the light switch is in the “300 or “” position, it is possible to make fine adjustments after making adjustments using the instrument panel light dimmer control.

NOTE

- When the light switch is in the “” position, pressing the “BRIGHT” function button causes the brightness to change to that seen when the light switch is “OFF”. To return the brightness to the original level, press the “BRIGHT” function button again.

1. Display "1. Display brightness adjustment" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. Press the "+" or "-" function button to change the brightness. Pressing "+" or "-" function button for more than 1 second will fast forward to the desired change. When the brightness has been adjusted, press the "SET" function button. The display will return to its previous display.

NOTE

●The brightness level can be confirmed from the bar position in the scale.

Features and controls

Turn off display

N00533900059

It is possible to set the monitor to give no display.

When the display turns on again, press the "DISP" button. The display will return to its previous display.

1. Display "2. Turn off display" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0020771

1. To set the monitor to give no display, press the "YES" function button.

If you press the "NO" function button, the monitor will return to the display in step 1 of this procedure.

TA0019146

NOTE

●Even with no display, the display comes on momentarily at the following times:

• When conditions for display of the road surface freeze warning symbol are satisfied
• When an air conditioning system adjustment is made
• When an audio system adjustment is made

Record maintenance

N00501000031

For each of the following items, it is possible to set the date when maintenance was last performed and the driving distance until the next maintenance.

●Engine oil
●Oil filter
- Rotate tires
●Air purifier
●A/T Fluid
●Brake system
●*1,*2

NOTE

• Use *1 and *2 if you wish to set the dates when maintenance was performed for components not shown on the display.
  ●Maintenance times and reminders were not set before the vehicle left the factory, so they are initially displayed as “--”. To set them, follow the instructions in “Checking and setting maintenance information” (see page 3-116)
  ●Depending on the vehicle model and specifications, some of the functions on the monitor may not operate.

Maintenance reminder

N00502700019

When the distance driven reaches a distance that has been set for scheduled maintenance, the maintenance reminder (A) is shown to indicate that the time for maintenance has come.

NOTE

●The maintenance reminder appears when the distance driven reaches the distance that has been set for any one of the maintenance items.
- When the monitor has been set to give no display, the maintenance reminder is not shown when the distance driven reaches a distance that has been set.

Features and controls

Checking and setting maintenance information

N00502900024

1. Display "3. Record Maintenance" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0020322

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the item whose setting you wish to change, and press the "SET" function button.

TA0021169

NOTE

●Any item for which the driving distance until the next scheduled maintenance has already been covered is indicated by a different color.

1. The date when maintenance was performed on the selected item will automatically be updated, and the driving distance until the next scheduled maintenance will flash.

Press the “+” or “-” button to change the distance until the next scheduled maintenance. After adjusting the distance until the next scheduled maintenance, press the “SET” function button.

NOTE

●The driving distance until the next scheduled maintenance was not set at the factory, so a figure that serves only as a rough guide is initially shown.

For instructions on setting the calendar, refer to "Date setting" on page 3-130.

●The distance until the next scheduled maintenance can be set in units of 100 miles/km.

●The unit for the distance can be set to mile or km.

Refer to "Units customization" on page 3-120.

1. Press the "YES" function button to confirm the maintenance date and distance until next scheduled maintenance that were set in step 3. If you press the "NO" function button, the monitor will return to the display in step 2 of this procedure.

NOTE

●The distance indication represents the total distance to be driven until the next maintenance.
- If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "EEPROM is broken" and then return to the display in step 1 of this procedure.

After replacing a component

N00503000022

After replacing a component, reset the maintenance date and the distance until the next scheduled maintenance using the display shown in step 1.

Features and controls

Display settings

N00534000057

It is possible to set the display that will appear whenever the "DISP" button is pressed.

(Specific displays can be set to not appear.)

1. Display "Display settings" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0018859

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the display whose setting you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0020784

If you select a display other than the trip computer, proceed to step 4.

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the display whose setting you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. To set the display to appear, press the "ON" function button. To set the display to not appear, press the "OFF" function button.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the monitor will return to the display in step 2 of this procedure.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the display in step 2 of this procedure.

NOTE

●Even if the air conditioning display is set to not appear, the monitor shows the air conditioning display momentarily before returning to the previous display when an air conditioning system adjustment is made. The monitor behaves similarly with respect to the audio display.

Features and controls

Units customization

N00501400051

1. Display "Units" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0018905

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the function you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0024304

• “Outside temperature unit” → P.3-121
• “Distance unit” → P3-121
  • “Barometer unit” → P.3-122

Outside temperature unit

N00501500049

The unit for the outside temperature can be set to ^ F or ^ C.

NOTE

- When the unit for the outside temperature is changed, the air conditioning's preset temperature indication changes accordingly.

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the unit you wish to select, and press the "SELECT" function button.

• °F

• °C

Features and controls

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Outside temperature unit" display. If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Outside temperature unit" display.

Distance unit

N00502000025

The unit for the distance can be set to miles or kilometers.

NOTE

- When the unit for the distance is changed, the trip computer and record maintenance's preset distance indication changes accordingly.

Features and controls

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the unit you wish to select, and press the "SELECT" function button.

· mile
· km

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Distance unit" display. If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Distance unit" display.

Barometer unit

N00504000032

The unit for the atmospheric pressure can be set to in.Hg, hPa, kPa, or mb.

NOTE

• When the unit for the atmospheric pressure is changed, the unit in the elevation display changes accordingly.
• Press the "function button, align the cursor with the unit you wish to select, and press the "SELECT" function button.

• in. Hg
• hPa
• kPa
• mb

Features and controls

1. The monitor will display "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Barometer unit" display. If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will display "The setting failed." then return to the "Barometer unit" display.

Door open warning

N00502100042

It is possible to customize the manner in which the door open warning is shown.

1. Display "Door open warning" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

TA0010228

• When running: The warning is shown only while the vehicle is moving.
• When running and stopped: The warning is shown while the vehicle is moving and while the vehicle is stationary.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "When running and stopped".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and monitor will return to the display in step 1 of this procedure.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed" then return to the display in step 1 of this procedure.

Other settings

ND0502200027

1. Display "Other settings" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0020830

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the function you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

• “Rheostat synchronization” → P3-125
• "Timer buzzer setting" → P3-126
• “History” → P.3-127
- “Opening display setting” → P.3-128

Features and controls

Rheostat synchronization

N00502300028

It is possible to disable the function that adjusts the monitor brightness in synchronization with the instrument panel light dimmer control.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• ON: Display brightness synchronized with instrument panel light dimmer control
• OFF: Display brightness not synchronized with instrument panel light dimmer control

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "ON".

Features and controls

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Rheostat synchronization" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Rheostat synchronization" display.

Timer buzzer setting

N00502400029

It is possible to turn on or off the function that causes the tone to sound when the countdown timer reaches 0:00:00.

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the "SELECT" function button.

• ON: The tone sounds.

- OFF: The tone does not sound.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "ON".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Timer buzzer setting" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Timer buzzer setting" display.

History

N00502500033

It is possible to change the range for which historical data are shown in the graphs.

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the "SELECT" function button.

• 3 hours: The average value is added to the graph every 6 minutes. Data for a maximum of 3 hours are shown in the graph.
• 12 hours: The average value is added to the graph every 24 minutes. Data for a maximum of 12 hours are shown in the graph.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "3 hours".

Features and controls

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "History" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "History" display.

Features and controls

Opening display setting

N00534100061

The opening display that appears when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to the "ACC" or "ON" position can be selected from the following two versions:

Line drawing of a car inside a control panel with three buttons labeled DISP (no text or symbols on the car itself)

TA4000050

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the number of the desired opening display, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. To set the selected display as the opening display, press the "OK" function button.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the monitor will show "The setting was changed." and will return to the "Opening display setting" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Opening display setting" display.

Features and controls

NOTE

- For vehicles with satellite radio, if the ignition switch is turned "OFF" while the display is showing an indication other than the audio display, the SIRIUS™ logo will not appear when the ignition switch is next turned "ON". If you wish to have the SIRIUS logo shown in the display again, switch to the audio display and then turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position.

TA0024287

"SIRIUS", the SIRIUS dog logo and channel names and logos are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio, Inc.

Date setting

N00534200075

1. Display "Date setting" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0020553

1. To change the month, day and year readings, press the "SELECT" function button. Each time the "SELECT" function button is pressed, the item to be adjusted will switch between month/day/year.

Press the “function button to change to the desired month or number. Pressing” function button for more than 2 seconds will fast forward to the desired change. When the date has been adjusted, press the “SET” function button. The display will return to its previous display.

NOTE

- When the “function button is pressed, the month, day, and year indications change as follows:

• month: JAN → FEB → ⋯ → DEC → JAN → ⋯
• day: 1 → 2 → 3 → ⋯ → 31 → 1 → ⋯
• year: 2006 → 2007 → 2008 → ⋯ → 2098 → 2006 ⋯

Compass zone code setting

N00534300047

1. Find your current geographic location and the correct corresponding zone number on the zone map.

Features and controls

1. Display "Zone code setting" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the correct zone code number, and press the "SELECT" function button.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Compass setting" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed" and then return to the "Compass setting" display.

NOTE

●The correct zone code is memorized even if the battery is disconnected.

Features and controls

Compass calibration

N00534400077

CAUTION

●Operate the compass calibration only when the vehicle is in a safe, open area.

1. Display "Compass calibration" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. To perform compass calibration, press the "YES" function button.

If you press the "NO" function button, the monitor will return to the "Compass setting" display.

1. When the message in the illustration appears, slowly turn the vehicle through 360^ within the specified time.

When compass calibration has been completed successfully, the tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Compass setting" display.

If compass calibration is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Compass setting" display.

NOTE

●Spend at least 30 seconds turning the vehicle through 360°.
● The 360° turn may be performed clockwise or counterclockwise.
- It is possible to perform compass calibration by driving in a 360 ° loop around the neighborhood.
- If you press the "DISP" function button to change the display during compass calibration, the compass will not be displayed correctly until compass calibration has been completed.

Lights customization

N00534500065

1. Display "Lights" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the function you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0018921

• "Headlight auto-shutoff function" P.3-136
• “Dome light shutoff time” → P3-137
• "Interior light auto-shutoff time" P.3-138

Headlight auto-shutoff function

N00535500105

It is possible to change the setting for the headlight auto-shut-off function.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

TA4000379

A: When the ignition key is turned from the "ON" position to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position with the light switch in the "Dor" position, the exterior lights automatically go off 3 minutes later or if the driver's door is opened.

B: When the ignition key has been turned from the "ON" position to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position with the light switch in the "∅0r " " position, the exterior lights automatically go off 3 minutes later or if the driver's door is opened. When the light switch has been placed in the "∅0r " " ∃D position with the ignition key in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position, the exterior lights automatically go off 3 minutes later.

C: With the light switch in the "206r" position, the exterior lights remain on regardless of the position of the ignition key. (No headlight auto-shutoff takes place.)

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "A".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Headlight auto-shutoff function" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Headlight auto-shutoff function" display.

Dome light shutoff time

N00535600119

It is possible to change the period over which the interior lights (dome light, reading lights, rear personal lights, luggage room light and door lights) gradually dims when the doors and the liftgate have been closed with the dome light switch in the "DOOR" position.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• A:0 second (The interior light goes out immediately without being dimmed.)
  • B:15 seconds
  • C:30 seconds
  • D:60 seconds
  • E:120 seconds
  • F:180 seconds

Features and controls

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "C".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Dome light shutoff time" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Dome light shutoff" display.

Interior light auto-shutoff time

N00535700064

It is possible to change the period that elapses until each interior light whose switch is in the "ON" position automatically goes off when the ignition key is turned from the "ON" position to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

TA0018934

• A: 3 minutes
• B: 30 minutes
• C: 60 minutes
• D: No auto-shutoff

(Interior light auto-shutoff does not take place.)

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "B".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Interior light auto-shutoff time" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Interior light auto-shutoff time" display.

Wipers customization

N00534600040

1. Display "Wipers" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the function you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

• “Windshield wiper speed-sensitive operation” → P.3-140
  • “Rear wiper intermittent interval” → P3-140

Features and controls

Windshield wiper speed-sensitive operation

N00535800049

It is possible to turn speed-sensitive operation of the wind-shield wipers "ON" or "OFF".

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• ON: Enables speed-sensitive operation.
• OFF: Disables speed-sensitive operation.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "ON".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Windshield wiper speed-sensitive operation" display. If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Windshield wiper speed-sensitive operation" display.

Rear wiper intermittent interval

N00535900037

It is possible to change the rear wiper's operating interval.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

Features and controls

• A:8 seconds interval
• B:4 seconds interval

If the rear wiper switch is turned “OFF” → “ON” → “OFF” → “ON” continuously, the rear wiper operates continuously.

• C:8 seconds interval

If the rear wiper switch is turned "OFF" → "ON" → "OFF" → "ON" continuously, the rear wiper operates continuously.

• D:16 seconds interval

If the rear wiper switch is turned "OFF" → "ON" → "OFF" → "ON" continuously, the rear wiper operates continuously.

• E: Continuous operation

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "A".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Rear wiper intermittent interval" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Rear wiper intermittent interval" display.

Features and controls

Keyless entry system & power door lock system customization

NDD534700138

1. Display "Keyless entry system & power door lock system" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0019003

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the function you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA4000281

Features and controls

• “Keyless entry system confirmation by horn” → P3-143
• "Keyless entry system confirmation by turn signal lights" → P3-143
• “Keyless entry automatic relocking time” → P3-145
• “Unlock operation using keyless entry system or door key” → P3-146

Keyless entry system confirmation by horn

N00536000093

It is possible to change the confirmation function provided by the horn when the keyless entry system is used to lock the doors.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• A: The horn sounds when the doors and the liftgate are locked.
- B: When a lock operation has been performed, the horn sounds when the "LOCK" button is pressed again.

• C: The horn does not sound.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "B".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Keyless entry system confirmation by horn" display. If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Keyless entry system confirmation by horn" display.

Keyless entry system confirmation by turn signal lights

N00536100065

It is possible to change the confirmation function provided by the turn signal lights when the keyless entry system is used to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.

Features and controls

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• A: The turn signal lights blink when the doors and the liftgate are locked or unlocked.
• B: The turn signal lights blink only when the doors and the liftgate are locked.
• C: The turn signal lights blink only when the doors and the liftgate are unlocked.
• D: The turn signal lights do not blink.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is “A”.

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Keyless entry system confirmation by turn signal lights" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Keyless entry system confirmation by turn signal lights" display.

Keyless entry automatic relocking time

N00536200066

It is possible to change the time that elapses before automatic relocking when the keyless entry system has been used to unlock and no doors and the liftgate are opened.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• A:30 seconds
• B:60 seconds
• C:120 seconds
• D:180 seconds

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "A".

Features and controls

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Keyless entry automatic relocking time" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Keyless entry automatic relocking time" display.

Features and controls

Unlock operation using keyless entry system or door key

N00536200067

It is possible to change the door(s) and the liftgate that will be unlocked when an unlock operation is performed using the keyless entry system or when the driver's door is unlocked using the key.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

TA4000278

• A:A single unlock operation unlocks only the driver's door.
  Two unlock operations unlock all of the doors and the liftgate.
  • B:A single unlock operation unlocks all of the doors and the liftgate.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "A".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Unlock operation using keyless entry system or door key" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Unlock operation using keyless entry system or door key" display.

Buzzers customization

N00534900056

1. Display "Buzzers" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. Press the "function button, align the cursor with the function you wish to change, and press the "SELECT" function button.

• "Turn signal buzzer" → P3-148
• “Door-ajar warning buzzer” → P3-149

Turn signal buzzer

N00536600044

It is possible to turn on or off the function that causes the tone to sound when the turn signal lever is used.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• ON: The tone sounds.
• OFF: The tone does not sound.

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "OFF".

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, a tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Turn signal buzzer" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Turn signal buzzer" display.

Door-ajar warning buzzer

N00536700090

It is possible to change the setting for the door-ajar warning buzzer.

1. Press the “function button, align the cursor with the desired setting, and press the “SELECT” function button.

• ON: If the vehicle reaches a speed of more than 5 mph (8 km/h) with any door or the liftgate or ajar, the tone sounds and the door-ajar warning light flashes 4 times then comes on steadily.
• OFF: Even if the vehicle reaches a speed of more than 5 mph (8 km/h) with any door or the liftgate or ajar, the tone does not sound. Also, the door-ajar warning light does not flash. (It comes on steadily.)

NOTE

●The initial (default) setting is "ON".

Features and controls

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the tone will sound once and the monitor will return to the "Door-ajar warning buzzer" display.

If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show "The setting failed." then return to the "Door-ajar warning buzzer" display.

Number of keyless entry registration

N00535200030

It is possible to confirm the number of registered remote control transmitters.

1. Display "Number of keyless entry registration" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

TA0019032

1. If communication is successful, the monitor will show the number of registered remote control transmitters then return to the display in step 1 of this procedure. If communication is not successful, the monitor will show the number of registered remote control transmitters as “—” then return to the display in step 1 of this procedure.

Features and controls

Defaults

N00535100055

The default function returns all customized settings to their initial conditions.

1. Display "Defaults" on the monitor in accordance with "Basic operation" (see page 3-109), align the cursor with it, and press the "SELECT" function button.

Features and controls

1. To return all customized settings to their initial conditions, press the "YES" function button.

If you press the "NO" function button, the monitor will return to the "Defaults" display.

1. The monitor will show "The setting is progressing" while the setting change is in progress.

When the setting change has been completed successfully, the monitor will show “The setting was initialized” then return to the display in step 1 of this procedure. If the setting change is not successful, the monitor will show “Initialization failed” then return to the display in step 1 of this procedure.

Care of the monitor

N0053360014

If the monitor (the liquid crystal display) becomes dirty or covered in fingerprints, clean it with a soft, dry cloth.

NOTE

●Do not use a wet cloth or any kind of spray cleaner as this may cause damage.

Error message

N00533700086

If the voltage drops, the tone will sound once and the monitor will give the display shown above then go blank.

Should this happen, there may have been a drop in the battery voltage so you should check the battery condition.

When the voltage returns to normal, the previous display will appear.

If the battery is in good condition and the display does not turn on, please have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

NOTE

●The monitor may go blank without giving the error message display shown above.

If the temperature inside the monitor increases excessively, a tone will sound once and the monitor will give the display shown above then go blank.

Park the vehicle in a shady place and open the windows to let plenty of fresh air inside the vehicle.

When the temperature inside the monitor returns to normal, the previous display will appear.

If the display does not turn on, please have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Features and controls

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

N00522500488

Headlights

Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

As your vehicle is equipped with daytime running lights, the combinations of switch operations and illuminated lights differ in accordance with the following conditions.

Features and controls

[When the engine is started and the parking brake is released]

The daytime running lights come on.

OFF	Headlights illuminate dimly
EDGE	Headlights illuminate dimly andParking, tail, front and rear side-marker lights, licenseplate and instrument panel lights on
ED	Headlights and other lights on

NOTE

- Once the daytime running lights have been turned on, the illuminated lights do not go off until the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

[When the engine is not running, or the engine is running but the parking brake has not been released]

The engine can be started with the headlights off when the vehicle is stationary.

OFF	All lights off
EDGE	Parking, tail, front and rear side-marker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on
ED	Headlights and other lights on

NOTE

- Do not leave the headlights and other lights on for a long period of time when the engine is not running. The battery will run down.

- When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. However, if water collects inside the light, have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Light auto-shutoff function (headlights and other lights)

N00532600307

- If the ignition key is turned to "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removed from the ignition switch and the driver's door is opened with the light switch in the "306r " " 3D position, the lights automatically turn off.

- If the driver's door is opened after the key is removed from the ignition switch, a high-pitched constant tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights.

- If the driver's door is opened with the key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched tone will sound to remind you to remove the key.

- If the ignition key is turned to "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removed from the ignition switch with the driver's door closed and the light switch in the "☐or " " ID position, the lights will stay on for about 3 minutes and then turn off automatically.

NOTE

- In vehicles with multi center display, multi center display can be used to deactivate the light auto-shutoff function. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

When you want to keep the lights on:

If the light switch is turned to the “ ^20 or “” position again after the engine is turned off, the 3 minute auto-shutoff function described above will not work. The lights (parking lights, tail lights and license plate lights) will stay on and will not turn off automatically.

NOTE

●In vehicles with multi center display, multi center display can be used to keep the light on for approximately 3 minutes after you leave the vehicle.
For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

If the light auto-shutoff function is reprogrammed, you can activate the 3-minute auto-shutoff function as follows:

1. After turning the ignition key to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removing it from the ignition switch, set the light switch to the "OFF" position.
2. Put the light switch back to the “” or “” position again and get out of the vehicle.
3. The light will automatically turn off after 3 minutes.

NOTE

• When the driver's door is opened, a continuous high-pitched tone will sound if the key has been removed; a continuous low-pitched tone will sound if the key is in the ignition switch.
  The tone stops sounding when the driver's door is closed.

Headlight reminder buzzer

N00549800125

If the driver's door is opened with the key in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removed from the ignition switch while the lights are on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn off the lights. The lights will turn off automatically and so will the tone. Or you can turn the light switch to the "OFF" position to stop the tone.

Features and controls

Dimmer (high/low beam change)

N00549900113

To change the headlights from high beam to low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal lever to fully toward you (1). Switch the headlights to low beam as a courtesy whenever there are oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue light in the instrument cluster indicates when the headlights are on high beam.

Headlight flasher

ND055000130

You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever gently toward you (2). The lights will go back to normal when you let go. While the high beam is on, you will see a blue light on the instrument panel.

NOTE

●You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever toward you, even if the light switch is off.

- If you turn the lights off with the headlights set to high-beam illumination, the headlights are automatically returned to their low-beam setting when the light switch is next turned to the “≡” position.

Turn signal lever

N00522600027

When changing lanes, or making a gradual turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” position (1). It will return to the neutral position when you let go. Use the full position (2) when making a normal turn. The lever will return to the neutral position when the turn is complete. There may be times when the lever does not return to the neutral position. This usually happens when the steering wheel is turned only slightly. You can easily return the lever by hand.

Features and controls

NOTE

●A light in the instrument panel flashes to show when the front and rear turn signal lights are working properly.
If this light flashes faster than usual, check for a burned out lamp bulb or malfunctioning connection.
If the panel light does not come on when the lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a burned out bulb in the panel.
Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

- In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to select whether the tone will sound or not sound when the hazard warning flashers are activated. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

Features and controls

Hazard warning flasher switch

N00522700161

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and a circular traffic sign (no readable text or symbols)

If you press the flasher switch, the front and rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and so will the hazard warning lights. This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion, except for emergencies.

If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers will keep working after the ignition key is removed.

NOTE

• If you keep the flashers on for several hours with the engine turned off, the battery will run down.
• In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to select whether the tone will sound or not sound when the hazard warning flashers are activated. For details, refer to "Setting and Customization" on page 3-108.

Front fog light switch (if so equipped)

N00522800247

The fog lights illuminate only when the headlights are on low beam. Press the switch to illuminate. Press the switch again to turn the lights off.

The indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate while the fog lights are on.

NOTE

• If the headlights are switched to high beam, the fog lights will go out; they will illuminate again when the headlights are switched back to low beam.
• If the light switch is rotated to the "OFF" or "position while the front fog lights are illuminated, they will automatically turn off. They can be turned back on again by rotating the light switch back to "position, and pressing the front fog light switch once again.

Instrument panel light dimmer control

N00522900121

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turning this control while the light switch is in the “306r” position.

I-Bright

2- Dark

NOTE

- It is possible to disable the function that adjusts the brightness of the multi center display in synchronization with the instrument panel light dimmer control. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

Features and controls

Wiper and washer switch

N00523000392

Windshield wipers

The windshield wipers wipe when the wiper lever is moved as shown in the illustration and the ignition key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

MIST- Misting function

The wipers will wipe one time

OFF-Off

INT- Speed sensitive intermittent operation

Interval between wiper sweeps varies in accordance with vehicle speed.

LO-Slow

HI- Fast

Features and controls

NOTE

- In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to enable and disable speed-sensitive operation of the wipers. For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

To adjust intermittent intervals

With the lever in the "INT" (speed-sensitive) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (A).

1 - Fast
2- Slow

Misting function

Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and release, and the wipers will operate once.

Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle. If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST), the wipers continue operating until the lever is released.

3D illustration of a connector with an arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

Features and controls

Windshield washer

N00504600100

To turn on the windshield washer, pull the lever toward you with the ignition key in either the "ON" or "ACC" position. The wipers will wipe automatically several times when the washer fluid is sprayed.

To turn off the spray, release the lever.

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle head and its side profile with airflow patterns (no text or symbols)

Rear window wiper and washer

N00523200323

The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when the ignition key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

Turn the knob to operate the rear window wiper.

OFF-Off

INT- The wiper operates continuously for several seconds then operates intermittently at intervals of about 8 seconds.

Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window glass while the knob is turned fully in either direction.

When the washer fluid is sprayed, the wiper will automatically operate 2 or 3 times.

Features and controls

NOTE

• To ensure a clear rearward view, the wiper performs a number of continuous operations either when the switch is moved to the "INT" position or when the selector lever is moved to the "R" (REVERSE) position while the switch is in the "INT" position. Following this continuous operation, the wiper will automatically switch to intermittent operation.
• In vehicles with multi center display, multi center display can be used to adjust the time intervals of the intermittent wiper operation. For details, refer to “Setting and Customization” on page 3-108.
  ●The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Check the fluid level regularly and refill if necessary. (See "Washer fluid" on page 7-14.)

Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers

N00523500111

CAUTION

- If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, blocking your view. In cold weather, heat the glass with the defroster before using the washer.

NOTE

- Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely.

3-162

●Before using the wipers in cold weather, check to be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window. Using the wipers while the blades are frozen could cause the wiper motor to burn out.
- If the wipers become blocked by ice or other deposits on the glass, the motor may still burn out even if the wiper switch is OFF. If deposits form on the windshield, park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and clean the glass so that the wipers can operate smoothly.
●Avoid using the washer for more than 20 seconds at a time. Do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty or the pump may fail.
●During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution that will not freeze in the washer reservoir. Otherwise the washer may not work or may be damaged.
- Replace the wiper blades when they are worn. Use the proper size replacement blades. If you have questions, ask your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Electric rear window defogger switch

N00523700328

The electric rear window defogger can be used with the ignition key in the "ON" position.

The indicator light (A) will come on when you press the electric rear window defogger switch. Electric current will flow through the heating wires on the rear window to help clear away moisture or frost.

After about 17 minutes of operation, the defogger will shut off automatically.

To switch the defogger OFF before 17 minutes have passed, press the switch again. The indicator light will go out and the defogger will turn off.

If you need the defogger for more than 17 minutes, press the switch again. This will add 17 more minutes.

Features and controls

CAUTION

●The rear window defogger is not designed to melt snow. Remove any snow manually before using the rear window defogger.

●Use the rear window defogger only after the engine has started and is running. Be sure to turn the defogger switch off immediately after the window is clear to save on battery power.

●Do not place stickers, tape, or other items that are attached with adhesive over the grid wires on the rear window.

●When cleaning the inside rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid wires.

NOTE

- If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, mist can also be removed from the outside rearview mirrors when the rear window defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to "Heated mirror" on page 3-33.)

Features and controls

Horn switch

N00523800114

To honk the horn, press near the “” mark on the steering wheel.

Top-down view of a car steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Hands-free Bluetooth ^® cellular phone interface system with voice recognition (if so equipped)

N00506400102

The Hands-free Bluetooth ^® cellular phone interface system with voice recognition (Bluetooth ^® HFP) uses a wireless communication technology known as Bluetooth ^® to allow you to make hands-free calls in your vehicle using your Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone with Hands-free profile. The system is equipped with a voice recognition function, which lets you make hands-free calls by simple switch operations and voice command operations using a defined voice tree.

The Bluetooth ^® HFP can be used when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

To use the Bluetooth ^® HFP, you should first connect your Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone to the Bluetooth ^® HFP. Refer to “Pairing a cellular phone” on page 3-172.

Bluetooth ^® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.

WARNING

Although the Bluetooth ^ HFP allows you to make hands-free calls, if you choose to use the cellular phone while driving, you must not allow that usage to distract you in the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident. Refer to and follow all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving.

NOTE

• You cannot use the Bluetooth ^ HFP if your cellular phone has a dead battery or is turned off.
  ●Hands-free calls will not be possible in areas outside your cellular phone service area or locations where a signal cannot reach your phone.

Features and controls

Overhead console control switch

N00546700035

1- PHONE button
2- SPEECH button
3- microphone

Features and controls

PHONE button

●Press this button when an incoming call is received to answer the telephone.
- When another call is received during a call, press this button to put the first caller on hold and talk to the new caller.

- In such circumstances, you can press the button briefly to switch between callers. You will switch to the first caller and the other caller will be put on hold.

- To establish a three-way call in such situations, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode and then say "Join Calls."

●Press and hold this button when an incoming call is received to refuse the call.
●Press and hold this button during a call to end the current call.

When another call is on hold or there is an incoming call, you will switch to that call.

SPEECH button

●Press this button to change to voice recognition mode.
- If you press the button briefly while in voice recognition mode it, will interrupt prompting and allow voice command input.

Pressing the button longer will exit the voice recognition mode.

- Pressing this button briefly during a call will enable voice recognition and allow voice command input.

NOTE

- When you press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode with a cellular phone paired to the system, current information on the cellular phone, such as “remaining battery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,” will be displayed on the audio display.* (Refer to “Pairing a cellular phone” on page 3-172.)

*: Some cellular phones will not send this information to the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

• Call waiting and three-way calls can be used by the Bluetooth® HFP, only when those services can be used with your cellular phone.
• Users may experience a delay in vehicle audio when placing a call from the handset. Users may experience a delay in vehicle audio when answering an incoming call on the handset. To reduce delays users should place calls and receive calls through the Hands-free System.

Voice recognition function

N00506600133

The Bluetooth ^® HFP is equipped with a voice recognition function. Your voice will be recognized by a microphone in the overhead console, allowing you to make hands-free calls with voice commands.

Voice recognition is possible in US English, North American Spanish and Canadian French. The factory setting is US English.

Some of the voice commands indicated below have a number of alternative commands. For a table showing the voice commands in each language and the corresponding alternative commands, refer to “Commands and Alternatives” on page 3-187.

NOTE

- If the voice command that you say differs from the predefined command or cannot be recognized due to ambient noise or some other reason, the Bluetooth® HFP will ask you for the voice command again up to 3 times.

●For best performance and further reduction of ambient noise, the vehicle windows should be closed while engaging the voice recognition function.

Selecting the Language

There are two ways to change the language.

NOTE

●The more entries that are registered in the phonebook, the longer it will take to change the language.

Change the language using the "Language" command

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say "Setup."

3. Say "Language."

4. The voice guide will say “Select a language: English, French or Spanish.” Say the desired language. (Example: Say “English.”)

5. The voice guide will say “English (Spanish or French) selected. Is this correct?” Say “Yes” to start the language change process. Say “No” to return to Step 4.

6. When the voice guide says “English (Spanish or French) selected, returning to main menu” the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu.

System recognizes the command that you said and changes the language

From the main menu, say English Español Français

the Bluetooth ^® HFP will recognize the 1 word spoken command in the native language, and ask you if you want to change to that language.

1. The voice guide will say "Would you like to change the language to English (Spanish or French)?"

2. If you say "Yes," the voice guide will say "Please Wait, Switching to English (Spanish or French) Phonebook" and it will start the language change process.

If you do not want to change the language, say "No."

1. When the voice guide says “English (Spanish or French) selected, returning to main menu” the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu.

Features and controls

Speaker enrollment function

N00528900080

The Bluetooth ^® HFP can use the speaker enrollment function to create a voice model for one person per language.

Your voice characteristics and pronunciations are registered in this voice model. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth ^® HFP to recognize voice commands said by you.

You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want.

NOTE

●Phone calls received during the speaker enrollment process cannot be answered and operations initiated by the overhead console control switch or voice recognition will not work.

Speaker enrollment

N00529000020

It takes a few minutes to complete the speaker enrolment process.

To ensure the best results, run through the process while in the driver's seat, in an environment that is as quiet as possible (when there is no rain or strong winds and the vehicle windows are closed).

Use the following procedure for speaker enrollment.

1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position and pull the parking brake lever.

NOTE

●Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before attempting speaker enrollment.
●Please turn off your phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent interruption of the process.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Voice training."
3. The voice guide will say "This operation should only be performed while the vehicle is parked. Please say continue to perform this operation." Say "Continue."
4. The voice guide will say "See the owner's manual for the list of required training phrases. Press and release the SPEECH button when you are ready to begin. Press and hold the SPEECH button to cancel at any time."
5. Press the SPEECH button to start the speaker enrollment process.

NOTE

- If you do not start the speaker enrollment process within 3 minutes of pressing the SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment function will time out.

The voice guide will say “Speaker Enrollment has timed out.” The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited.

●Phone calls received during the speaker enrollment process cannot be answered.

1. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in table "Enrollment Commands" on page 3-193.

The system will register your voice and then move on to the registration of the next command. Continue the process until all phrases have been registered.

NOTE

- If you press the SPEECH button within 5 seconds of the reading of an enrollment phase number by the voice guide, the registration of the same phase number will be repeated. Continue the process until all phrases have been registered.

- If you press and hold down the SPEECH button within 5 seconds of the reading of an enrollment phase number by the voice guide, the system will beep and stop the speaker enrollment process.

1. When all enrollment commands have been read out, the voice guide will say "Speaker Enrollment is complete." The system will then end the speaker enrollment process and return to the main menu.

NOTE

●Completing the speaker enrollment process will turn on the voice model automatically.

●The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not work in this mode.

Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining

N00529100050

You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want.

You can also retrain the system.

Use the following procedure to perform these actions.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say "Voice training."

3. If you have completed a speaker enrollment process once already, the voice guide will say either "Enrollment is enabled. Would you like to disable, or retrain?" or "Enrollment is disabled. Would you like to enable, or retrain?"

Features and controls

1. When enrollment is "enabled," the voice model is on; when enrollment is "disabled," the voice model is off. Say the command that fits your needs.

Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enrollment process and recreate a new voice model. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” on page 3-168.)

NOTE

- If you say “Retrain” you will proceed to Step 4 under “Speaker enrollment.” The voice guide will say “This operation should only be performed while the vehicle is parked. Please say continue to perform this operation.”

Help function

N00506700033

The Bluetooth ^® HFP is equipped with a Help function.

If you say “Help” when the system is waiting for a voice command input, the system will tell you a list of the commands that can be used under the circumstances.

Canceling

N00506800034

There are two cancel functions.

If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” to exit from the Bluetooth® HFP. If you are anywhere else within the system, say “Cancel” to return to the main menu.

MUTE function

N00506900019

At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle microphone.

Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying “Mute” during a call will turn ON the MUTE function and mute the microphone.

Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turn off the MUTE function and cancel the mute on the microphone.

Confirmation function setting

ND150700033

The Bluetooth ^® HFP is equipped with a confirmation function. With the confirmation function activated, you are given more opportunities than normal to confirm a command when making various settings to the Bluetooth ^® HFP. This allows you to decrease the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed.

The confirmation function can be turned on or off by following the steps below.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Setup."
3. Say "Confirmation prompts."
4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are . Would you like to turn confirmation prompts .”
   Answer “Yes” to change the setting or answer “No” to keep the current setting.
5. The voice guide will say “Confirmation prompts are , ready” and then the system will return to the main menu.

Security function

N010538900012

It is possible to use a passcode as a security function by setting a passcode of your choice for the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

When the security function is turned on, it is necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit passcode in order to use all functions of the Bluetooth ^® HFP, except for reception.

Setting the passcode

N00539000010

Use the following procedure to turn on the security function by setting a passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Setup."
3. Say "Passcode."
4. The voice guide will say "Passcode is disabled. Would you like to enable it?" Answer "Yes."
   Answer "No" to cancel the setting of the passcode and return to the main menu.
5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-digit passcode. Remember this passcode. It will be required to use this system.” Say 4 numbers of your choice from 0 to 9 in order to input the 4-digit passcode.
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say "Passcode <4-digit passcode>. Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to return to the passcode input in Step 5.
7. When the registration of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say "Passcode is enabled returning to main menu, ready" and the system will return to the main menu.

Entering the passcode

N00539100024

If a passcode has been set and the security function is enabled, the voice guide will say “Hands-free System is locked. State the passcode to continue” when the SPEECH button is pressed to enter voice recognition mode. Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the passcode.

Features and controls

If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice guide will say "<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect Passcode. Please try again." Enter the correct passcode.

NOTE

●You can reenter the passcode as many times as you want.
- If you have forgotten your passcode, say "Cancel" to quit the voice input mode and then check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Disabling the passcode

N00539200012

Use the following procedure to turn off the security function by disabling the passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Setup."
3. Say "Passcode."
4. The voice guide will say "Passcode is enabled. Would you like to disable it?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to cancel the disabling of the passcode and return to the main menu.
5. When the disabling of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say "Passcode is disabled returning to main menu, ready" and the system will return to the main menu.

Pairing a cellular phone

N00507100164

To use the Bluetooth ^® HFP, you need to pair a Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone to the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

The Bluetooth ^® HFP can register up to a maximum of 7 Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phones. However, of the cellular phones registered, the cellular phone with the highest priority level will be automatically paired to the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

NOTE

- Some Bluetooth ^ compatible cellular phones may not be compatible with the Bluetooth ^ HFP.

You can determine what types of Bluetooth ^® cellular phones with Hands-Free Profile can be used by checking the following website for the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

www.mitsubishicars.com/owners

Features and controls

Use the following procedure to pair a Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone to the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position and pull the parking brake lever.

NOTE

●Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before pairing a cellular phone to the system.
2. Press the SPEECH button.
3. Say "Setup."
4. Say "Pairing Options."
5. The voice guide will say "Do you want to Pair a phone, delete a phone or list paired phones?" Say "Pair a phone."

NOTE

• A maximum of 7 Bluetooth ^ compatible cellular phones can be registered. If 7 cellular phones are already registered, delete a phone and then pair the new phone. (Refer to “Deleting a phone” on page 3-176.)

• The voice guide will say "This operation should only be performed while the vehicle is parked. Please say continue to perform this operation." Say "Continue."

• After the voice guide says "Please say a 4-digit pairing code," say a 4-digit code. The 4-digit code will be registered as a pairing code for the phone.

When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether the code said is acceptable. To continue with the code, answer "Yes."

Say "No" to return to pairing code selection.

NOTE

- The pairing code entered here is only used for the Bluetooth® connection certification. It is any 4-digit code the user would like to select.

Remember the pairing code as it needs to be keyed into the phone later in the pairing process.

Depending on the Bluetooth ^® connection settings selected, entry of this code may be required each time the phone attempts to “connect” to the Bluetooth ^® HFP. Refer to your cellular phone owner’s manual for connection defaults and settings.

1. The voice guide will say "Start pairing procedure on phone. See phone's manual for instructions." Refer to the owner's manual for your cellular phone and enter into the phone the pairing code that was registered in Step 7.

Features and controls

1. When the system finds a Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone, the voice guide will say “Please say the name of the phone after the beep.” After you hear the beep, name the phone by saying a name of your preference.
   When the confirmation function is on, the system will say "Adding , is this correct?"
   Answer "Yes" to accept that name or "No" to reenter a new name.

NOTE

• When the system cannot recognize the Bluetooth ^ compatible cellular phone, the pairing process will end and the system will beep and then return to normal status.
  Try the pairing process again after reconfirming whether or not the Bluetooth ^® HFP supports your Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone.

• The voice guide will say "Assign a priority for this phone between 1 and 7 where 1 is the phone used most often." Say a number between 1 and 7 to set a priority level for the cellular phone.

NOTE

• If you selected a priority level that has already been set for a different phone, the system will ask you whether you wish to override that priority level.
  To override the priority level, answer "Yes."
  Answer "No" to return to the priority level selection in Step 10.

• After the voice guide says " set to priority ," the system will start the pairing process. Wait a moment for the pairing process to complete.
  When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the assigned phone name and priority again. Answer "Yes."
  Answer “No” to return to the priority level selection in Step 10.

• When the pairing process is completed, the voice guide will say "Pairing Complete." The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited.

NOTE

- If you are having difficulty pairing the phone, assistance can be obtained by calling Mitsubishi hands free consumer support line 1-888-702-4100.

Selecting the phone

N00507200035

When multiple paired phones are present in range of the Bluetooth ^® HFP, the phone with the highest priority (set during the paring process) will be connected to the system.

Use the following procedure to connect to another paired phone with lower priority.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Setup."

3. Say "Select phone."

4. After the voice guide says "Please say," it will read out each priority number and phone name pair in order, starting with the phone that has the highest priority level (from 1 to 7).

Say the priority number of the phone that you want to connect to.

NOTE

●You can connect to a phone at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the priority number, even before all of the priority number and phone name pairs are read out by the system.

1. After the voice guide says " selected," the system will reconnect to the cellular phone. Wait a moment for the process to complete.

When the confirmation prompts are on, the system will ask you again whether the phone that you want to reconnect to is correct. Answer "Yes" to continue and reconnect to the cellular phone. If you answer "No," the system will ask "Which phone please?" Select the priority of the phone that you want to connect to.

1. When the reconnection of the cellular phone is completed, the voice guide will say " will temporarily override phone priorities" and then the system will return to the main menu.

NOTE

●To change the priority level of a specific phone, redo the pairing process for that phone. (Refer to “Pairing a cellular phone” on page 3-172.)

Having the system tell you a list of the registered cellular phones

N00507300052

You can use the following procedure to hear a list of the cellular phones that are currently registered.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say "Setup."

3. Say "Pairing Options."

4. The voice guide will say "Do you want to Pair a phone, delete a phone or list paired phones?" Say "list paired phones."

5. The Bluetooth ^® HFP will read out the paired phones in order, starting with the phone with the highest priority level.

6. When the voice guide is done reading all phone names, it will say "End of List, would you like to start from the beginning?"

To hear the list again from the beginning, answer "Yes." When you are done, answer "No" to return to the main menu.

NOTE

- If you press and release the SPEECH button and say "Continue" or "Previous" while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say "Continue" to proceed to the phone with the next highest priority level or "Previous" to return to the phone with the previous priority level.

Features and controls

Deleting a phone

N00507400053

Use the following procedure to delete a paired Bluetooth ^® compatible cellular phone from the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Setup."
3. Say "Pairing Options."
4. The voice guide will say "Do you want to Pair a phone, delete a phone or list paired phones?" Say "Delete a phone."
5. After the voice guide says “Please say,” it will read out each priority number and phone name pair in order, starting with the phone that has the highest priority level (from 1 to 7). After it completes reading all pairs, the voice guide will say “or all or say cancel to return to main menu.”

Say the priority number of the phone that you want to delete from the system.

Say “All” to delete all paired phones from the system, or “Cancel” to end the deletion process and return to the main menu.

1. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say "Removing (all) is this correct?"

Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s). If you answer “No,” the voice guide will ask “Which phone please?” Say again the priority number of the phone that you want to delete from the system.

1. When the phone deletion process is completed, the voice guide will say "Deleted." The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited.

If the phone deletion process fails for some reason, the voice guide will say “Delete failed.” The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be exited. Start over again from Step 1.

To make a call

ND1507500038

To use the Bluetooth ^® HFP to make a call, a Bluetooth ^® cellular phones with Hands-free Profile must be paired to the system. If a cellular phone has not been paired to the system, do so in accordance with the instructions provided in “Pairing a cellular phone” on page 3-172.

Making a call by using the telephone number

N00507600101

You can make a call by saying the telephone number.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Dial."
3. After the voice guide says "Number Please," say the telephone number.

The Bluetooth ^® HFP will then make the call.

When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the telephone number again. To continue with that number, answer "Yes."

To change the telephone number, answer "No" and then say the telephone number again.

NOTE

- In the case of English, the system will recognize both “zero” and “oh (Letter “o”) for the number “0.” Refer to “Commands and Alternatives” on page 3-187 for details.

Making a call by saying a name in the system phone-book

N00507700056

You can make a call by saying a name that has been registered in the phonebook for the Bluetooth ^® HFP.

For more information on the phonebook, refer to “Phonebook function” on page 3-179.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Call."
3. After the voice guide says "Name Please," say the name of the person that you want to call that is registered in the phonebook.
4. If multiple telephone numbers are registered for the person, the voice guide will ask "Would you like to call at {home}, {work}, {mobile} or {pager}?" Say the location of the number that you want to call.

NOTE

- If a telephone number is not registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say “{home/work/mobile/pager} not found for . Would you like to add location or try again, or say “cancel” to return to main menu.”

Say “Try again” to redo the phone call, “Add location” to add a new location to the telephone book, or “Cancel” to hang up the phone.

1. After the voice guide says "Calling at ," the Bluetooth® HFP will make the call.

When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether or not the name of the recipient of the call is correct. Answer "Yes" to use that name.

If you want to change the name or location to call, answer "No." The system will return to Step 3.

Features and controls

Redialing

N00507800015

You can redial the last number called, based on the history of dialed calls in the paired cellular phone.

Use the following procedure to redial.

1. Press the SPEECH button.

2. Say "Redial."

SEND function

NDD508001027

During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter the voice recognition mode and then say “{number string} SEND” to generate a DTMF tone.

For example, if during a call you need to simulate the press of a phone button as a response to an automated system, press the SPEECH button and speak "1 2 3 4 pound SEND" and the 1234# will be sent on your cellular phone.

Switching between hands-free mode and private mode

N00508100031

The Bluetooth ^® HFP can switch between Hands-free mode (Hands-free calls) and private mode (calls using cellular phone).

If you press the SPEECH button and say “Transfer call” during a Hands-free call, you can stop the Hands-free mode and talk in private mode on your cellular phone.

To return to Hands-free mode, press the SPEECH button again and say “Transfer call.”

Receiving calls

N00508200032

If an incoming phone call is received while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the audio system will be automatically turned on and Incoming Call will be played, even when the audio system was originally off.

The voice guide announcement for the incoming call will be output from the front passenger's seat speaker.

If the CD player or radio was playing when the incoming call was received, the audio system will mute the sound from the CD player or radio and output only the Incoming Call.

To receive the call, press the PHONE button on the overhead console control switch.

When the call is over, the audio system will return to its previous state.

Phonebook function

N00508300020

The Bluetooth ^® HFP has its own phonebook separate from the phonebook on the cellular phone.

This phonebook is used when making calls with the voice recognition function.

You can register up to 32 names for each language in the phonebook.

Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: HOME, WORK, MOBILE and PAGER. You can register one telephone number for each location.

The phonebook main menu is used to register or edit information in the phonebook.

Use the following procedure to call up the phonebook main menu.

1. Press the SPEECH button.
2. Say "Phonebook."
3. The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: new entry, edit, list names, delete or erase all, or say cancel to return to main menu" and will wait for your command.

NOTE

●Disconnecting the battery cable will not delete information registered in the phonebook.

New entry

N00508400050

You can register a new entry in the phonebook by saying "New entry" on the phonebook main menu. You can register up to a maximum of 32 entries. Use the following procedure to register a new entry.

1. If you have not reached the limit yet, the voice guide will say "Name Please." Say your preferred name to register it.

NOTE

- If you have reached the limit, the voice guide will say "Phonebook full. Do you want to delete a name or say 'Cancel' to return to main menu."

Say “Delete” to delete an entry or “Cancel” to return to the main menu.

1. When the name has been registered, the voice guide will say "HOME, WORK, MOBILE, OR PAGER?" Say the location for which you want to register a number.

NOTE

- When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the location again. To continue with the current location, answer "Yes."

Answer “No” to return to location selection in Step 2. If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say “The current number is , number please.”

If you do not want to change the telephone number, say the original number to keep it registered.

Features and controls

1. Say the telephone number to register it.

NOTE

• In the case of English, the system will recognize both “zero” and “oh (Letter “o”) for the number “0.” Refer to “Commands and Alternatives” on page 3-187 for details.
• When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm the telephone number again. To continue with the current telephone number, answer "Yes."

Say "No" to return to telephone number registration in Step 3.

1. When the telephone number has been registered, the voice guide will say "Number saved. Would you like to add another number for this entry?"

To add another telephone number for a new location for the current entry, answer "Yes." The system will return to location selection in Step 2.

Answer "No" to end the registration process and return to the main menu.

Edit

N00508500035

You can edit information in the phonebook by saying “Edit” on the phonebook main menu.

1. The voice guide will say "Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say "list names," or say "cancel" to return to main menu." Say the name of the entry that you want to edit.

NOTE

• If the name that you said is not in the phonebook, the voice guide will say “Pardon, please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say “list names,” or say “cancel” to return to main menu.”
  Say “Try again” to try again or “Cancel” to end the edit process and return to the main menu.
• If you say "List Names," the system will read out each name registered in the phonebook in order. Refer to "Having the system tell you a list of the phonebook entries" on page 3-181.
• The voice guide will say "Home, Work, Mobile or Pager?" Select the location for which you want to change the telephone number.

NOTE

- When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm again the name and location to edit. To continue with that information, answer “Yes.”

Answer "No" to return to Step 1.

1. After the voice guide says "Number Please," say the telephone number to register it.

If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say “The current number is . New number, please.” Say a new telephone number to change the number.

NOTE

- When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm again the telephone number. To continue with that number, answer "Yes."

To change the telephone number, answer "No" and then say the telephone number again.

1. When the telephone number change process is done, the voice guide will say "Number changed. Would you like to call this number, edit another entry, or say cancel to return to main menu?"

Say “Call” to immediately call the number, “Edit” to edit another number, or “Cancel” to end the edit process and return to the main menu.

Having the system tell you a list of the phonebook entries

N(0151)8600152

You can hear a list of the names registered in the phonebook by saying “List names” on the phonebook main menu.

1. The Bluetooth ^® HFP will read out the entries in the phonebook in order.

2. When the voice guide is done reading the list, it will say "End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?" When you want to check the list again from the beginning, answer "Yes."

When you are done, answer "No" to return to the main menu.

NOTE

- You can call, edit or delete a name that is being read out. Press the SPEECH button and say "Call" to call the name, "Edit" to edit it, or "Delete" to delete it.

The system will beep and then execute your command.

- If you press and release the SPEECH button and say "Continue" or "Previous" while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say "Continue" to proceed to the next entry or "Previous" to return to the previous entry.

Features and controls

Deleting a registered number

N00511700057

You can delete a telephone number in the phonebook by saying "Delete" on the phonebook main menu.

1. The voice guide will say "Please say the name of the entry you would like to delete, or say "list names," or say "cancel" to return to main menu." Say the name of the entry that you want to delete.

NOTE

• If the name that you said is not in the phonebook, the voice guide will say “Name not found. Would you like to try again or say ‘Cancel’ to return to main menu?”
• Say “Try again” to try again or “Cancel” to end the deletion process and return to the main menu.
• If you say “List Names,” the system will read out each entry registered in the phonebook in order. Refer to “Having the system tell you a list of the phonebook entries” on page 3-181.
• If there are telephone numbers registered for multiple locations for the selected name, the voice guide will say "Would you like to delete [Home,] [Work,] [Mobile,] [Pager,] or all." Select the location that has the telephone number that you want to delete. Say "All" if you want to delete the telephone numbers for all locations.

• The system will confirm whether it is ok to delete the telephone number of the selected location. Answer "Yes" to delete the number. Answer "No" to cancel the deletion process and return to Step 1.

• When the deletion of the telephone number is completed, the voice guide will say " deleted" and then the system will return to the main menu.

NOTE

- If you delete all telephone numbers registered for the 4 locations of an entry, the entry itself will be deleted from the phonebook.

Erasing the Phonebook

N00511800045

You can delete all registered information in the phonebook by saying “Erase all” on the phonebook main menu.

1. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will ask "Are you sure you want to erase everything from your Hands-free system phonebook?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook and return to the main menu.
2. The system will confirm one more time. Answer "Yes" to continue. Answer "No" to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook and return to the main menu.
3. When the deletion of all information in the phonebook is completed, the voice guide will say "Hands-free system Phonebook Erased" and then return to the main menu.

General information

N00511900046

MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC07 IC: 279B-MBLUEC07

Your Hands-free Bluetooth ^® cellular phone interface system with voice recognition operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

●This device may not cause interference.
●This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

- Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.

Features and controls

Voice Command Tree

N00512000086

graph TD
    A["Main Menu"] --> B["Dial"]
    A --> C["Call"]
    A --> D["Redial"]
    A --> E["English"]
    A --> F["Français"]
    A --> G["Espanol"]
    A --> H["Phonebook"]
    A --> I["Voice Training"]
    A --> J["Setup"]
    B --> K["Enter number"]
    K --> L["Number is dialed"]
    C --> M["Enter name from phonebook"]
    D --> N["Last number dialed on connected phone is redialed"]
    E --> O["Confirms if the user wants to change the current language to the spoken language"]
    F --> P["System (including the phonebook) will change to the spoken language if the user confirms"]
    G --> Q["See Phonebook Figure"]
    H --> R["Get phrases from user"]
    I --> S["Generate Model"]
    J --> T["See Setup Figure"]

Note: Associated voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

AA5009282

Voice Command Tree - Phonebook

Features and controls

N00512100045

graph TD
    A["Phonebook"] --> B["New Entry"]
    A --> C["Edit"]
    A --> D["List Names"]
    A --> E["Delete"]
    A --> F["Erase All"]
    B --> G["Enter Name"]
    C --> H["Enter Name"]
    D --> I["Entries listed one at a time"]
    E --> J["Enter Name"]
    F --> K["First Confirmation"]
    G --> L["Enter Location"]
    H --> M["Enter Location"]
    I --> N["Enter Location"]
    J --> O["Enter Location"]
    K --> P["Second Confirmation"]
    L --> Q["Enter Number"]
    M --> R["Current Number is Played"]
    N --> S["Entry Deleted"]
    O --> T["Phonebook Cleared"]
    P --> U["New Entry Added"]
    Q --> V["Enter New Number"]
    R --> W["Entry is Modified"]
    S --> X["End"]
    Y["New Entry Added"] --> Z["End"]

Note: Associated voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

AA5008852

Features and controls

Voice Command Tree - Setup

N00512800039

graph TD
    A["Setup"] --> B["Confirmation Prompts"]
    A --> C["Pairing Options"]
    A --> D["Select Phone"]
    A --> E["Language"]
    A --> F["Passcode"]
    B --> G["Toggle Confirmation Prompts On/Off"]
    C --> H["Pair"]
    C --> I["Delete"]
    C --> J["List"]
    H --> K["Say 4 digit pairing code"]
    I --> L["System lists paired devices by ID"]
    J --> M["System lists paired devices"]
    K --> N["Start pairing procedure on the device. See the device manual for instructions"]
    L --> O["Say ID of device to delete"]
    M --> P["System confirms device ID"]
    N --> Q["Enter the name of the device"]
    O --> R["System confirms device deletion of all paired devices"]
    P --> S["System confirms device deletion of all paired devices"]
    Q --> T["All paired devices deleted"]
    R --> U["Set device to highest priority phone"]
    S --> V["Connect to selected phone"]
    T --> W["Switch to the new languages prompts and phonebook if user confirms change"]

Note: Associated voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

AA5008865

Commands and Alternatives
N00513300073

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
SETUP	English Setup -
	Spanish Configuración -
	French Configurer -
PHONE-BOOK	English Phonebook -
	Spanish Agenda -
	French Récertoire -
DIAL	English Dial -
	Spanish Marcar -
	French Composer -
CALL	English Call -
	Spanish Llamar -
	French Appeler -
REDIAL	English Redial -
	Spanish Volver A Marcar -
	French Recomposer -
PAIRING OPTIONS	English Pairing Options Pairing
	Spanish	Opciones De Empa-rejamiento	Emparcjamiento
	French	Options De Jumelage	Jumelage

Features and controls

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
PAIR	English Pair	-
	Spanish Emparejar	-
	French Jumeler	-
DELETE A PHONE	English Delete A Phone Delete
	Spanish	Eliminar Un Télé-fono	Eliminar
	French	Supprimer Un Télé-phone	Supprimer
LIST	English List List Phones
	Spanish Listar Listar Teléfonos
	French Lister		Liste Des Télé-phones
SELECT PHONE	English Select Phone -
	Spanish	Seleccionar Télé-fono	-
	French	Sélectionner Un Téléphone	-
PREVIOUS	English Previous -
	Spanish Anterior -
	French Précédent -
TRANS-FER CALL	English Transfer Call -
	Spanish Transferir Llamada -
	French Transferer L'appel -

Features and controls

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
ADD LOCATION	English	Add Location -
	Spanish	Agregar {Una} Ubicación	-
	French	Ajouter {Un} Emplacement	-
CONFIRMATION PROMPTS	English	Confirmation Prompts	Confirmations, Prompts
	Spanish	Mensajes De Confirmación	Confirmaciones, Mensajes
	French	Invites De Confirmation	Confirmations, Invites
LANGUAGE	English Language -
	Spanish Idioma -
	French Langue -
NEW ENTRY	English New Entry -
	Spanish Nueva Entrada -
	French	Nouvelle Inscription	-
DELETE	English Delete -
	Spanish Eliminar -
	French Supprimer -

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
EDIT	English Edit -
	Spanish Editar	-
	French Modifier	-
CALL THIS NUMBER	English Call This Number Call
	Spanish	Llamar A Este Número	Llamar
	French Appeler Ce Numéro Appeler
EDIT ANOTHER ENTRY	English Edit Another Entry Edit
	Spanish Editar Otra Entrada Editar
	French	Modifier Une Autre Inscription	Modifier
TRY AGAIN	English Try Again	-
	Spanish Intentarlo De Nuevo	-
	French Reessayer	-
ERASE ALL	English Erase All	-
	Spanish Borrar Todo	-
	French Effacer Tout	-
LIST NAMES	English List Names	-
	Spanish Listar Nombres	-
	French Liste Des Noms	-

Features and controls

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
HOME	English Home -
	Spanish Casa En Su Casa
	French Maison À La Maison
WORK	English Work -
	Spanish Trabajo En Su Trabajo
	French Travail Au Travail
MOBILE	English Mobile -
	Spanish Celular En Su Celular
	French Mobile Sur Le Mobile
PAGER	English Pager -
	Spanish Pager Al Pager
	French Téléavertisseur		Sur Le Téléavertisseur
HELP	English Help -
	Spanish Ayuda -
	French Aide -
CONTI-NUE	English Continue -
	Spanish Continuar -
	French Continuer -

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
ALL	English All	-
	Spanish Todos	-
	French Tous	-
CANCEL	English Cancel	-
	Spanish Cancelar	-
	French Annuler	-
MUTE	English Mute	-
	Spanish Silencio	-
	French Sourdine	-
MUTE OFF	English Mute Off	-
	Spanish	Silencio Desactivado	-
	French	Désactiver La Sourdine	-
SEND	English Send	-
	Spanish Enviar	-
	French Envoyer	-
YES	English Yes	-
	Spanish Si	-
	French Oui	-

Features and controls

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
NO	English No -
	Spanish No -
	French Non -
ZERO	English Zero Oh (letter “O”)
	Spanish Cero O
	French Zero O (lettre «o»)
ONE	English One -
	Spanish Uno Una
	French Un Une
TWO	English Two -
	Spanish Dos -
	French Deux -
THREE	English Three -
	Spanish Tres -
	French Trois -
FOUR	English Four -
	Spanish Cuatro -
	French Quatre -
FIVE	English Five -
	Spanish Cinco -
	French Cinq -

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
SIX	English Six	-
	Spanish Seis -
	French Six	-
SEVEN	English Seven	-
	Spanish Siete	-
	French Sept -
EIGHT	English Eight	-
	Spanish Ocho	-
	French Huit -
NINE	English Nine	-
	Spanish Nueve	-
	French Neuf	-
STAR	English Star (*)	-
	Spanish Estrella (*)	Asterisco (*)
	French Étoile (*)	-
POUND	English Pound (#)	-
	Spanish Número (#)		Signo De Número (#)
	French Dièse (#)	-

Features and controls

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
Spoken Language	English English -
	Spanish Español -
	French Français -
PHONE-BOOK NEW ENTRY	English	Phonebook New Entry	-
	Spanish	Agenda - Nueva Entrada	-
	French	Répertoire Nouvelle Inscription	-
PHONE-BOOK EDIT	English Phonebook Edit -
	Spanish Agenda - Editar -
	French Répertoire Modifier -
PHONE-BOOK DELETE	English Phonebook Delete -
	Spanish Agenda - Eliminar -
	French	Répertoire Supprimer	-
PHONE-BOOK ERASE ALL	English	Phonebook Erase All	-
	Spanish	Agenda - Borrar Todo	-
	French	Répertoire Effacer Tout	-

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
PHONE-BOOK LIST NAMES	English	Phonebook List Names	-
	Spanish	Agenda - Listar Nombres	-
	French	Répertoire Liste Des Noms	-
SETUP CONFIRMATION PROMPTS	English	Setup Confirmation Prompts	Setup Confirmations, Setup Prompts
	Spanish	Configuración Mensajes De Confirma-ción	Configuración Confirmaciones, Configuración Mensajes
	French	Configurer Les Invites De Confir-mation	Configurer la Confirmation, Configurer les Invites
SETUP SELECT PHONE	English Setup Select Phone Setup Select
	Spanish	Configuración Selección De Telé-fono	Configuración Selección
	French	Configurer Sélec-tionner Un Télé-phone	Configurer Sélec-tionner

Features and controls

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
SETUP PAIRING OPTIONS	English	Setup Pairing Options	Setup Pairing
	Spanish	Configuración Opciones De Emparejamiento	-
	French	Configurer Les Options De Jumelage	Configurer le Jumelage
DELETE A NAME	English	Delete A Name	Delete, Delete Name
	Spanish	Eliminar Un Nombre	Eliminar, Eliminar Nombre
	French	Supprimer Un Nom	Supprimer, Supprimer Nom
SETUP LANGUAGE	English	Setup Language -
	Spanish	Configuración Idioma	-
	French	Configurer La Langue	-
VOICE TRAINING	English	Voice Training -
	Spanish	Aprendizaje De Voz -
	French	Entraînement À La Parole	-

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
PASSCODE	English Passcode -
	Spanish Contrasena -
	French NIP -
SETUP PASSCODE	English Setup Passcode -
	Spanish Configuración Contrasena		-
	French Configurer Le NIP -
RETRAIN	English Retrain
	Spanish Volver A Educar
	French Refaire L'entraînement		-
ENABLE	English Enable
	Spanish Activar
	French Activer		L'activer
DISABLE	English Disable
	Spanish Desactivar
	French Désactiver
SWAP CALLS	English Swap Calls
	Spanish Intercambiar llama-das		-
	French Passer à l'autre appel		-

Features and controls

Command	Language	Primary Command	Alternative Commands
JOIN CALLS	English Join Calls -
	Spanish Unir Llamadas -
	French Intégrer L’appel -
ENGLISH	English English -
	Spanish Inglés -
	French Anglais l’anglais
SPANISH	English Spanish -
	Spanish Español -
	French Espagnol l’espagnol
FRENCH	English French -
	Spanish Francés -
	French Français -

Enrollment Commands

N00539500057

Phrase #	English	Spanish	French
1	01-23456789	01-23456789	01-23456789
2	888-555-1212	888-555-1212	888-555-1212
3	Call	Llamar	Appeler
4	Dial Marcar	Composer
5	Setup	Configuración	Configurer
6	Cancel	Cancelar	Annuler

Phrase #	English	Spanish	French
7	Continue	Continuar	Continuer
8	Help	Ayude	Aide

Features and controls

Sun visors

N00524600324

Fold the sun visor downward (1) to reduce front glare while driving. To reduce side glare, turn the visor to the side (2).

To block out additional side glare, swing the sun visor sideways and slide it backward.

Diagram of a vehicle or container with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Vanity mirror

N00524700208

The vanity mirrors are located on the back of the sun visors. Opening the lid (A) of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror light (B).

CAUTION

- If the lid of the lighted vanity mirror is kept open for prolonged periods of time, the battery may be discharged.

Features and controls

Power outlet (if so equipped)

N00525000455

CAUTION

• Be aware that using electronic equipment with the engine off may run the battery down.
  Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory operating at 12 V and 120 W or less.
  When using two or more power outlets at the same time, make sure the total power consumption of the electrical accessories for the power outlets does not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
• When the power outlet is not in use, be sure to close the power outlet cover. This will prevent the power outlet from becoming clogged and short circuiting.

To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the cover located on the floor console and the right side wall of the rear luggage area, then insert the plug in the power outlet.

NOTE

●The power outlets can be used simultaneously.

Features and controls

Type 1

The accessory can be operated when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

Type 2

The power outlet can be used when the ignition switch is in any position.

Close-up of a car interior showing a power button labeled 'PONEA OUTLET' with 2V 120W indicator, no readable text or symbols beyond the button.

Digital clock (if so equipped)

N00525100182

When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, the time is displayed.

How each button works:

Set the time by pressing the various buttons as described below.

H (HOUR)- Press and hold the "H" button until the correct hour appears.

M (MINUTE)- Press and hold the "M" button until the correct minute appears.

NOTE

- If the battery cables are disconnected or the battery becomes discharged, the clock will have to be reset.

●For vehicles with multi center display, see "Digital clock/Calender" on page 3-90.

Interior lights

N00525300474

Features and controls

Interior light switch

N00537900132

The interior light switch can be used for adjusting the following switches: dome light, reading lights, luggage room light, rear personal lights and door lights.

NOTE

- If the light is left on with the ignition switch in the "LOCK" position, the lights go off automatically after about 30 minutes.

Refer to “Interior light auto-cutout function (dome light and other lights)” on page 3-203.

3D rendered image of a device casing with three labeled buttons (1, 2, 3) pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the casing itself)

TA0011140

1 (ON) - It is possible to turn on all of the interior lights {dome light, reading lights, rear personal lights, luggage room light and door lights} by placing the interior light switch in the "ON" position.

NOTE

- When the switch of the rear personal lights and luggage room light are in the "OFF" position, these lights do not come on when the interior light switch is placed to the "ON" position.

2 (DOOR) - It is possible to turn on all of the interior lights {dome light, reading lights, rear personal lights, luggage room light and door lights} by placing the interior light switch in the "DOOR" position and opening any door or the lifigate.

NOTE

- With the switches on the rear personal lights and luggage room light in the "OFF" position, the rear personal lights and luggage room light stay off when the interior light switch is in the "DOOR" position and a door or the liftgate is opened.

When all the doors and the liftgate are closed, the interior lights are dimmed gradually for 30 seconds then go off. However, the lights go off immediately without being dimmed if:

●The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
●All the doors and the liftgate are locked using the lock knobs of the front doors, the power door lock switch, or the remote control switch from the keyless entry system.

NOTE

• If the ignition key is removed with the doors and the liftgate closed, the interior lights come on for 30 seconds period then go off.
• When the switches of the reading lights, rear personal lights and luggage room light are in the "ON" position, these lights do not go off when all the doors and the liftgate are closed.
  ●In a vehicles with multi center display, the multi center display can be used to change the dimming period of interior lights.

For details, refer to “Setting and customization” on page 3-108.

3 (OFF) - It is possible to turn off all of the interior lights {dome light, reading lights, rear personal lights, luggage room light and door lights} by placing the interior light switch in the "OFF" position.

NOTE

- When the switches of the reading lights, rear personal lights and luggage room light are in the "ON" position, these lights do not go off when the interior light switch is placed to the "OFF" position.

Features and controls

Dome light

N00525400329

The dome light can be operated by sliding the interior light switch.

3D rendered image of a device casing with two bidirectional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols on the object itself)

NOTE

●The dome light switch is used for interior light switch. For details, refer to “Interior light switch” on page 3-198.
●It is impossible to turn on or off only the dome light.

Reading lights

N00537600126

Push the reading light switch (A) to turn on the light. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map light. Push the reading light switch again to turn the light off.

The reading light comes on when any door or the liftgate is opened and goes off when all the doors and the liftgate are closed.

3D model of a device casing with two internal compartments and three labeled sections marked 'A', no text or symbols present.

NOTE

- When the interior light switch is in the "OFF" position, the reading lights do not come on and go off when the doors or liftgate are opened and closed.

Rear personal lights

N00526000133

The rear personal lights can be turned on by pushing the rear personal light switches.

Interior view of a car showing a blank white panel and metallic seat (no text or symbols visible)

Features and controls

1 (ON) - The rear personal light comes on.
2 (OFF) - The rear personal light goes off.
3 (DOOR) - The rear personal lights illuminate when any door or the liftgate is opened and go off when all the doors and the liftgate are closed.

NOTE

- When the interior light switch is in the "OFF" position, the rear personal lights do not come on and go off when the doors or liftgate are opened and closed.

Features and controls

Luggage room light

N00526100147

The luggage room light can be turned on by sliding the luggage room light switch.

1 (ON) - The luggage room light comes on.

2 (●) - The luggage room light comes on when any door or the liftgate is opened and goes off when all the doors and the liftgate are closed.

3(OFF) - The luggage room light goes off.

NOTE

- When the interior light switch is in the "OFF" position, the luggage room light does not come on and goes off when the doors or liftgate are opened and closed.

Door lights

ND0530400095

Close-up of a mechanical component with visible parts and a small square feature, no text or symbols present.

The door lights come on when any door or the liftgate are opened.

When any door and the liftgate are closed, the door lights go off after about 30 seconds.

Interior light auto-cutout function (dome light and other lights)

N00526300367

If any of the interior lights are left on with the ignition switch in the "LOCK" position, the lights go off automatically after about 30 minutes.

The lights come on again if the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" or "ACC" position, any door or the liftgate is opened and closed, or the keyless entry system is operated.

NOTE

●In a vehicle with a multi center display, the multi center display can be used to alter functions as listed below.

For details, please refer to "Setting and customization" on page 3-108.

- The interior light auto-cutout function can be turned off.

- The interior light auto-cutout delay can be changed.

Accessory boxes

N00526400397

Convenient storage space is located throughout the vehicle.

1- Cup holder
2- Bottle holder
3- Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)
4- Floor console box/Tissue holder
5- Glove compartment

Features and controls

Glove compartment

N005265001255

To open, pull the lever (A).

Close-up of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrow (no visible text or symbols)

NOTE

- If your vehicle is equipped with glove compartment light, when the light switch is set in either the “or” position, the glove compartment light illuminates.

WARNING

●An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving.

Floor console box/Tissue holder

N01526600038

Floor console box

The floor console box is located under the arm rest.

1. Lift the arm rest (A).

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car's rear gear shift lever and labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond labels)

2. Open the lid (B). Tissue holder

Interior view of a car gear shift lever system (no text or symbols visible)

Features and controls

The tissue holder is located on the back of the arm rest.

Interior view of a car dashboard with seatbelt and lever mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

Features and controls

Cup holder

N00527300133

For the front seat

The cup holder is located in front of the floor console.

The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans securely in its holes.

Mechanical gear shift lever assembly in a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

CAUTION

●Do not drink beverages while driving your vehicle. This is distracting and could cause an accident.

For the rear seat

ND0537000016

This cup holder is located in the rear seat arm rest (A). Open the lid (B) while holding the side face of the lid with your hand.

Bottle holder

N00502800052

Bottle holders are provided for the driver and front passenger in the door.

Mechanical component diagram showing a piston inside a vehicle's side panel, with no visible text or symbols.

CAUTION

●Do not drink beverages while driving the vehicle; doing so could distract you and result in an accident.
● Beverages can spill during vehicle operation. Be careful not to get scalded by a hot beverage if it spills.

NOTE

●Make sure the cap of any plastic bottle placed in a bottle holder is tightly closed.
●The bottle holders may not accommodate bottles of certain shapes and sizes.

Features and controls

Sunglasses holder (if so equipped)

N00527400105

To open this holder, push the rear end of the lid (A) at the center.

Close-up of a car interior panel with labeled component A and an arrow pointing to a button (no readable text or symbols)

Close the lid (A) by pushing it till it clicks.

CAUTION

• Do not use for storing heavier objects than sun-glasses.
  There is a danger that the holder lid will open accidentally, resulting in an injury due to falling objects.

NOTE

●Some types of sunglasses cannot fit snugly in the holder. Before storing, check the shape to make sure they fit.

Features and controls

Tonneau cover (if so equipped)

N00528300114

To use

1. Draw out the spring-loaded cover and insert it in the mounting grooves (A).

Interior view of a car showing the rear door and side panel, with an inset close-up highlighting a component labeled 'A' (no text or symbols beyond label)

1. Remove the cover from the mounting grooves, and the cover will be rolled back into the retracted position.

NOTE

●Do not place anything on the tonneau cover.

To remove

1. Roll back the tonneau cover.

2. Move one of the sliders (B) toward the inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove the tonneau cover.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with labeled part B (no text or symbols beyond label)

Luggage hooks

N00528500246

CAUTION

- Do not load the luggage higher than the top of the seatback. Be sure that luggage is firmly secured. Restricted rear vision or flying objects entering the passenger compartment during sudden braking could result in a serious accident.

There are hooks on the floor and the side of the luggage area for use in securing luggage.

Features and controls

Side view of a car showing the front and rear compartment with a black arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

Features and controls

NOTE

- Do not hang any heavy items {more than about 6.6 pound (3 kg)} on the hook {Side (type 2)}. Doing so could damage the hook.

Coat hook

N00553600078

There is a hook on the rear driver's side assist grip for use in hanging clothes.

Line drawing of a car's seat with a hand resting on the roof (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object on the coat hook. If the curtain air bag was activated, any such item could be propelled away with great force and could prevent the curtain air bag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.

Driving safety

Driving precaution 4-2

Fuel economy. 4-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs. 4-3

Vehicle preparation before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Safe driving techniques .....4-5

Driving during cold weather 4-5

Braking....4-6

Parking....4-7

Loading information 4-8

Cargo loads 4-12

Trailer towing....4-15

Driving safety

Driving precaution

N00629300040

WARNING

●Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive speed. Always buckle up.

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track, which enables them to perform in a wide variety of off-road situations. Because of the higher ground clearance, these vehicles have a higher center of gravity, which makes them handle differently than ordinary vehicles when driving on pavement. They are not designed to maneuver or corner at the same speed on pavement as conventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.

Always drive safely and steer the vehicle carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a manner that might require sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly can result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehicle, always make certain that you and all your passengers are properly wearing their seat belts (with children in the rear seat, in appropriate restraints).

Fuel economy

N00628800080

Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Your personal driving habits can have a significant effect on your fuel use. Several recommendations for achieving the greatest fuel economy are listed below.

●Whenever accelerating from a stop, always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
- When parked for even a short period, do not idle the engine. Shut it off.
●Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary stops.
- Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures.
- For freeway driving, maintain a speed of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when traffic, roadway and weather conditions safely permit.
- Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle lubricated according to the recommendations in this manual.
●Always keep your vehicle well maintained. A poorly maintained engine wastes fuel and costs money.
●Do not overload your vehicle.

Driving, alcohol and drugs

N00628900010

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation. Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober.

Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of any of these medications.

WARNING

●NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired.

Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving

N00629000513

For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always observe the following:

Seat belts and seats

●Before starting the vehicle, make certain that you and all passengers are seated and wearing their seat belts properly (with children in the rear seat, in appropriate restraints), and that all the doors and the liftgate are locked.
- Move the driver's seat as far backward as possible, while still keeping good visibility, and good control of the steering wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check the instrument panel indicators for any possible problem.
●Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
●Make sure that infants and small children are properly restrained in accordance with all laws and regulations.

Driving safety

Floor mats Defrosters

WARNING

- Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by correctly laying floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle. To prevent the floor mats from slipping out position, securely retain them using the hooks etc. Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal or laying one floor mat on top of another can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a serious accident.

Check these by selecting the defroster mode, and set the blower switch on high. You should be able to feel the air blowing against the windshield.

(Refer to “Defrosting or defogging the windshield and door windows” on page 5-12, 5-23.)

Tires

Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires (including spare tire) for proper pressures. Replace your tires before they are heavily worn out.

As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, there is a risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement should, therefore, be performed only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Lights

Have someone watch while you turn all the exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn signal indicators and high-beam indicators on the instrument panel.

Fluid leaks

Check the ground under the vehicle after parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need to find out why immediately and have it fixed.

Safe driving techniques

N00629200052

Even this vehicle's safety equipment, and your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you can avoid an accident or injury. However, if you give extra attention to the following areas, you can better protect yourself and your passengers:

●Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road and weather conditions. Leave plenty of stopping distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
●Before changing lanes, check your mirrors and use your turn-signal light.
●While driving, watch the behavior of other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
●Always obey applicable laws and regulations. Be a polite and alert driver. Always leave room for unexpected events, such as sudden braking.
- If you plan to drive in another country, obey their vehicle registration laws and make sure you will be able to get the right fuel.

Driving safety

Driving during cold weather

N00629400315

- Check the battery, including terminals and cables. During extremely cold weather, the battery will not be as strong. Also, the battery power level may drop because more power is used for cold starting and driving.

Before driving the vehicle, check to see if the engine runs at the proper speed and if the headlights are as bright as normally. Charge or replace the battery if necessary. During extreme cold weather, it is possible that a very low battery could freeze.

WARNING

●The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas. Any spark or flame can cause the battery to explode, which could cause serious injuries or death.

Always wear protective clothes and a face mask when working with your battery, or let a skilled mechanic do it.

●Warm the engine sufficiently. After starting the engine, allow a short warm-up time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then drive your vehicle slowly.

Stay at low speeds at first so that the transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil have time to spread to all the lubrication points.

Driving safety

- Check the engine antifreeze.

If there is not enough coolant because of a leak or from engine overheating, add high-quality ethylene glycol anti-freeze and water. The recommended blend is about 50 % water and 50 % anti-freeze. Use a higher concentration (not over 60 %) when the outside temperature is -31 °F (-35 °C) or lower. When the engine is working very hard (for example, during mountain driving and/or when the outside temperature is high), use a 50 % concentration. This blend will provide adequate protection from corrosion and boiling.

WARNING

●Never open the radiator cap when the radiator is hot. You could be seriously burned.

Braking

N00629500420

All the parts of the brake system are critical to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice at regular intervals according to the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

When brakes are wet

Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immediately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.

A film of water can be formed on the brake discs and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.

When driving in cold weather

On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking system, making the brakes less effective. While driving in such conditions, pay close attention to preceding and following vehicles and to the condition of the road surface. From time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal and check how effective the brakes are.

When driving downhill

It is important to take advantage of the engine braking by shifting to a lower gear of the sports mode while driving on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the brakes from overheating.

Parking

N00629600245

Parking on a hill

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.

If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.

Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set when parked and that the selector lever is in the "P" (PARK) position.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This prevents loading the parking brake against the transaxle gear. When this happens, it is difficult to move the selector lever out of the “P” (PARK) position.

Parking with the engine running

Never leave the engine running while you take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or poorly ventilated place.

WARNING

●Leaving the engine running risks injury or death from accidentally moving the selector lever or the accumulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger compartment.

Driving safety

Where you park

WARNING

●Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

When leaving the vehicle

Always remove the key from the ignition switch and lock all doors and the liftgate when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.

Driving safety

Loading information

N00629900378

It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo (including the roof load), non-factory-installed options, and the tongue weight of the trailer, if any, being towed. The tire and loading information placard located on the driver's door sill of your vehicle will show how much weight it may properly carry.

WARNING

●Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can damage your vehicle, adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, cause tire failure, and result in an accident.

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

●Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
●Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.
●Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum of - (a) Curb weight;
(b) Accessory weight;
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) Production options weight.

●Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant.

- Accessory weight: the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

- Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)* times the vehicle's designated seating capacity.

●Production options weight: the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

●Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* times the number of specified occupants. (In your vehicle the number is 3)

●Occupant distribution: distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified. (In your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, 1 in second row seat)

*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one person as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian regulations.

Tire and loading information placard

N00630100136

The tire and loading information placard is located on the inside sill of the driver's door.

Interior view of a car showing seat, dashboard, and door panel with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A- Vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada (Type 1) B- Vehicles sold in Canada (Type 2)

Driving safety

This placard shows the maximum number of occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as well as “the combined weight of occupants and cargo” (C), which is called the vehicle capacity weight. The weight of any non-factory-installed options, as well as the tongue weight of a trailer being towed and roof load is included in the definition of “cargo” when determining the vehicle capacity weight. This placard also tells you the size and recommended inflation pressure for the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more information, refer to “Tires” on page 7-20.

Type 1

Driving safety

Type 2

EXAMPLE

AA0049928

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

N00630200052

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE

● The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
● For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

● Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR's) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR's, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the "Specifications" section of this manual.

Driving safety

Cargo loads

N00629700318

Cargo load precautions

To determine the cargo load capacity for your vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. For added information, if needed, refer to "Step for Determining Correct Load Limit" on page 4-10.

DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers listed on the safety certification label (A) located on the inside sill of the driver's door as the guide for passengers and/or cargo weight.

Interior view of a car showing the side panel, seat, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

WARNING

●To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the combined weights of the driver, passengers and cargo and must never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
●Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, and may cause an accident.
●Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo or luggage cannot move when your vehicle is in motion.
Having either the rear view blocked, or your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury or death.
●Put cargo or luggage in the luggage area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

Loading cargo on the roof

N00630400054

WARNING

• Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle will raise the vehicle's center of gravity and adversely affect its handling characteristics. As a result, driving errors or emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss of control and result in an accident. Drive slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers such as sudden braking or quick turning.
  ●Make sure that the weight of luggage and the roof carrier do not exceed the maximum roof load {without cross bars: 200 lb (91 kg), with cross bars: 150 lb (68 kg)}. If the maximum roof load is exceeded, this could cause damage to the vehicle or result in an accident.
  ●The total weight of all occupants and luggage, including your roof load, must not exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For more information, refer to "Tire and loading information placard" on page 4-9.
  ●Roof load is determined by adding the weight of the roof carrier and the weight of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
• For additional information, refer to “Maximum roof load” on page 9-5.

Driving safety

CAUTION

- Do not load luggage directly onto the roof. Use a roof carrier that properly fits your vehicle. For installation, refer to the instruction manual provided with the roof carrier.

Driving safety

CAUTION

●Place the luggage on the carrier so that its weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest items on the bottom. Do not load items that are wider than the roof carrier.
●Before driving and after traveling a short distance, always check the load to make sure it is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that the load remains secure. If the load is not secure, it could fall from the vehicle and damage your vehicle, another vehicle or create a road hazard.

NOTE

●Before using an automatic car wash, check with the attendant to determine if the roof carrier should be removed.
- Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the sunroof (if so equipped) and/or the liftgate when installing a roof carrier.

Crossbars (if so equipped)

ND0530500013

Use the following procedure for crossbars as desired.

1. Turn the upper and side knobs counterclockwise to loosen the crossbars.
2. Slide the crossbars to appropriate position.
3. Turn the side knobs clockwise and then turn the upper knob clockwise to tighten the crossbars securely.

Top-down view of a car roof with a magnified inset showing internal mechanical components labeled A and B (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

A- Upper knob (Driver's side only)

B- Side knobs

When the roof carrier is not in use, align the crossbar markings with the roof rail (if so equipped) markings to minimize wind noise.

Top-down view of a car's roof structure with a magnified inset showing a mechanical component detail (no text or symbols)

WARNING

●Make sure the crossbars are fixed securely by pushing forward and rearward them. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident resulting in serious injury or death.

Check the crossbars and knobs regularly to make sure it is securely fastened to the roof rails (if so equipped).

Driving safety

Trailer towing

N00629800234

Towing a trailer will adversely affect handling, performance, braking, durability and driving economy (fuel consumption, etc.).

When you do, be sure to use proper equipment and allow cautious steering and braking for safe driving.

CAUTION

●Do not lose control of your vehicle when towing a trailer.

• Always use proper equipment.

• Always drive carefully.

●Damage to your vehicle caused by improper equipment or driving is not covered by your warranty.

Driving safety

Weight limits

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight, maximum trailer weight (A), maximum tongue weight (B) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Line drawing of a train on a balance scale with a clock below (no text or symbols)

A

Simple line drawing of a train with a speedometer and a pressure gauge (no text or symbols)

B

AA0011516

Vehicle capacity weight

The vehicle capacity weight is printed on the tire and loading information placard as “combined weight of occupants and cargo”.

This weight includes the weight of all occupants and the total weight it can carry.

For detail information, refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 4-9.

Maximum trailer weight

Recommendations for towing up to this limit are as follows.

Total Trailer Weight	Trailer Brake and Towing kit* requirements
Up to 1,500 lbs. (680 kg) Trailer brakes not required
1,500 lbs. (680 kg) to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg)	Trailer brakes required
2,000 lbs. (907 kg) to 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg)	Trailer brakes and Towing kit* required

*: Optional equipment

(including the large capacity radiator, full-size spare tire, etc.)

Tongue weight

The tongue weight of any trailer is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight.

The vehicle capacity weight includes any cargo you may carry, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you tow a trailer, you must include the tongue weight of the trailer in your calculation of the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Tire and loading information placard” on page 4-9, for more information about vehicle capacity weight.

Do not exceed the tongue weight at 10 % of the loaded trailer weight.

Example:

In case of your loaded weight is 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg), the tongue weight is 350 lbs. (160 kg).

After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.

Keep the trailer tongue load at 10 % of the loaded trailer weight for dead weight hitches. Tongue loads can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the trailer. This can be checked by separately weighing the loaded trailer and then the tongue.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWRs are printed on the certification label which is riveted on the door sill on the driver's side.

Refer to "Vehicle labeling" on page 9-2.

Trailer hitches

Choose a proper hitch and ball, and make sure it is installed at a height that is compatible with the trailer.

Use a good equalizing hitch which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue load throughout the frame.

WARNING

- If you make any holes in the body of your vehicle for installing a trailer hitch, be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don't seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can enter your vehicle. Refer to "Exhaust system" on page 7-34.

NOTE

●Mitsubishi recommends that sway control be used whenever you are towing, to improve towing stability. For details, please consult your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Safety chains

A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated.

For correct safety chain procedures, consult your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

CAUTION

●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If the coupling unit or hitch ball experiences a problem, the trailer may separate from your vehicle.

Maintenance when trailer towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you're towing a trailer. Refer to "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL". Especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, rear axle oil, belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual.

For details, please refer to the "Vehicle care maintenance" section.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Driving safety

Trailer brakes

Mitsubishi recommends that any trailer having a total weight of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) or more be equipped with its own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electrically actuated. Do not attempt to tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system. No matter how successful it may seem, any attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic system will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.

Trailer lights

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, and local regulations. Check with your local recreational vehicle dealer for the requirements in your area, and use only equipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type and brand, you should have a qualified technician install a suitable connector between the vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or installation can cause damage to your vehicle's electrical system and affect your vehicle warranty.

Additional trailer equipment

Many states and Canadian provinces require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if they do not, you should install special mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.

Operating hints

WARNING

- If you have a rear window open and you tow a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas which you cannot see or smell could come into your vehicle. It can cause unconsciousness or death. Refer to “Exhaust system” on page 7-34.

To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
- Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip.
- Keep the rear windows closed.
- If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the blower on any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air into your vehicle. Do not use recirculation because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle. Refer to “Air selection switch” on page 5-8, 5-19.

Driver preparation

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.

Before setting out for the open road, you'll want to get to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is without a trailer.

Vehicle preparation

Before you start, check the trailer hitch, safety chains, tires and mirror adjustment.

Tires

Be sure your vehicle's tires are inflated to the cold inflation pressure listed in the manual. You'll find these numbers on the tire and loading information placard at the sill of the driver's door.

Refer to "Tire inflation pressures" on page 7-24.

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You'll need more passing distance up ahead when you're towing a trailer. And, because the combined vehicle and trailer are longer, you'll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making turns

CAUTION

●Making sharp turns while towing a trailer could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making sharp turns while towing a trailer.

When you're turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal to help prevent the trailer from striking shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.

Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Overheating

Towing a trailer puts additional burden on the engine and transaxle, which may cause overheating. Following are some suggestions to reduce overheating:

Overheating Situation Solution

Air conditioning on Turn off

Highway speeds Reduce speed

Going up hills Select lower gear

Stop-and-go city traffic When stopped, shift transaxle to

neutral and idle engine at higher speed

Driving safety

When towing at high altitudes, engine coolant and automatic transaxle fluid will overheat at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes.

If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) with the automatic transaxle in "P" (PARK) position for a few minutes before turning the engine off.

• If the needle in the engine coolant temperature gauge approaches the overheating zone, refer to “Engine overheating” on page 6-5.
• If the automatic transaxle fluid temperature warning light illuminates, refer to “Automatic transaxle fluid temperature warning light” on page 3-43.

Driving on hills

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down, over using the brakes can cause reduced brake efficiency.

You can tow in "D" (DRIVE) position. You may want to shift the transaxle to 3rd gear or a lower gear, under heavy loads or hilly conditions.

Parking

Always place chocks or blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position. Avoid parking on a hill with a trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place chocks or blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the chocks or blocks are in place, release your brakes slowly until the chocks or blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on a hill:

1. Make sure the selector lever is in the "P" (PARK) position, and start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Move the selector lever to the 2nd gear, 1st gear or "R" (REVERSE) position.
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull or back away from the chocks or blocks. Stop and apply your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the chocks or blocks.

Comfort controls

Vents. 5-2

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped). .....5-6

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) .....5- 14

Rear cooler (For vehicles with automatic air conditioning). 5-25

Important air conditioning operating tips .....5-26

Audio system....5-28

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 1 (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 2 (if so equipped) AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3 (if so equipped) .....5-43

Steering wheel remote control switch (if so equipped)....5-68

Error codes....5-70

Error codes (SIRIUS Satellite Radio) .....5-72

Handling of compact discs....5-74

Antenna 5-77

General information about your radio .....5-78

Comfort controls

Vents

N00729900092

1- Center vents
2- Side vents
3- Rear vents (for vehicles with automatic air conditioning)

NOTE

- Do not place beverages on top of the instrument panel. If they splash into the air conditioning vents, they could damage the system.

Air flow and direction adjustments

ND0730200271

Center vents

Adjust the horizontal direction of the air flow by turning the dial (A).

The vent can be opened and closed with the dial (A). Adjust the vertical direction of the air flow by turning the dial (B).

Side/Rear (for vehicles with automatic air conditioning) vents

Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the knob (C).

Side vents Rear vents

Diagram of a mechanical or electrical component with directional arrows and labeled point C (no text or symbols beyond basic labels)

Diagram of a grid-patterned structure with directional arrows and a central rectangular element, labeled 'C' at bottom left (no readable text or symbols)

NOTE

●On rare occasions, air from the vents of an air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is only moist air cooling suddenly and does not indicate a problem.

Changing the mode selection

N00736400435

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to "Mode selection dial" on page 5-7, 5-18.)

These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the vents.

→: Small amount of air from the vents
→: Medium amount of air from the vents
→: Large amount of air from the vents

Face position

Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger compartment.

Comfort controls

Foot/Face position

Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and flows to the leg area.

Foot position

Air flows mainly to the leg area.

3D diagram of a car interior showing directional arrows and a circular warning symbol (no text or labels)

NOTE

- With the mode selection dial between the “” and “” positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between the “” and “” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area.

Foot/Defroster position

Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and the door windows.

NOTE

- With the mode selection dial between the “” and “” positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial between the “” and “” positions, air flows mainly to the windshield and door windows.

Comfort controls

Defroster position

Air flows mainly to the windshield and the door windows.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrows indicating airflow or motion (no text or symbols)

NOTE

- When the mode selection dial is set to the “” or “” position, the air conditioning compressor runs automatically. The outside air position will also be selected automatically. (In this case, the air conditioning indicator light will not change.)

Comfort controls

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)

N00730300113

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

Control panel

N00730500245

1- Temperature control dial
2- Air selection switch
3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Air conditioning switch
5- Electric rear window defogger switch → P.3-163
6- Mode selection dial

Blower speed selection dial

N00736500090

When the ignition key is in the ON position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right. When the blower speed selection dial is set to the "OFF" position, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

TA0018657

Temperature control dial

N00736600147

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler.

NOTE

●While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial.
●For instructions on how to use the "MAX A/C" position (A), see "For quick cooling" on page 5-10.

Comfort controls

Mode selection dial

N00736700148

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 5-3.)

Circular industrial control knob with directional arrows indicating cycle (no text or symbols)

Comfort controls

Air selection switch

N00736800312

Normally, use the outside position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield.

To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch.

●Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
●Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}

When the air conditioning turns on, the air selection will be controlled automatically.

When the air conditioning turns off, the air selection automatically goes back to the outside position.

The air selection indicator light (A) shows the selected position.

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up.

CAUTION

●Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up.

NOTE

- When the “” or “” position is selected, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or use the recirculation position.

This prevents the windows from fogging up.

• When the temperature control dial is set to the “MAX A/C” position, the air selection will be automatically set to the recirculation position.
• If the temperature dial is set to any position other than "MAX A/C", outside air will always be used when the ignition switch is turned on.
• When the coolant temperature rises above a certain point the air selection is automatically switched to the recirculation position and the indicator light (A) turns on. When this occurs the system will not switch to the outside position even if the selection switch is pushed.

Air conditioning switch

N00731000276

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indicator light (A) will come on.

(Green)

TA0018673

Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indicator light goes off.

CAUTION

● Using the air conditioning slightly increases the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when shifting the transaxle into drive.

Comfort controls

NOTE

- If a problem is detected in the air conditioning compressor, the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks. Press the air conditioning switch once to turn it off, then once more to turn it back on. If the air conditioning indicator light does not blink, there is no problem. If it does blink, have it checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

●Sometimes, for example after using a high-pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, and the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks temporarily. In this case there is nothing wrong. Wait for a while, press the air conditioning switch once to turn the system off, then once more to turn it back on. Once the water evaporates, the blinking will stop.

Comfort controls

Operating the air conditioning system

N00731100176

Heating

Set the mode selection dial to the “” position and set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed.

graph TD
    A["Max A/C"] -->|OFF| B["PUSH A/C"]
    B -->|1 2 3 4| C["Device Icon"]
    C --> D["Return to Switch"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Cooling

N00731200281

For ordinary cooling

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “*”position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
4. Change the temperature by turning the control dial clockwise or counterclockwise.
5. Select the desired blower speed.

NOTE

- If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, set the air selection switch (A) to the recirculation position. Let in some outside air from time to time for good ventilation.

●To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection dial to the “position.

For quick cooling

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “position.”

2. Set the temperature control dial to the "MAX A/C" position.

3. Set the blower to the maximum speed.

NOTE

- When the temperature control dial is set to the "MAX A/C" position, the air conditioning compressor will run automatically and the light will come on. The recirculation position will be selected automatically. In this case, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or select the outside position.

- When the temperature control dial is set to a position other than "MAX A/C", the air selection will automatically change to outside air. The air conditioning compressor will continue running.

Comfort controls

Combination of unheated air and heated air

N00731300149

Select the mode selection dial to the positions shown in the illustration and set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.

The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part of the passenger compartment. Select the desired blower speed. Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm air (depending upon temperature setting) flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment.

graph TD
    A["Max A/C"] --> B["Push A/C"]
    B --> C["OFF"]
    C --> D["Arrow A"]
    D --> E["Arrow B"]
    E --> F["Arrow C"]
    F --> G["Arrow D"]
    G --> H["Arrow E"]
    H --> I["Arrow F"]
    I --> J["Arrow G"]
    J --> K["Arrow H"]
    K --> L["Arrow I"]
    L --> M["Arrow J"]
    M --> N["Arrow K"]
    N --> O["Arrow L"]
    O --> P["Arrow M"]
    P --> Q["Arrow N"]
    Q --> R["Arrow O"]
    R --> S["Arrow P"]
    S --> T["Arrow Q"]
    T --> U["Arrow R"]
    U --> V["Arrow S"]
    V --> W["Arrow T"]
    W --> X["Arrow U"]
    X --> Y["Arrow P"]
    Y --> Z["Arrow Q"]
    Z --> AA["Arrow R"]
    AA --> AB["Arrow S"]
    AB --> AC["Arrow T"]
    AC --> AD["Arrow U"]
    AD --> AE["Arrow P"]
    AE --> AF["Arrow Q"]
    AF --> AG["Arrow R"]
    AG --> AH["Arrow S"]
    AH --> AI["Arrow T"]
    AI --> AJ["Arrow U"]
    AJ --> AK["Arrow P"]
    AK --> AL["Arrow Q"]
    AL --> AM["Arrow R"]
    AM --> AN["Arrow S"]
    AN --> AO["Arrow T"]
    AO --> AP["Arrow U"]
    AP --> AQ["Arrow P"]
    AQ --> AR["Arrow Q"]
    AR --> AS["Arrow R"]
    AS --> AT["Arrow S"]
    AT --> AU["Arrow T"]
    AU --> AV["Arrow U"]
    AV --> AW["Arrow P"]
    AW --> AX["Arrow Q"]
    AX --> AY["Arrow R"]
    AY --> AZ["Arrow S"]
    AZ --> BA["Arrow T"]
    BA --> BB["Arrow U"]
    BB --> BC["Arrow P"]
    BC --> BD["Arrow Q"]
    BD --> BE["Arrow R"]
    BE --> BF["Arrow S"]
    BF --> BG["Arrow T"]
    BG --> BH["Arrow U"]
    BH --> BI["Arrow P"]
    BI --> BJ["Arrow Q"]
    BJ --> BK["Arrow R"]
    BK --> BL["Arrow S"]
    BL --> BM["Arrow T"]
    BM --> BN["Arrow U"]
    BN --> BO["Arrow P"]
    BO --> BP["Arrow Q"]
    BP --> BQ["Arrow R"]
    BQ --> BR["Arrow S"]
    BR --> BS["Arrow T"]
    BS --> BT["Arrow U"]
    BT --> BU["Arrow P"]
    BU --> BV["Arrow Q"]
    BV --> BW["Arrow R"]
    BW --> BX["Arrow S"]
    BX --> BY["Arrow T"]
    BY --> BZ["Arrow U"]
    BZ --> CA["Arrow U"]

Defrosting or defogging the windshield and door windows

ND0731400414

To remove frost or fog from the windshield and door windows, use the mode selection dial ("or")

For ordinary defrosting

Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).

graph TD
    A["MAX A/C"] --> B["PUSH A/C"]
    B --> C["OFF"]
    C --> D["1 2 3 4"]
    D --> E["OK"]
    E --> F["↓"]

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “position.”
2. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial.
3. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial.

Comfort controls

For quick defrosting

1. Set the mode selection dial to the "position."
2. Set the blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest position.

NOTE

• When the mode selection dial is set to the “or” position, the air conditioning compressor runs automatically. The outside air position will also be selected automatically. (In this case, the air conditioning indicator light will not change.)
• When the “” or “” position is selected, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or use the recirculation position. This prevents the windows from fogging up.
• When defrosting, do not set the temperature control dial near the "MAX A/C" position. This would blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up.

Comfort controls

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

N00731500082

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

Control panel

N00711800441

TA0063572

Type 2

TA0063585

1- Temperature control dial
2- Air selection switch
3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Air conditioning switch
5- Electric rear window defogger switch → P.3-163
6- Mode selection dial

Comfort controls

NOTE

●There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) in the illustrated position. Never place anything over the sensor, since doing so will prevent it from functioning properly.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and gear shift (no text or symbols)

●The multi center display automatically switches to an air conditioning display whenever an air conditioning control is adjusted manually. The display automatically reverts to its original display about 10 seconds after the adjustment is made.

Blower speed selection dial

N00736900010

When the ignition key is in the ON position, select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial. The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right. When the blower speed selection dial is set to the "OFF" position, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

TA0001017

Comfort controls

The blower speed indicator (A) is displayed.

1- High blower speed
2- Low blower speed

Temperature control dial

N00737000063

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the air cooler.

Type 1

TA0001062

Type 2

TA0004106

Comfort controls
The set temperature (A) is displayed.
Type 1

TA0002997

Type 2

TA0009303

Comfort controls

NOTE

●While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with the dial.

Mode selection dial

N00737100123

To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 5-3.)

TA0000993

The mode selection indicator (A) and front defroster indicator (B) are displayed.

Comfort controls

Air selection switch

N00737200270

Normally, use the outside position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield.

To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch.

●Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF and indicator (B) ON}
●Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON and indicator (C) ON}

Comfort controls

When the air conditioning turns on, the air selection will be controlled automatically. When the air conditioning turns off, the air selection automatically goes back to the outside position. The air selection indicator shows the selected position.

If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside position every now and then to keep the windows from fogging up.

CAUTION

●Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up.

NOTE

- When the “” or “” position is selected, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or select the recirculation position.

This prevents the windows from fogging up.

• When the mode selection dial or the blower speed selection dial is set to the "AUTO" position again after manual operation, the air selection switch will also be automatically controlled.
• When the coolant temperature rises above a certain point the air selection is automatically switched to the recirculation position and the indicator light (A) turns on. When this occurs the system will not switch to the outside position even if the selection switch is pushed.

Air conditioning switch

N00737300226

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indicator light (A) will come on.

TA0001020

The air conditioning indicator (B) is displayed.

Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the air conditioning indicator goes off.

CAUTION

●Using the air conditioning slightly increases the engine idle speed. Therefore, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal when shifting the transaxle into drive.

Comfort controls

NOTE

- If a problem is detected in the air conditioning compressor, the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks. Press the air conditioning switch once to turn it off, then once more to turn it back on. If the air conditioning indicator light (A) does not blink, there is no problem. If it does blink, have it checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

●Sometimes, for example after using a high-pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet, and the air conditioning indicator light (A) blinks temporarily. In this case there is nothing wrong. Wait for a while, press the air conditioning switch once to turn the system off, then once more to turn it back on. Once the water evaporates, the blinking will stop.

Comfort controls

Operating the air conditioning system (automatic mode)

N00731700202

In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO mode and follow these procedures:

1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the "AUTO" position.

2. Select the temperature control dial to the desired temperature. The temperature can be set within a range of around 61 to 89 (Type 1) or 18 to 32 (Type 2). The temperature may be set higher by turning the dial to the right.

3. Set the mode selection dial to the "AUTO" position. The AUTO mode indicator (A) is displayed.

The vents (except "and") recirculation/outside air, blower speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will be controlled automatically.

NOTE

• Set the temperature {at about 75 (Type 1) or 25 (Type 2) under normal conditions}.
• When the temperature is set to the highest or the lowest setting under the AUTO operation, the air selection and the air conditioning will be automatically changed as follows.

- Quick Heating (When the temperature is set to the highest setting)

Outside air will be introduced and the air conditioning will stop.

- Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set to the lowest setting)

Inside air will be recirculated and the air conditioning will operate.

- When the temperature is set to the highest setting, you can turn the air conditioning on.

Operating the air conditioning system (manual mode)

N00731800027

Blower speed and vent mode may be controlled manually by setting the blower speed selection dial and the mode selection dial to the desired positions. To return to automatic operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” position.

Defrosting or defogging the windshield and door windows

N00732400310

CAUTION

●For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows.

To remove frost or fog from the windshield and door windows, use the mode selection dial (“”or “”)

Comfort controls

For ordinary defrosting

Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “position.”
2. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial.
3. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial.

For quick defrosting

1. Set the mode selection dial to the "position."
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest position.

NOTE

• When the mode selection dial is set to the “” position, the air conditioning compressor runs automatically. The outside air position will also be selected automatically. (In this case, the air conditioning indicator light will not change.)
• When the “” or “” position is selected, you cannot turn the air conditioning off or use the recirculation position. This prevents the windows from fogging up.
• When defrosting, do not set the temperature control dial to the maximum cool position. This would blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up.

To stop the air conditioning

N00732500021

To turn the air conditioning off, set the blower speed selection dial to the "OFF" position. All operations will stop except the air selection.

Comfort controls

Rear cooler (For vehicles with automatic air conditioning)

N00737400038

The rear cooler can only be used while the operation indicator light (A) illuminates. The operation indicator light illuminates when the mode selection dial is set to the “or” position.

Comfort controls

Blower speed selection dial

Select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection dial clockwise or counterclockwise. The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned to the right.

Important air conditioning operating tips

N00733700293

1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the vehicle interior extremely hot which then requires more time to cool. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning to expel the hot air.
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed when the air conditioning is in use. The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce cooling efficiency.
3. When running the air conditioning, make sure the air intake, which is located in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake chamber may reduce air flow and plug the water drains.

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations

If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak.

Have the system inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

CAUTION

●The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and may require replacing your vehicle's entire air conditioning system.
The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is not recommended.
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle is designed not to harm the earth's ozone layer. However, it may contribute slightly to global warming.
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be saved and recycled for future use.

During a long period of disuse

The air conditioning should be operated for at least five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This includes the quick defrosting mode. Operating the air condition system weekly maintains lubrication of the compressor internal parts and maintains the air conditioning in the best operating condition.

Comfort controls

Audio system

N00734300863

Your vehicle is equipped with the following audio system:

(1) AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 1 → P.5-30
(2) AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 2 → P.5-43
(3) AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3 → P.5-43
The audio system can only be used when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

A- Display window
B- Audio system
C- DISP button (if so equipped)

NOTE

- In vehicles with AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 2 or AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3, the display automatically switches to an audio indication when an audio system adjustment is made. The display automatically reverts to its original indication about 10 seconds after the audio system adjustment is finished. The DISP button (C) can be used to change the display indication and to adjust the display brightness and other settings. For details, refer to “Multi center display” on page 3-86.

●To listen to the audio system while the engine is not running, turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.

- If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

- If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system and have it checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice. Never try to repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio system until it is inspected by a qualified person.

- If the audio system is damaged by foreign objects, water, or fire, have the system checked by a qualified technician.

Satellite radio (if so equipped)

Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is SIRIUS™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for listeners, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

System activation

To activate your SIRIUS™ Satellite Radio service, call the toll-free number 888-539-SIRIUS (7474), or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:

1. The Sirius Identification Number (SIRIUS ID). Refer to the section "SIRIUS ID indication" on page 5-54.
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number. Refer to "Vehicle identification number plate" on page 9-2.

"SIRIUS", the SIRIUS dog logo and channel names and logos are trademarks of SIRUS Satellite Radio, Inc.

Comfort controls

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 1 (if so equipped)

N00734300993

Volume and tone control panel

N00711900657

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- VOL (Volume control) knob
3- AUDIO switch
4- Display

To adjust the volume

N00712000293

VOL (Volume control)

Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

The status will be displayed in the display (4).

NOTE

●The volume control mode will shut off automatically if either the radio or CD is selected, or if no adjustment is made within about 2 seconds.

Comfort controls

Comfort controls

To adjust the tone

N00712100395

1. Press the AUDIO switch (3) repeatedly to select the tone or balance control to change. The order is: BASS → TRE → FADE → BAL → Audio adjust mode off. The status will be displayed in the display (4).

graph TD
    A["BASS + 5"] --> B["TRA -- 3"]
    B --> C["FADE F11"]
    C --> D["BAL R 3"]
    D --> E["FM2 CH ST 98.1"]
    A -->|6...0...+6| F
    B -->|6...0...+6| G
    C -->|F11...0...R11| H
    D -->|L11...0...R11| I

1. Turn the AUDIO switch (3) either clockwise or counterclockwise to change the tone/balance setting.

Mode	Adjusting operation
	Clockwise Counterclockwise
BASS	Increase	Decrease
TRE	Increase	Decrease
FADE	More sound from the rear speakers	More sound from the front speakers
BAL	More sound from the right speakers	More sound from the left speakers

BASS (Bass tone control)

To select the desired bass level.

TRE (Treble tone control)

To select the desired treble level.

FADE (Front/Rear balance control)

To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R (rear) speakers.

BAL (Left/Right balance control)

To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R (right) speakers.

NOTE

●When set to “0”, it will beep.
●The audio adjust mode will automatically shut off when either the radio or CD is selected, or if no adjustment is made within about 7 seconds.

Comfort controls

Comfort controls

Radio control panel and display

N00734900843

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- Memory select buttons
3- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button
4- SEEK (Up-seek) button
5- SEEK (Down-seek) button
6- SCAN button
7- TUNE/FOLDER switch
8- SCAN indicator
9- AM/FM (AM/FM1/FM2) indicator
10- Preset memory number display
11- ST (Stereo) indicator
12- Frequency display

Comfort controls

To listen to the radio

N00735000825

1. Press the PWR switch (1) to turn the audio system on and off. The system turns on in the last mode used.
2. Press the RADIO button (3) to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2).
3. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons (2) to tune in to a station memorized for that button.

To tune the radio

Automatic tuning

1. After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), reception of the selected station will begin.
2. Press the SCAN button (6). SCAN indicator (8) will come on and the radio will tune consecutively to each available station for about 5 seconds per station. If you want to stop scanning, press the SCAN button again.
   The frequency display of the current station blinks once per second during SCAN.

Manual tuning

The frequency changes every time the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) is turned.

Turn the switch to select the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memory

As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be entered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps:

1. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5), or turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the frequency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in the memory as well as the frequency are displayed.

1. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

NOTE

●Disconnecting the battery cables erases all the radio station settings stored in the memory.

Comfort controls

CD control panel and display

ND0735300668

1- PWR (On-Off) switch 11- RPT (Repeat-mode) indicator
2- CD eject button 12- RDM (Random-mode) indicator
3- Disc loading slot 13- SCAN indicator
4- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 14- CD indicator
5- CD (CD mode changeover) button 15- TRACK indicator
6- TRACK (Track up) button 16- Track play time display
7- TRACK (Track down) button
8- RPT/RDM (Repeat/Random) button
9- SCAN button
10- TUNE/FOLDER switch

To listen to a CD

N00735500976

1. Press the CD button (5) and the CD mode will be selected, starting a playback.
2. To adjust the volume and tone, refer to "To adjust the volume" on page 5-31 and "To adjust the tone" on page 5-32.
3. To stop the CD, turn off the power by pressing the PWR switch (1) or switch to the other mode by pressing the RADIO button (4).

NOTE

- For information concerning the handling of the compact discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 5-74.

Comfort controls

To listen an MP3 CD

This player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, 100 folders, and 255 files per disc.

Push the CD button (5) if an MP3 CD is already in the slot. The display shows "READING", then playback will begin. The folder number and the track number will appear on the display.

Comfort controls

NOTE

●While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA and reading of the MP3 files by pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep).
●With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.
●The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.
●Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
●MP3 encode software and writing software are not supplied to this unit.
●You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
- If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
●This unit does not record MP3 files.
- For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, refer to “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 5-76.

CAUTION

- Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format which has the “.mp3” file name may produce noise from the speakers and speaker damage, and can damage your hearing.

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    A --> C["3"]
    A --> D["4"]
    B --> E["1"]
    B --> F["2"]
    C --> G["3"]
    C --> H["4"]
    D --> I["5"]
    D --> J["6"]
    D --> K["8"]
    E --> L["1"]
    F --> M["2"]
    F --> N["3"]
    G --> O["4"]
    G --> P["5"]
    G --> Q["6"]
    H --> R["7"]
    H --> S["8"]
    I --> T["4"]
    I --> U["5"]
    I --> V["6"]

Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4

AA3002553

Folder selection

In the order

File selection

In the order

To fast forward/reverse the disc

To fast forward or reverse, use the TRACK button (6 or 7).

Fast forward

You can fast forward by holding down the side of the TRACK button (6) for more than about 1 second.

Fast reverse

You can fast reverse by holding down the V side of the TRACK button (7) for more than about 1 second.

Comfort controls

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)

You can select your desired folder by turning the TUNE/FOLDER switch (10).

Folder up

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (10) clockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

Folder down

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (10) counterclockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

Comfort controls

To select a desired track

You can select by using the TRACK button (6 or 7).

Track up

Press the side of the TRACK button (6) until the desired track is reached.

The TRACK indicator (15) will display the number of the selected track.

Track down

Press the Yside of the TRACK button (7) until the desired track is reached.

The TRACK indicator (15) will display the number of the selected track.

NOTE

- Pressing the Side of the TRACK button (7) once during the song will cause the CD to restart playing from the beginning of the song.

To repeat the same track or change the order of tracks for playback

Press the RPT/RDM button (8) to select RPT → RDM → RPT/RDM mode off.

To repeat the same track

Select the RPT mode, and the RPT indicator (11) will come on. You can listen to the same track repeatedly.

NOTE

●The track repeat mode will be canceled by pressing the TRACK button (6 or 7), the SCAN button (9) or the CD eject button (2).

●With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated.

To change the order of tracks for playback

Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)

Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (12) will come on. Tracks are randomly played.

Comfort controls

Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only). Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (12) will come on. Tracks from all the folders on the disc will be played in a random sequence.

NOTE

- With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the random mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random sequence.

graph TD
    A["RPT"] --> B["Track 12 12'30"]
    B --> C["RDM"]
    C --> D["Track 12 12'30"]
    D --> E["Mode off"]
    E --> F["Track 12 12'30"]

Comfort controls

To find the start of each track on a disc for playback

Press the SCAN button (9). “SCAN” will appear on the display and the player will play back the first 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc.

The track number will blink while the scan mode is selected. To exit the scan mode, press the SCAN button again.

NOTE

●Once all tracks on the disc have been scanned, playback of the disc will restart from the beginning of the track that was playing when scanning started.
●The scan mode will be canceled when radio or CD operation is selected.
●With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played.

To eject a disc

When the CD eject button (2) is pressed, the disc automatically stops and is ejected. The system automatically switches to radio mode.

Comfort controls

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 2 (if so equipped) AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with CD autochanger-Type 3 (if so equipped)

Volume and tone control panel

N00734300775

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- VOL (Volume control) knob
3- Memory select buttons
4- AUDIO switch
5- Display

Comfort controls

To adjust the volume

N00712000349

VOL (Volume control)

Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

The status will be displayed in the display (5).

TA0024463

NOTE

●The volume control mode will shut off automatically if either the radio or CD mode is selected, or if no adjustment is made within about 2 seconds.

To adjust the tone

N00712100630

1. Press the AUDIO switch (4) repeatedly to select your desired sound customization setting to change. The order is: SUB GAIN → BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADER → BALANCE → SOUND FIELD → EQ TYPE → SOUND PRESET → Sound customization mode off. The status will be displayed in the display (5).

QUICK ACCESS MODE

To access the sound customization features quickly, push and hold the AUDIO switch (4), then turn the switch clockwise or counterclockwise to access your desired sound customization setting. Release the switch to adjust the setting.

Example

TA0024577

1. Turn the AUDIO switch (4) either clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound customization features.

Mode	Adjusting operation
	Clockwise Counterclockwise
SUB GAIN Increase Decrease
BASS	Increase	Decrease
MID	Increase	Decrease
TREBLE	Increase	Decrease
FADER	More sound from the rear speakers	More sound from the front speakers
BALANCE	More sound from the right speakers	More sound from the left speakers
SOUND FIELD	NORMAL → STUDIO → CLUB → CONCERT	CONCERT → CLUB → STUDIO → NORMAL
EQ TYPE	NONE → POP → ROCK → R+B/R&B → COUNTRY	COUNTRY → R+B/R&B → ROCK → POP → NONE
SOUND PRESET — —

SUB GAIN (Subwoofer tone control)

To select the desired subwoofer GAIN level.

BASS (Bass tone control)

To select the desired bass level.

Comfort controls

MID (Midrange tone control)

To select the desired midrange level.

TREBLE (Treble tone control)

To select the desired treble level.

FADER (Front/Rear balance control)

To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R (rear) speakers.

BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)

To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R (right) speakers.

SOUND FIELD (Sound field type select)

To select the desired sound field.

Sound field type	Description
NORMAL	Optimized for accurate vocal and instrument reality.
STUDIO	Places the listener in the control room of a recording studio with a crisp and accurate forward placed sound stage.
CLUB	Places the listener in the music at a dance or jazz club with sound coming from all directions.
CONCERT	Utilizing sound reflections in the Digital Signal Processor, CONCERT gives the impression that the listener is at concert hall performance.

Comfort controls

EQ TYPE (Equalizer type select)

To select the desired equalizer type.

EQ type Description
NONE Sounds good for all types of music.
POP Tight bass and high frequency sound
ROCK	Tuned for hard rock and heavy metal with powerful drums, guitars, and vocals.
R+B/R&B Deep bass punch and well-defined vocals
COUNTRY Enhanced main vocals

SOUND PRESETS (sound setting storage)

6 different sound settings can be stored into memory in the "SOUND PRESET" mode. For example:

Settings	Preset 1	Preset 2	Preset 3
SUB GAIN -9	dB -3 dB +3 dB
BASS	+1	0	0
MID	0	0	0
TRE	+2	+1	0
FADE	0	0	0
BAL	0	0	0
FIELD	CLUB	NORMAL	STUDIO
TYPE	POP	COUNTRY	ROCK

To store your current sound settings into memory, follow these steps:

1. Go to the "SOUND PRESET" setting (preset button lights will be flashing).
2. Push one of the memory select buttons (3) for more than 2 seconds.

To recall the sound settings that are stored in memory, follow these steps:

1. Go to the "SOUND PRESET" setting (preset button lights will be flashing).
2. Push your desired memory select button (3) for less than 2 seconds.

NOTE

●The sound customization adjust mode will automatically shut off when either the radio or CD is selected, or if no adjustment is made within 7 seconds.
- If the AUDIO switch (4) is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds during the audio adjust mode, it will change to "Hold" mode. The selected audio mode will be held until the AUDIO switch (4) is pushed for more than 2 seconds again.

Comfort controls

Speed Compensated Volume function

N00752200170

Speed Compensated Volume function is a feature that automatically adjusts the VOL, BASS, MID, and TREBLE settings in accordance with the vehicle speed. It is possible to turn this function ON-OFF using the following methods:

1. If you are presently pushing the AUDIO switch (4) and making a tone adjustment, finish making the tone adjustment.
2. Push the AUDIO switch (4) for at least about 2 seconds. The system will switch to MENU mode and the characters "SCV Select" will be shown on the display.
3. Turn the AUDIO switch (4) clockwise to the turn the function ON. Turn it counterclockwise to turn the function OFF.

NOTE

●The MENU mode will automatically shut off when either the radio or CD is selected or if none of the switches are moved for 7 seconds.

Comfort controls

Radio control panel and display-Type 2

N00734900771

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- Memory select buttons
3- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button
4- SEEK (Up-seek) button
5- SEEK (Down-seek) button
6- SCAN button
7- TUNE/FOLDER switch
8- AM/FM (AM/FM1/FM2) indicator
9- Preset memory number display
10- STEREO indicator
11- Frequency display
12- SCAN indicator

Comfort controls

To listen to the radio

N00735000838

1. Press the PWR switch (1) or RADIO button (3) to turn on the radio. Press the PWR switch again to switch it off.
2. Press the RADIO button (3) to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2).
3. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons (2) to tune in to a station memorized for that button.

To tune the radio

Automatic tuning

1. After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), reception of the selected station will begin.
2. Press the SCAN button (6). SCAN indicator (12) will come on and the radio will tune consecutively to each available station for about 5 seconds per station. If you want to stop scanning, press the SCAN button again. The frequency display of the current station blinks once per second during SCAN.

Manual tuning

The frequency changes every time the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) is turned.

Turn the switch to select the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memory

As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be entered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps:

1. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5), or turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the frequency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in the memory as well as the frequency are displayed.

1. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

NOTE

●Disconnecting the battery cables erases all the radio station settings stored in the memory.

Comfort controls

Radio control panel and display-Type 3

N00734900784

1- PWR (On-Off) switch
2- Memory select buttons
3- RADIO (AM/FM/Satellite selection) button
4- SEEK (Up-seek) button
5- SEEK (Down-seek) button
6- SCAN button
7- TUNE/FOLDER switch
8- AM/FM/SAT (AM/FM1/FM2/SAT1/SAT2/SAT3/SAT4) indicator
9- Preset memory number display
10- STEREO indicator
11- Frequency display
12- SCAN indicator

Comfort controls

To listen to the radio

N00735000841

1. Press the PWR switch (1) or RADIO button (3) to turn on the radio. Press the PWR switch again to switch it off.
2. Press the RADIO button (3) to select the desired band (AM/FM1/FM2/SAT1/SAT2/SAT3/SAT4).
3. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune to a station, or press one of the memory select buttons (2) to tune in to a station memorized for that button.

To tune the radio

Automatic tuning

1. After pressing the SEEK button (4 or 5), reception of the selected station will begin.
2. Press the SCAN button (6). SCAN indicator (12) will come on and the radio will tune consecutively to each available station for about 5 seconds per station. If you want to stop scanning, press the SCAN button again. The frequency display of the current station blinks once per second during SCAN.

Manual tuning

The frequency changes every time the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) is turned.
Turn the switch to select the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memory

As many as 6 AM, 12 FM and 24 SAT stations can be entered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps:

1. Press the SEEK button (4 or 5), or turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (7) to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the frequency is being entered into the memory. The number of the button matching the entry in the memory as well as the frequency are displayed.

1. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.

NOTE

●Disconnecting the battery cables erases all the radio station settings stored in the memory.

Comfort controls

SIRIUS Satellite Radio control panel and display-Type 3

N00700200227

1. PWR (On-Off) switch
2. RADIO (AM/FM/Satellite selection) button
3. SEEK (Down-seek) button
4. SEEK (Up-seek) button
5. SCAN button
6. TUNE/FOLDER (Category selection) switch/AUDIO switch
7. Memory select buttons
8. Display

To listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio

N00700300026

1. If the audio system is OFF, turn it ON by pushing the PWR switch (1). The audio system will start working in the previously used mode. Push the RADIO button (2) to turn ON the radio.
2. Push the RADIO button (2) to select your desired band (SAT1/SAT2/SAT3/SAT4). Each time you push the button, the indication will change to the next one in the following sequence: AM → FM1 → FM2 → SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3 → SAT4. When “SIRIUS” has appeared on the display, the radio will receive satellite radio.

Category selection

N00700400027

1. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (6) to activate the category selection mode. The category number (CAT1 to CAT12) of the channel currently being received will be indicated. If the vehicle has a multi center display, the category name (POP to ENTERTAINMENT) will be shown.

2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (6) to select your desired category.

NOTE

●Even when categories are changed, the currently selected channel does not change. To select your desired channel, use the SEEK button (3 or 4).
- If you do not operate any switch for 15 seconds, the category selection mode will be canceled.

Channel selection

N00700500028

Push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select a channel.

NOTE

●While the system is in category selection mode, only the channels in the currently selected category can be selected.

Scan function

N00700600016

1. If you push the SCAN button (5), the system will select receivable channels one by one, receiving each one for about 7 seconds.
2. To cancel the SCAN mode, push the SCAN button (5) once more.

NOTE

●While the system is in category selection mode, only channels in the currently selected category are scanned.

To store a channel in memory

N00700700020

It is possible to store one channel for each memory select buttons (7) in memory. (It is possible to store a maximum of 24 channels in memory.) Store a channel in memory using the following procedure:

1. Push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select the channel you wish to store in memory.
2. Store the channel in memory by pushing one of the memory select buttons (7) until you hear a beep.

Comfort controls

NOTE

●Once you have stored channels in memory, you can instantly call up a desired channel by just pushing the corresponding memory select buttons (7).

SIRIUS ID indication

N00700800034

If you push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select "CH 0", the SIR-IUS ID will be indicated.

1. If you select "CH 0", the SIRIUS ID (12 digits) will be indicated.
2. To stop the SIRIUS ID indication, push the SEEK button (3 or 4) to select a channel other than "CH 0".

NOTE

- If you push the “DETAIL” function button (9), the SIR-IUS ID will be shown larger.

To skip or lock a desired channel using the MENU mode

ND0701100034

It is possible to make a setting to skip or lock a desired channel during channel selection.

1. If you push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds while the system is receiving a satellite radio channel, the system will switch to MENU mode.
2. In the MENU mode, satellite radio channel SKIP setting and LOCK setting and volume and equalizing control with driving speed setting (refer to "Volume and equalizing control with driving speed" on page 5-47) is possible. Each time you push the AUDIO switch (6), the status will change to the next one in the following sequence: "SCV Select" (the volume and equalizing control with driving speed setting mode) → "SKIP setting" (the SKIP setting mode) → "LOCK setting" (the LOCK setting mode) → Menu mode off

NOTE

●The MENU mode will automatically shut off when either the radio or CD is selected or the user does not move any of the switches for seven seconds.
- SKIP settings, LOCK settings, and the lock cancellation code are stored in memory. If a battery cable is disconnected, they will be erased. (The code will return to the "1111" that was set at the factory.)

SKIP setting (SKIP setting mode)

N00701200035

It is possible to set a channel to be skipped during channel selection. It is also possible to cancel a skip setting.

By turning the AUDIO switch (6), you can select "SKIP CH" or "UNSKIP ALL". These functions are described below.

SKIP CH : Sets the channel that is currently being received to be skipped.

UNSKIP ALL : Cancels all channel skip settings.

LOCK setting (LOCK setting mode)

N00701300036

It is possible to lock a channel. It is also possible to cancel a lock setting.

By turning the AUDIO switch (6), you can select "LOCK CH" (or "UNLOCK CH"), "UNLOCK ALL", or "CODE EDIT".

These functions are described below:

LOCK CH : Sets the channel that is currently being received to be locked.

UNLOCK CH : Sets the channel that is currently being received to be unlocked.

UNLOCK ALL : Cancels all channel lock settings.

CODE EDIT : Changes the lock cancellation code.

NOTE

- When the channel that is currently being received is not locked, you can select "LOCK CH". When the channel that is currently being received is locked, you can select "UNLOCK CH".

To skip a desired channel

N00701400037

It is possible to set a channel to not be received during channel selection.

1. Select the channel you wish to be skipped.
2. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds to select the MENU mode. Then select the SKIP setting mode.
3. In the SKIP setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select "SKIP CH".
4. Push the AUDIO switch (6) to set the channel that is currently being received to be skipped. When you have made the setting, the system will return to the SKIP setting mode. (The display will show "SKIP setting" after showing "STORED".)

NOTE

●Any channel for which a skip setting has been made is automatically skipped during channel selection.
●A channel that is stored in the preset memory is also skipped during channel selection. If you push the corresponding memory select buttons (7) to call up the channel, the display will show “SKIPD” or “SKIPPED CHANNEL” and the audio will be muted.

Comfort controls

To cancel skip settings

N00701500038

It is possible to cancel channel skip settings.

1. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds to select the MENU mode. Then select the SKIP setting mode.
2. In the SKIP setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select "UNSKIP ALL".
3. Push the AUDIO switch (6). All channel skip settings will be canceled. Then, the system will return to the SKIP setting mode. (The display will show "SKIP setting" after showing "STORED".)

To lock a desired channel

N00701600039

It is possible to lock a desired channel so that it cannot be selected.

1. Select the channel you wish to lock.
2. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds to select the MENU mode. Then select the LOCK setting mode.
3. In the LOCK setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select "LOCK CH".
4. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The channel currently being received will be locked. Then, the system will return to the LOCK setting mode.

NOTE

• If you attempt to select a locked channel, the display will show "LOCKED" or "PARENTAL LOCK".
  ●Channels stored in the preset memory are also locked.

To unlock locked channels

N00701700043

You can unlock one or all locked channels. Unlocking one or more channels requires entry of the code.

1. If you wish to unlock a single desired channel, select the channel you wish to unlock. (If you wish to unlock all locked channels, it doesn't matter which channel you select.)
2. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds to select the MENU mode. Then select the LOCK setting mode.

3. In the LOCK setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select "UNLOCK CH" if you wish to unlock a single desired channel or "UNLOCK ALL" if you wish to unlock all locked channels.

4. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The code entry window will display.

5. Use the memory select buttons (7) to enter the code (1111 to 6666).

1. If you entered the correct code, the channel lock setting will be canceled and the system will return to the LOCK setting mode. If you entered an incorrect code, a warning sound will be emitted and "CODE ERROR" will be displayed. Then, the code entry window will again display. You can retry the code entry any number of times.

NOTE

●The code is set to "1111" at the factory.

- It is possible to change the code to any desired number using "CODE EDIT".

Comfort controls

To change the lock cancellation code

N00701800044

It is possible to change the code for lock cancellation to any desired number.

1. Push the AUDIO switch (6) for at least about two seconds to select the MENU mode. Then select the LOCK setting mode.

2. In the LOCK setting mode, turn the AUDIO switch (6) to select "CODE EDIT".

3. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The code entry window will display.

4. Use the memory select buttons (7) to enter the current code (the code prior to the change).

5. If you entered the correct code, the code entry window will again be shown. Enter your desired code.

If you entered an incorrect code, a warning sound will be emitted and "CODE ERROR" will be displayed. Then, the code entry window will again be shown. You can retry the code entry any number of times.

1. After entering the new code, push the AUDIO switch (6). The code entry window will again be shown for confirmation. Enter the new code again, then push the AUDIO switch (6).

2. The code will be changed, and the system will return to the LOCK setting mode.

NOTE

●The code is stored in memory. If a battery cable is disconnected, such settings will be erased. (The code will return to the "1111" that was set at the factory.)

Comfort controls

To reset the lock cancellation code

N00701900032

In case you forget the code, it is possible to reset the code to the "1111" that was set at the factory.

1. With the audio power OFF, push the PWR switch (1) and AUDIO switch (6) simultaneously. The display will show "CODE INITIAL".
2. Push the AUDIO switch (6). The display will show "INITIALL OK?". If you wish to reset the code, push the AUDIO switch (6) again. If you do not wish to reset the code, turn the AUDIO switch (6) so the display shows "CANCEL" and then push the AUDIO switch (6) again.

Text messages

N00702000030

In a vehicle with a multi center display, it is possible, by pushing the “DETAIL” function button (9), to change the indication given during satellite radio reception.

If you press the “DETAIL” function button (9), the category name, artist name, track name, and arranger name will be shown. To return to the previous indication, push the “BACK” function button (10).

Comfort controls

NOTE

●The artist name, track name, and arranger name can each be shown with a maximum of 36 characters. However, a single line of display text can show a maximum of only 16 characters. If a name has more than 16 characters, push the "PAGE" function button (11) to see the next 16 characters. If you push the "PAGE" function button (11) while the last page is being shown, the display will show the first page again.

Comfort controls

CD control panel and display-Type 2, Type 3

N00735300671

1- LOAD-EJECT button
2- Disc loading slot
3- DISC select buttons
4- PWR (On-Off) switch
5- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button
6- CD (CD mode changeover) button
7- TRACK (Track up) button
8- TRACK (Track down) button
9- RPT/RDM (Repeat/Random) button
10- SCAN button

11- TUNE/FOLDER switch
12- CD indicator
13- DISC indicator
14- TRACK indicator
15- RPT/RDM/SCAN indicator
16- Track play time display

To listen to a CD

N00735500989

1. Press the CD button (6) and the CD mode will be selected, starting a playback.

NOTE

●As many as 6 CDs can be inserted into the CD autochanger.

1. To adjust the volume and tone, refer to "To adjust the volume" on page 5-44 and "To adjust the tone" on page 5-44.

2. To stop the disc, turn off the power by pressing the PWR switch (4) or switch to the other mode by pressing the RADIO button (5).

NOTE

- For information concerning the handling of the compact discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 5-74.

To set a disc

The indicator light (A) shows the condition of each disc slot.

Light off: No disc

Amber: Disc is set

Green: Disc is played (or selected)

To set a disc:

1. Press the LOAD/EJECT button (1).
2. Press one of the Disc select buttons (3) to select the disc which you wish to insert.
3. If there is already a disc loaded in the slot, the disc is automatically ejected. If there is no disc, insert the disc in the slot (2) after the READY light (B) illuminates.

Comfort controls

NOTE

- When the first disc has played to the end, the second disc will start to play automatically. When the second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth discs have each played to the end, the sequence will begin again from the first disc.

To listen an MP3 CD

This autochanger allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, 100 folders, and 255 files per disc.

Push the CD button (6) if MP3 CDs are already in the autochanger.

The display shows "READING", then playback will begin. The folder number and the track number will appear on the display.

NOTE

●While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA and reading of the MP3 files by pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep).
●With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.
●The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.
●Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
●MP3 encode software and writing software are not supplied to this unit.
●You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
- If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
●This unit does not record MP3 files.
- For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, refer to "Notes on CD-Rs/RWs" on page 5-76.

CAUTION

- Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format which has the “.mp3” file name may produce noise from the speakers cause speaker damage, and can damage your hearing.

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)

graph TD
    A["Root folder (root directory)"] --> B["1"]
    A --> C["2"]
    A --> D["3"]
    A --> E["4"]
    A --> F["5"]
    A --> G["6"]
    A --> H["7"]
    A --> I["8"]
    A --> J["9"]
    B --> C
    C --> D
    D --> E
    E --> F
    F --> G
    G --> H
    H --> I
    I --> J
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Tree1 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Tree2 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Tree3 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Tree4 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Folder selection

In the order

File selection

In the order

Comfort controls

To fast forward/reverse the disc

To fast forward or reverse, use the TRACK button (7 or 8).

Fast forward

You can fast forward by holding down the side of the TRACK button (7) for more than about 1 second.

Fast reverse

You can fast reverse by holding down the Y side of the TRACK button (8) for more than about 1 second.

Comfort controls

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)

You can select your desired folder by turning the TUNE/FOLDER switch (11).

5

Folder up

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (11) clockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

Folder down

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER switch (11) counterclockwise until the desired folder number appears on the display.

To select a desired track

You can select by using the TRACK button (7 or 8).

Track up

Press the side of the TRACK button (7) until the desired track is reached.

The TRACK indicator (14) will display the number of the selected track.

Track down

Press the V side of the TRACK button (8) until the desired track is reached.

The TRACK indicator (14) will display the number of the selected track.

NOTE

- Pressing the Side of the TRACK button (8) once during the song will cause the disc to restart playing from the beginning of the song.

To repeat the same track or change the order of tracks for playback

Press the RPT/RDM button (9) to select RPT → RDM → RPT/RDM mode off.

To repeat the same track

Select the RPT mode, and the RPT indicator (15) will come on. You can listen to the same track repeatedly.

NOTE

●The track repeat mode will be canceled by pressing the TRACK button (7 or 8), the SCAN button (10), the DISC select buttons (3) or the LOAD/EJECT button (1).
- With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated.

To change the order of tracks for playback

Random playback for all discs in the autochanger (music CDs only)

Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (15) will come on. Tracks are randomly selected from all discs loaded in the autochanger.

Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only) Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (15) will come on. Tracks from all the folders on the currently selected disc will be played in a random sequence.

NOTE

●The Random playback mode will be canceled by pressing the SCAN button (10) or the LOAD/EJECT button (1).
●In the all discs random mode, if an MP3 CD has been loaded in the autochanger, the autochanger will skip over it to the next music CD.
- With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the random mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random sequence.

Comfort controls

graph TD
    A["RPT"] --> B["12:00 OUTSIDE COMPASS N"]
    B --> C["CD DISC 6 TRACK RPT 12 TIME 12/34"]
    C --> D["RDM"]
    D --> E["12:00 OUTSIDE COMPASS N"]
    E --> F["CD DISC 6 TRACK RDM 12 TIME 12/34"]
    F --> G["Mode off"]
    G --> H["12:00 OUTSIDE COMPASS N"]
    H --> I["CD DISC 6 TRACK 12 TIME 12/34"]

To find the start of each track on a disc for playback

Press the SCAN button (10). "SCAN" will appear on the display and the autochanger will play back the first 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc.

The track number will blink while the scan mode is selected. To exit the scan mode, press the SCAN button again.

NOTE

●Once all tracks on the disc have been scanned, playback of the disc will restart from the beginning of the track that was playing when scanning started.
●The scan mode will be canceled when radio or CD operation is selected.
●With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played.

To eject a disc

Press the LOAD/EJECT button (1). Then press one of the Disc select buttons (3) to select the disc which you would like to eject.

NOTE

• When any disc is ejected, the system automatically switches from CD mode to radio mode.
• If you do not remove the disc before 15 seconds have elapsed, the autochanger will automatically reload the disc and stop.

MP3 title display (Multi center display only)

N00752300083

If your vehicle is equipped with the multi center display, it can display MP3 titles including ID3 tag information.

1. In the normal display mode, press the "DETAIL" function button, and the MP3 title or ID3 tag information will be shown.
2. Press the function button (1) repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: FOLDER (folder name and file name) → ARTIST (artist name and song title) → ALBUM (album name and song title).
3. To return to the normal display mode, press the "BACK" function button.

NOTE

• When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows "NO TITLE".
  ●The display can show up to 12 characters. If a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag information has more than 12 characters, press the "PAGE" function button to view the next 12 characters.
  ●Folder names and track names, or item of ID3 tag information can each be displayed up to a length of 32 characters.
  ●Characters that the autochanger cannot display are shown as an asterisk.

graph TD
    A["10:10 MP3 OUTSIDE 70V COMPASS N"] --> B["10:10 MP3 FOLDER CLASSIC ROCK FILE LIVE TIME 10:45"]
    B --> C["10:10 MP3 FOLDER 100:01:00 FILL 255:255 TIME 10:45"]
    C --> D["10:10 MP3 ALABAT EAGLEES LEMON HOTEL CALIFP TIME 10:45"]
    D --> E["10:10 MP3 ALABAT EAGLEES LIVE TIME 10:45"]
    E --> F["DISP"]
    F --> A

TA4000467

Comfort controls

Steering wheel remote control switch (if so equipped)

N00714800338

The remote control switches are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

These switches can be used when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

1- Seek up/Track up/Fast-forward button
2- Volume up button
3- Preset change/Folder up/Disc up button
4- PWR (ON/OFF)/Mode change button
5- Seek down/Track down/Fast-reverse button
6- Volume down button

NOTE

●Do not push two or more of the steering wheel remote control switches at the same time.

To turn on the power

PWR ON/OFF button — 4

When the power is off, press this button to turn the power on.

To turn the power off, press this button for 2 seconds or longer.

To adjust the volume

Volume up button — 2

The volume will increase when this button is pressed.

Volume down button — 6

The volume will decrease when this button is pressed.

To listen to the audio system

Select the desired mode by lightly pressing the Mode change button (4).

The mode switches between the radio and CD with each push of the button.

To listen to the radio

To select AM/FM/SAT mode

Mode change button — 4

Select the desired band by pressing this button.

The order is: AM → FM1 → FM2 → (SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3

→SAT4)→CD→AM.

Comfort controls

Automatic radio tuning

Seek up button — 1/Seek down button — 5

After pressing these buttons, reception of the selected station will begin.

Category selection (vehicle with satellite radio)

Seek up button — 1/Seek down button — 5

Keep one of the buttons pressed to scan through the categories.

When your desired category is reached, release the button.

To select the preset memory

Preset change button — 3

When the radio is on and this button is pressed, the preset station frequencies are sequentially selected each time the button is pressed; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2 etc.

To listen to a CD

To select a desired track

Track up —1

Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

Track down —5

Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.

To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc

To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the fast-forward button (1) or the fast-reverse button (5).

Fast-forward button —1

You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the fast-forward button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.

Fast-reverse button —5

You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the fast-reverse button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed.

To select a desired disc (CD autochanger only)

Disc up button — 3

Press this button until the desired disc is reached.

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)

Folder up button — 3

Press this button until the desired folder is reached. By pressing the button longer, you can jump to the next disc.

Comfort controls

Error codes

N00736100676

Type 1 Type 2, Type 3

TA1001694

If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.

Error display		Problem Description Repair
Type 1	Type 2Type 3
No DISC NO	DISC No disc inserted Disc is not in CD player. Insert disc.
E 01 ERR	OR 01 Focus error	Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on disc.	Insert disc with label facing up.Remove moisture from disc.
E 02 ERR	OR 02 Disc error	Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or excessive vehicle vibration.	Clean or replace disc.Retry when vibrations stop.

Comfort controls

Error display		Problem Description	Repair
Type 1	Type 2Type 3
E 03 ERROR	OR 03 Mechanism error	Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.	Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.
E HOT	ERRORHOT	High temperature	Internal protection against high temperatures.	Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.
E Com	COMMUNICATIONERROR	Communication or power supply error	Communication error between external device and audio equipment. Power supply error of external device.	Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.

Comfort controls

Error codes (SIRIUS Satellite Radio)

N00736100588

TA1001708

If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.

Error display Problem Description Repair
ANTENNA ERROR	Antenna error	The antenna may be faulty, not securely connected, or open-circuited.	Take the vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
ACQUIRING SIGNAL	Cannot pick up signal.	The signal is too weak to be received.	Move to a place where the signal is easy to receive.
INVALID CHANEL	Channel is invalid	No program is currently being broadcast on this channel; or reception is not possible with this channel.	Consult SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
NO CHANNEL	There is no selectable channel.	There is no selectable channel. Cancel SKIP settings.

Comfort controls

Error display	Problem	Description	Repair
CALL 888-539-SIRIUS	Unauthorized channel	Contract does not include reception of this channel.	Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio and obtain a contract.
SAT ERROR	Mechanical fault or bad connection	There is a mechanical fault or a bad connection.	Take the vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
OFF AIR OFF	AIR	This channel is not broadcasting at the present time; or satellite radio broadcasting is suspended.	Check the broadcast times with SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
NOT ACTIVATED	ID not registered	The ID code in the receiver has not been registered with SIRIUS Satellite Radio.	Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
READING	Data reading in progress	Reading of received data is in progress. Received data are being read. Please wait.
UPDATING	Channel data updating in progress	SIRIUS Satellite Radio is presently updating the channel data.	Wait until updating is complete.
SUB UPDATING-PRESS ANY KEY	Contract status updating complete	The contract status has been updated. Press any audio key.

NOTE

- Reception may not be possible in a place where the signal is interrupted by a tunnel, by the roof of a garage or other structure, by woods, or by a tall building. At such times, the audio is muted. This behavior does not indicate a fault.

● Reception conditions may vary according to the angle of the satellite used for the satellite radio service.

● Reception may deteriorate if a luggage carrier is attached to the roof or snow collects on the antenna.

Satellite radio reception may not be possible in certain regions.

Comfort controls

Handling of compact discs

N00734100223

●Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark shown in the illustration below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may cause problems.)

AA0012063

●The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs (like cracked discs) or low-quality compact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the discs) such as those shown will damage the CD player.

Comfort controls

●In the following circumstances, moisture can form on compact discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal operation.

• When there is high humidity (for example, when it is raining).
• When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after the heater is turned on in cold weather.

In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry out.

• When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations, such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not work.
• When storing compact discs, always store them in their separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sunlight, or in any place where the temperature or humidity is high.
  ●Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there isn't a label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always hold it by the outer edge and the center hole.

●To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.

Illustration of two hands inserting a disc into a circular component, showing mechanical assembly (no text or symbols)

●Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.

Comfort controls

- Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers (B) on compact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on which a label or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc that has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD player may stop working properly and you may not be able to eject the compact disc.

Notes on CD-Rs/RWs

N00751900053

●You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
- CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and high humidity than ordinary music CDs. Leaving them inside a vehicle for extended periods may damage them and make playback impossible.
●The unit may not successfully play back a CD-R/RW that was made by the combination of writing software, a CD recorder (CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are incompatible with one another.
●This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session is not closed.
●This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs which contain other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).
- Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CD-R/RW disc.

WARNING

- Operating the CD player in a manner other than specifically instructed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself. There are no user serviceable parts inside. In case of malfunction, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Antenna

N00734200367

Whip antenna

To remove the whip antenna, unscrew it by turning it counterclockwise.

Line drawing of a car's rearview and side profile with a circular arrow indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols)

NOTE

●Be sure to remove the whip antenna in the following cases:

• When entering a place with low clearance.
• When going into an automatic car wash.
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.

Comfort controls

SIRIUS antenna (if so equipped)

The antenna (A) is located as shown in the illustration.

Line drawing of a car rear bumper with labeled component 'A' (no text or symbols beyond label)

Comfort controls

General information about your radio

N00733900240

Your vehicle's radio receives both AM and FM stations. The quality of your reception is affected by distance, obstacles, and signal interference.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.

●The device may not cause harmful interference.
●This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

●Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Signal transmission

FM signals do not follow the earth surface nor are they reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot be received over long distances. AM signals follow the earth's surface and are reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM broadcasts can be received over longer distances.

FM AM

TA0000241

Weak reception (fading)

Because of the limited range of FM signals and the way FM waves transmit, you may experience weak or fading FM reception. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains or similar obstructions, reception can be disturbed.

Comfort controls

Reflection

The reason why one can hear FM but not AM in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected by solid objects such as buildings, etc.

Because FM signals are easily reflected by buildings, this can also cause reception disturbances.

The direct signal from the broadcast station reaches the antenna slightly before the reflected signal. This time difference may cause some reception disturbance or flutter.

This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.

Illustration of a car driving on a curved road with sensor waves, set against a backdrop of buildings (no text or symbols)

Cross modulation

If one listens to a weak station and is in the vicinity of another strong station, both stations might be received simultaneously.

Line drawing of a car driving on a curved road with motion lines and hills in the background (no text or symbols)

FM stereo reception

Stereo reception requires a high quality broadcast signal. This means that types of disturbances mentioned previously become more marked and the reception range is somewhat diminished during stereo reception.

Comfort controls

Causes of disturbances

FM reception is affected by the electrical systems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially those without an electronic noise suppression device. The disturbance is even greater if the station is weak or poorly tuned.

FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensitive to electrical disturbances such as power lines, lightning and other types of similar electrical phenomena.

Cartoon illustration of a person riding a motorcycle on a road with a broken car in the background (no text or symbols)

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down....6-2

Jump-starting the engine .....6-2

Engine overheating 6-5

Tools and jack 6-7

How to change a tire 6-12

Towing....6-23

Operation under adverse driving conditions .....6-25

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down

N00836300103

If your vehicle breaks down on the road, move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the flashers flashing.

If the engine stops/fails

If the engine stops, there will be no power assist to the steering and brakes, making these difficult to use.

●The brake booster will not work, so the brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal will be harder to press than usual.
●Since there is no power steering assist, the steering wheel will be hard to turn. Turning the steering wheel requires more effort than usual.

When the engine fails at the intersection

Get help from your passengers, bystanders, etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe zone.

Jump-starting the engine

N00836400667

If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or dead, you can start it with the battery from another vehicle using jumper cables.

WARNING

- When using jumper cables to start a vehicle, follow the procedures and be very cautious.

CAUTION

- Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing. Vehicles with automatic transaxles cannot be started this way. Pushing or towing a vehicle that has a manual transaxle may overheat and damage the catalytic converter. Also, there is more risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or towed.

1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an accidental electrical contact.
2. Position the vehicles close enough together so that the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren't touching each other.

CAUTION

- Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery. If the other system isn't 12-volt, both systems can be damaged.

1. You could be injured if the vehicles move. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transaxle in "P" (PARK) or a manual transaxle in "N" (Neutral). Turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position.

WARNING

●Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position on both vehicles. Make sure that the cables or your clothes cannot be caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal injury could result.

NOTE

●Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical loads. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.

1. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at the proper level. (Refer to "Battery" on page 7-16.)

WARNING

- If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP STARTING!! The battery might split open or explode if the temperature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to the proper level.

For emergencies

1. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B).

NOTE

- Open the terminal cover before connecting the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery. (Refer to "Battery" on page 7-16.)

●Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size. Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result.

- Check the jumper cables for damage and corrosion before use.

For emergencies

1. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and the other end to the engine block of the vehicle with the low battery (A) at the point farthest from the battery.

WARNING

• Be sure to follow the proper order when connecting the batteries, of: ①→ ②→ ③→ ④
  ●Make sure that the connection ④s made to the engine properly. If the connection is directly made to the negative side of the battery, the flammable gases from inside the battery might catch fire and explode, causing personal injury.
• When connecting the jumper cable, do not connect the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can make the battery explode.

CAUTION

●Make sure that the jumper cable will not be caught in the cooling fan or other moving parts in the engine compartment.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle providing the boost. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the low battery.

2. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the reverse order from the way you connected them.

WARNING

●Charging your battery while it is still in your vehicle might cause the battery to catch fire and explode. If you have to charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect the negative terminal.
- Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away from the battery because the battery may explode.
- Keep your work area well vented when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.
- Remove all the caps before charging the battery.
●Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive diluted sulphuric acid. If electrolyte comes in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes, or the painted surface of your vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them immediately and thoroughly with water, and get prompt medical attention.
●Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working near the battery.
- Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

As your vehicle has anti-lock brakes

If you drive your vehicle with a low battery charge, after the engine has been started by using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. This can cause the anti-lock braking system warning light to blink on and off. This is only due to the low battery voltage. It is not a problem with the brake system. If this happens, fully charge the battery and ensure the charging system is operating properly.

Engine overheating

N00836500222

If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator moves to the "H" (hot) position (red zone), the engine may be overheated. If this happens:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. With the engine still running, carefully raise the engine hood to vent the engine compartment.
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If the fan is not turning, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

WARNING

●To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, jewelry and clothes away from the cooling fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.

1. If you see steam or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine.

For emergencies

1. If you do not see steam or spray coming from under the hood, leave the engine on until the temperature indicator on the instrument panel moves below the red zone. When it is in the middle of the normal zone, you can start driving again. If the indicator stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.

WARNING

●Before raising the engine hood, check to see if there is steam or spray coming from under the hood. Steam or spray coming from an overheated engine could seriously scald you. Do not open the hood until there is no steam or spray.

1. When you do not see any more steam or spray, open the hood. Look for obvious leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be careful as components will be hot. Any leak source must be repaired.
2. If there is no obvious leak source, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too low, slowly add coolant.
3. If the reserve tank needs coolant, you will probably also need to add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen or remove the radiator cap until the engine has cooled down.

WARNING

●Removing the radiator cap could scald you with escaping hot water or steam. When checking the radiator level, cover the cap with a cloth before trying to remove it. Turn it slowly counterclockwise, without pressing down, to the first notch. The pressure in the system will then be let out. When the pressure is COMPLETELY LET OUT, press down and keep turning the cap counterclockwise until it will come off.

1. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use plain water if you have to (and replace it with the right coolant as soon as possible).
2. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it fully. Check the temperature indicator. You can drive when the indicator returns to the normal zone.
3. Have your vehicle checked by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

For emergencies

Tools and jack

N00836600193

Storage

Technical diagram of a car interior showing internal components and a circular pattern (no text or symbols)

1- Jack
2-Tools

Tools are stowed beneath the luggage floor board of the luggage compartment.

The jack is stored under the floor carpet behind the rear seat.

For emergencies

Tools

N00832600023

1- Tool bag
2- Wheel nut wrench
3- Bar

NOTE

- When returning the tools to the tool bag, place each one in its own pocket.

Jack

ND0832700183

To remove

1. Tip forward the rear seatback. (Refer to "Folding the seatbacks forward" on page 2-10.)

Interior view of a car showing seat compartments and rear seats with arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

1. Lift the carpet (A) toward the front of the vehicle.

Diagram of a car interior showing directional arrows and a grid layout (no text or symbols)

1. Lift the cover (B).

3D rendering of a car interior showing a battery pack and structural components (no text or symbols visible)

For emergencies

1. To remove the jack, turn the shaft end so that the jack retracts and detach it from fixing bracket (C).

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with rotating components (no text or symbols)

For emergencies

To store

1. Retract the jack, then return it to its original position.

1. Align the hook (A) of the jack with the mounting part (B) of the bracket.

1. Turn the shaft end by hand to expand the jack until it is held firmly in position.

Mechanical robotic arm with rotating joints and connecting rod (no visible text or symbols)

For emergencies

1. After tightening the shaft as far as possible by hand, tighten it by a further 90° using the bar to ensure that the jack is securely retained.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism interacting with a keyboard (no text or symbols present)

1. Return the cover, carpet and seatback to its original position.

For emergencies

How to change a tire

N00836900750

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly, and move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position.
3. Turn on the hazard flashers and turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position.

4. Set up a warning triangle, flashing signal light, etc., at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally opposite from the tire (B) you are changing.

WARNING

- Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position, leading to an accident.

NOTE

●The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with your vehicle. It is recommended that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep them in the vehicle for use if needed.
- If chocks or blocks are not available, use stones or any other objects that are large enough to hold the wheel in position.
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench ready. Refer to "Tools and jack" on page 6-7.

Spare tire information

N00849600269

Check the air pressure of the spare tire frequently and make sure it is ready for emergency use at any time.

Maintaining the spare tire at the air pressure listed on the tire and loading information placard will ensure that it can always be used under any conditions (city/high-speed driving, varying load weight, etc.).

The spare tire is stored beneath the luggage floor board of the luggage compartment.

WARNING

●Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

CAUTION

●While the spare tire is stowed, the inflation pressure should be checked at least once a month to assure that it remains at the recommended inflation pressure. See the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver's door sill. Refer to "Tire and loading information placard" on page 9-3.
- Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 7-24.
- If your vehicle is equipped with the 17-inch-steel spare tire or compact spare tire, it should only be used temporarily. When the spare tire is used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible to replace or repair the original tire.
●You can use the same wheel nuts on the spare tire wheel.

For emergencies

Compact spare tire (if so equipped)

The compact spare tire is designed to save space in the luggage compartment. Its lighter weight makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.

CAUTION

●You can use the same wheel nuts on the compact spare tire wheel.
●Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with the compact spare tire.
●Avoid fast starting and braking when driving with the compact spare tire.
●Do not drive through automatic car washes and over obstacles that could possibly damage the underside of your vehicle. Because the compact spare tire is smaller than the original tire, there is less clearance between the ground and your vehicle.
●Because the compact spare tire is designed only for your vehicle, do not use it on any other vehicle.
●Do not put the compact spare tire on a different wheel, and do not put standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could damage these parts or other parts on your vehicle.

To remove the spare tire

N00849700143

1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
2. To remove the spare tire, remove the installation clamp (A) by turning it counterclockwise.

Interior view of a car showing the wheel and gear assembly with an inset close-up of a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

NOTE

●Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with two wheels and a bracket (no text or symbols)

For emergencies

To change a tire

N00849800359

1. Loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.

For emergencies

1. Place the jack under one of the jacking points (A) shown in the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tire you wish to change.

Diagram showing a car above and below a road with a vehicle, no text or symbols present

TA0012479

1. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top of the jack.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket labeled C and part B with rotational arrow (no text or symbols beyond labels)

WARNING

• Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your vehicle or the jack might fall over and cause personal injury.
  ●Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface. Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand or pebbles under the jack base.

• Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar into the shaft's jack end, as shown in the illustration.

Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until the tire is raised slightly off the ground surface.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand holding a tool next to a car wheel, with a magnified inset of the component (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

• Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tire is raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the vehicle any higher.
  ●Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack.
  ●Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous.
  ●Do not use a jack except the one that came with your vehicle.
  ●The jack should not be used for any purpose other than to change a tire.

For emergencies

WARNING

●No one should be in your vehicle when using the jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is on the jack.
●Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires that are still on the ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the jack.

1. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench, then take the wheel off.

CAUTION

●Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

For emergencies

1. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installation holes (H) in the wheel, and then mount the spare tire.

WARNING

●Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem (I) facing outboard. If you cannot see the valve stem (I), you have installed the wheel backwards. Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel installed backwards can cause vehicle damage and result in an accident.

Technical line drawing of a car tire assembly with hands adjusting the wheel (no text or symbols)

1. On aluminum wheels, temporarily tighten the wheel nuts (flange nuts) until their flange section comes in contact with the wheel and it is no longer loose.

For emergencies

On steel wheel (spare wheel), install the wheel nuts with their tapered ends facing inward, then tighten by hand until the wheel is no longer loose.

CAUTION

●Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts or they will tighten too much.

NOTE

●Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the steel wheel (spare wheel), but return them to the original wheel and tire as soon as possible.

- If all four wheels are changed to steel wheels, use tapered nuts.

For emergencies

1. Lower the vehicle slowly by rotating the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise until the tire touches the ground.

Illustration of hands installing a car wheel rim with a tool, no text or symbols present

1. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the illustration until each nut has been tightened to the torque listed here. 88 to 108 N•m (65 to 80 ft-lb)

CAUTION

●Never use your foot or a pipe extension to apply added force to the wheel nut wrench when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so, you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.

1. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure. The recommended tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver's door sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to "Tire inflation pressures" on page 7-24.

Interior view of a car showing seat, dashboard, and side panel with labeled points A and B (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A- Vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada B- Vehicles sold in Canada

For emergencies

CAUTION

●While the spare tire is stowed, the inflation pressure should be checked at least once a month to assure that it remains at the recommended inflation pressure. See the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver's door sill. Refer to "Tire and loading information placard" on page 9-3.
- Driving with an improperly inflated tire can cause an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep your speed down and avoid sudden steering or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page 7-24.
- If your vehicle is equipped with the 17-inch-steel spare tire or compact spare tire, it should only be used temporarily. When the spare tire is used, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work properly. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possible to replace or repair the original tire.
●After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that they have not come loose.
- If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after changing the tire, have the tire checked for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
- Do not mix one type of tire with another or use a different size from the one listed. This would cause early wear and poor handling.

For emergencies

To install the flat tire or spare tire

N008499001057

Tighten the clamp (A) firmly with your fingers by turning it clockwise until the tire cannot move.

Interior view of a car showing the wheel and gear assembly with an inset close-up of a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

To store the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench

ND0850000029

Reverse the removing procedure when storing the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench.

Refer to "Tools and jack" on page 6-7.

Towing

N00837000703

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by a commercial tow truck service.

When towing is required, transport the vehicle using a tow truck.

Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle.

CAUTION

●Do not attempt to be towed by another vehicle with a rope.

There may be local regulations concerning towing in your area. Obey the regulations of the area where you are driving your vehicle.

For emergencies

A

B Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with this style.

c Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with this style.

D

E

AA2000132

For emergencies

Towing the vehicle by a tow truck

CAUTION

●This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using sling lift type equipment (Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will damage the bumper and front end.
- Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or Type C) as illustrated. This could result in the driving system damage or vehicle may jump at the carriage. If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use Type D or E equipment.
●On front-wheel drive vehicles, if the transaxle is malfunctioning or damaged, transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.
●On front-wheel drive vehicle, if the vehicle is towed with the ignition key in the “ON” position and only the front wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the ground, the ASC may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep the ignition key in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position. When towing the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, keep the ignition key in the “ACC” position.

CAUTION

- If you tow the vehicles with an automatic transaxle with the driving wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated, make sure that the towing speed and distance given below are never exceeded, causing the transaxle damage.

Towing speed: 31 mph (50 km/h) Towing distance: 18 miles (30 km)

For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow the local driving laws and regulations.

Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B)

Place the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position.

Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or tie-down strap. Never place the ignition key in the “LOCK” position when towing.

CAUTION

●Never tow an automatic transaxle vehicle with the rear wheels up (and the front wheels on the ground) (Type B) when the automatic transaxle fluid level is low. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.

Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C)

Release the parking brake.

Place the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position.

WARNING

●To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the towing vehicle, set your air selection switch to the recirculation position.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

N00837200620

If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or snow

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the selector lever rhythmically between “Sports mode” and “R” (REVERSE) position, while pressing lightly on the accelerator pedal.

Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels. Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the transaxle before trying again.

If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for a commercial tow truck service.

WARNING

- When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion can make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward or backward, and injure any bystanders.

For emergencies

On wet roads On snowy or icy roads

CAUTION

●Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt by driving into flood water.
- When driving in rain, on water-covered roads, or through a car wash, water could get into the brake discs and make them fail temporarily. In such cases, lightly press the brake pedal to see if they are working properly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly several times while driving to dry the brake pads, then check them again.
- When driving in rain, a layer of water may form between the tires and the road surface (aquaplaning). This loosens your tires' grip on the road, making it difficult to steer or brake properly. When driving on a wet road:
- Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
- Do not drive on worn tires.
- Always keep the tires at the correct inflation pressures.

• When driving on a road covered with snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. There may be state or local regulations about using snow tires. Always check the regulations in your local area before using them. Refer to the section entitled “Snow tires” on page 7-28 and “Tire chains” on page 7-29.
  ●Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the brakes.
• Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.
• If a skid occurs when the accelerator pedal is depressed, take your foot off the pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the skid.
• Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). Hold the brake pedal down firmly and keep it depressed. Do not pump the brake pedal which will result in reduced braking performance.
  ●After parking on snowy or icy road, it may be difficult to move your vehicle due to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the accelerator pedal little by little to move the vehicle after confirming safety of the vehicle.

CAUTION

- Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly. The vehicle could start moving when it breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in an accident.

On a bumpy or rutted road

●Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.

CAUTION

●Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes can damage the tires and wheels. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-inflated tires are especially at risk for damage.

For emergencies

Vehicle care and maintenance

Service precautions....7-2

Catalytic converter....7-3

Engine hood 7-4

View of the engine compartment....7-6

Engine oil and oil filter 7-6

Engine coolant 7-9

Air cleaner filter....7-1

Automatic transaxle fluid. 7-1

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models)....7-1

Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models)....7-14

Washer fluid. 7-1

Brake fluid 7-1

Power steering fluid 7-1

Battery 7-1

Tires 7-2

Brake pedal free play 7-2

Parking brake 7-3

Wiper blades 7-3

Emission-control system maintenance.....7-3

General maintenance 7-3

For cold and snowy weather 7-3

Fuse links....7-36

Fuses 7-36

Replacement of light bulbs 7-44

Vehicle care precautions 7-57

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle. 7-58

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle. 7-60

Vehicle care and maintenance

Service precautions

N00937300316

Taking regular care of your vehicle will preserve its value and appearance as long as possible.

You can do some of the maintenance work yourself, and the rest should only be performed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

If you discover a malfunction or other problem, have it corrected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

This section describes the maintenance inspections that you can do yourself, if you so desire. Follow the instructions and precautions for each procedure.

WARNING

• When checking or servicing the inside of the engine compartment, be sure the engine is stopped and has had a chance to cool down.
• If you need to work in the engine compartment with the engine running, be especially careful that your clothing, hair, etc. does not get caught in the fan, drive belts, or other moving parts.
  ●The fan can turn on automatically even if the engine is not running. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position and remove the key to be safe while you work in the engine compartment.
  ●Do not smoke or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. The fumes are flammable.

WARNING

• Be extremely careful when working around the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
  ●Do not get under your vehicle while it is on a jack. Always use properly rated automotive jack stands.
  ●Handling your vehicle's parts and materials in the wrong way can injure you. Ask an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice if you have questions.

MITSUBISHI MOTORS

DIAMOND CARE"PROTECTION PLAN

Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

Catalytic converter

N00937400421

The catalytic converter requires you to use unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the emission-control effectiveness of the converter.

Normally, the catalytic converter does not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned for the converter to continue to work properly.

CAUTION

●Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. If the engine malfunctions or misfires, or if your vehicle performance suffers, have it serviced promptly. Running your vehicle when it is overheated may result in damage to the converter and vehicle.

WARNING

• Do not park or run your vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.
• Do not put undercoat paint on the catalytic converter.

Vehicle care and maintenance

To reduce the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of the type of recommended in “Fuel selection”.
  ●Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of gas could damage the catalytic converter.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when performing diagnostic tests.
• Do not idle the engine for a long time if it is idling roughly or otherwise obviously malfunctioning.
  ●To prevent the catalytic converter from being damaged from unburned gas, do not race the engine when turning off the ignition switch.
• Stop driving the vehicle if you think the performance is noticeably low, or the engine has a malfunction. If you are not able to stop driving immediately, slow down and drive for only a short time. Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
  ●In unusual situations involving major engine problems, a burning odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalytic converter overheating. If this occurs, stop in a safe place, shut the engine off and let the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool, immediately take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for service.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine hood

N00937500389

To open

Use the engine hood release lever (located under the instrument panel near the driver's door) to unlock the engine hood.

Pull the lever toward you to release the engine hood latch.

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel assembly with a magnified inset showing a key adjustment (no text or symbols visible)

7

WARNING

●Never use the release lever to unlatch the engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
●Do not drive your vehicle unless the engine hood is locked.

Release the safety lever and lift the engine hood.

Diagram of a car interior showing a side-mounted exhaust pipe and airflow direction, with no readable text or symbols.

NOTE

●To prevent damage to the engine hood and wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting position when you open the engine hood.

Support the engine hood with the hood prop. Insert the hood prop securely in the opening under the hood marked with an arrow.

Close-up of a car engine bay with a close-up inset showing a pipe fitting and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

●Always insert the support prop into the hole specially made for it. Propping the engine hood at any other place could cause the prop to slip out and lead to an accident.
●The hood prop can fall out if the hood is lifted by a strong wind.

To close

Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and put it back in its retainer.

Diagram of a car engine hood with a magnified inset showing a mechanical component detail (no text or symbols)

Slowly lower the engine hood about 12 inches (30 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.

NOTE

- If this does not close the engine hood properly, drop it again from a slightly higher position.

CAUTION

●Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when closing the engine hood.

Vehicle care and maintenance

View of the engine compartment

N00937600595

1- Power steering fluid reservoir
2- Brake fluid
3- Battery
4- Windshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir
5- Engine oil level dipstick
6- Radiator cap
7- Engine oil filler cap
8- Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
9- Engine coolant reservoir
10- Air cleaner filter

Engine oil and oil filter

N00937700743

To check and refill engine oil

It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may need to add oil between the recommended oil change intervals. Before starting the engine, check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, wipe it off, and gently insert it all the way into the crankcase. Slowly remove it again. The oil level must not go above the line on the dipstick.

If the level does not reach the line, which shows the smallest amount of oil required, remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve cover, and fill to within the "Good" range.

CAUTION

●Overfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration and loss of oil pressure, which could damage the engine.

WARNING

• Used engine oil is poisonous, and can damage your skin. Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious skin disorders, including dermatitis and cancer. Don't let used oil touch your skin. Wash thoroughly after working with it.
• Keep used oil out of the reach of children.

NOTE

●Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced by payload, engine speed, etc.
●The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for example, repeated operation on rough roads, in mountainous regions, on roads with many uphill and downhill gradients, or over short distances). Consequently, the oil will require earlier replacement in accordance with the schedule in the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

Engine oil identification mark

Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only engine oils with the ILSAC certification symbol on the front of the container.

ILSAC certification symbol

AA0017736

Vehicle care and maintenance

If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certification symbol, use an API classification SM oil with the following label. This mark appears on the top of the oil container and tells you two important things about the oil.

1- The top portion shows the quality of the oil.
2- The center portion shows the SAE grade of the oil viscosity.

Recommended engine oil viscosity

Use engine oil with the proper thickness for the outdoor temperatures where you will be driving.

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is strongly recommended for optimum fuel economy and cold starting. SAE 10W-30 may be used when the normal operating temperature is above 100 °F ( 38 °C ).

To replace the oil filter

The oil filter should be replaced at the time or mileage specified in the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

Only use high quality replacement filters on this vehicle. The manufacturer's specifications for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters require that the filter can withstand a pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi oil filter is the best replacement filter.

Follow the installation instructions printed on the filter.

CAUTION

●Take care not to bend the oil filter cover when replacing the oil filter.

Engine coolant

N00937800395

To check the coolant level

The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual method for determining the coolant level. When the engine is cold, the level of the coolant in the reserve tank should be between the "F" (FULL) and "L" (LOW) marks. The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap except for checking the coolant freeze point or replacing the antifreeze coolant.

Vehicle care and maintenance

To add coolant

Use Mitsubishi Genuine Coolant or an equivalent.

Mitsubishi Genuine Coolant provides excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation on all metals, including aluminum, and prevents blockages in the radiator, heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.

If you need to add coolant often, or if the level in the reserve tank does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for testing.

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants that contain them. Using the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum parts.
• When you need to add coolant to the reserve tank, use at least a 50 % concentration of ethylene-glycol antifreeze in water. Do not overfill. Use a higher concentration (not over 60 %) when the outside temperature is -31 °F (-35 °C) or lower. When the engine is working very hard (for example, during mountain driving and/or when the outside temperature is high), use a 50 % concentration. You can check the concentration level with a gauge from an automotive supply store, or your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or service station can check it for you. Use only high quality ethylene-glycol antifreeze coolant that is made to prevent corrosion of all cooling system metals.

CAUTION

- Do not top off the tank with plain water only. Water by itself boils at a lower temperature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the water freezes, it will damage your cooling system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause corrosion and rust.

Radiator cap

The radiator cap must be tight sealed to prevent losing coolant which may result in engine damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved equivalent.

WARNING

●Wait for the engine to cool down before opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot steam or boiling coolant could spray up from the radiator and scald you.

Points to remember

• Do not overfill the reserve tank.
• Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow from the reserve tank back to the radiator when the engine cools down. If you need to change the cap, use the exact same kind.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator with the proper gauge, and only when it is safe. If you add anti-freeze, the contents of the reserve tank must be protected against freezing.
• Keep the front of the radiator and condenser clean.

Vehicle care and maintenance

- If the temperature of the engine coolant does not rise after the engine is warmed-up, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the thermostat checked, and replaced if necessary.

Air cleaner filter

N00937900295

The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty from use and not filter properly. Replace it with a new filter using the schedule in the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

Unclamp and take out the air cleaner filter.

Interior view of a car engine bay showing internal components like hoses, valves, and a radiator (no visible text or symbols)

After replacing the air cleaner filter, put the cover back on in its original position.

NOTE

●Genuine Mitsubishi Parts are recommended when replacing the air cleaner filter.

CAUTION

●Take care not to scratch the engine air flow sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Automatic transaxle fluid

N00938000453

The automatic transaxle should be maintained and serviced by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to obtain the best performance and longest life. It is important that the transaxle fluid is kept at the correct level.

To check the fluid level

The fluid level should be checked when the engine temperature gauge shows the engine is warmed up and the fluid in the transaxle is heated to its normal working temperature. Driving with the wrong fluid level will rapidly wear out the transaxle and destroy the fluid.

Procedure for checking the fluid level

1. With the brake pedal fully depressed and the engine idling, select each gear momentarily, ending with the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position.
2. The fluid level should be at the HOT mark, but never above the HOT mark when the engine is warmed up. Add or drain fluid to get to the correct level.
3. Make certain that the dipstick cap is installed properly to keep dirt and water out of the transaxle.

WARNING

●Transaxle fluid is extremely flammable and poisonous. Do not spill fluid when adding or draining.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Fluid type

Use only “DIAMOND ATF SP III” transaxle fluid to ensure optimum transaxle performance.

Special additives

Mitsubishi Motors Corporation does not recommend the addition of any fluid additives to the transaxle.

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models)

N00938400170

Whenever the transfer oil level is checked, add oil as necessary to maintain the proper level.

Fill or change the oil according to the table.

Oil type

Lubricant Hypoid gear oil API classification GL-5

Viscosity range $AE 90

Vehicle care and maintenance

Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models)

N00915200171

Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as necessary to maintain the proper level.

Fill or change oil according to the table.

Oil type

Lubricant	Hypoid gear oil API classification GL-5 or higher
Anticipated temperature range	Viscosity range
Above -10 °F (-23 °C)	SAE90SAE85W-90SAE80W-90
-30 °F to -10 °F(-34 °C to -23 °C)	SAE80WSAE80W-90
Below -30 °F (-34 °C)	SAE75W

Washer fluid

N01938600198

The windshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir is in the engine compartment.

Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing pipe connection and valve mechanism (no text or symbols)

During cold weather

When freezing weather is anticipated, flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

Brake fluid

N00938800334

To check the fluid level

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.

The brake fluid level must be between the "MAX" and "MIN" marks on the reservoir.

3D rendering of a cylindrical mechanical component with labeled MAX and MIN ports, shown without any text or symbols beyond labels

The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality.

If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake system.

If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Fluid type

Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water out.

CAUTION

• Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This will damage the seals.
  ●Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can damage painted surfaces.
  ●Use only the listed brake fluid. Different brands of brake fluid have different additives, and these can cause a chemical reaction. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
• Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep the brake fluid from evaporating.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Power steering fluid

N00939000199

To check the fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir while the engine is idling. Check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir and refill the fluid, if necessary.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing engine components and a magnified inset of a cylindrical component (no text or symbols)

Fluid type

Lubricant Genuine Mitsubishi Power Steering Fluid

Battery

N00939100842

The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting and to keep the vehicle's electrical system working properly. Check the battery regularly.

If battery performance is suspect, have the battery and charging system tested by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay showing internal components like hoses, valves, and motors (no text or symbols visible)

NOTE

●After replacing the battery, the electronic control system data for the automatic transaxle, etc., will be erased.

As a result, shifting may be rough.

Shifting will become smoother after several changes in speed.

Checking battery electrolyte level

Use the following procedure to check the battery electrolyte level.

1. If your vehicle is equipped with battery cover, open the lid on the battery cover.

Line drawing of a battery with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

NOTE

●Be sure to close the battery cover after checking the battery fluid level and after replacing the battery.

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. Insert the tip of a screwdriver at the edge of the cap, pry gently to remove the cap.

Line drawing of a battery with a screwdriver and directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. The inside of the battery is divided into several compartments.

Check the electrolyte level (A) in each cell.

The electrolyte level must be within the range (B) shown in the illustration.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water. Do not overfill above the top of the range because a spill during driving could cause damage.

WARNING

• If the battery goes flat, be sure to check the battery electrolyte level before connecting booster cables.
  ●After checking the battery electrolyte level, make sure the caps are fitted securely.
• If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace the battery.

During cold weather

The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. This has to do with its chemical and physical properties and is why a very cold battery, especially one with a low charge, will have a hard time starting your vehicle.

It is recommended that you have your battery and charging system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice before the start of cold weather. If necessary, have it charged. This will guarantee more reliable starting, and longer battery life.

Disconnection and connection

To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, then the positive (+) terminal. To reconnect the battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, before starting the vehicle.

NOTE

- Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the battery.

WARNING

• Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running, or you could damage the vehicle's electrical parts.
  ●Never short-circuit the battery. This could cause it to overheat and be damaged.
• Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the battery because the battery could explode.
  ●Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corrosive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or discolor them. And if it gets on your skin or in your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness. Please observe the following handling instructions:

- If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of water and neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.

- If electrolyte gets on your hands or clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with water immediately and get immediate medical attention.

●Open doors and windows in any closed space where you may be charging or working with the battery.
●Always wear protective clothing and goggles when working with the battery, or have a skilled automobile technician do it.
- If you are quick-charging your battery, first disconnect the battery cables.

Vehicle care and maintenance

WARNING

• In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, and reconnect it last.
• If the electrolyte level is very low, have the battery checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
  ●Battery terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

NOTE

• Check each battery terminal for corrosion. You can stop more corrosion by washing with a solution of baking soda and water. Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or tightening them.
• Check to see that the battery is securely installed and cannot be moved. Also check each terminal for tightness.
• If you will not be driving your vehicle for a long period of time, remove the battery and store it in a place where the battery fluid will not freeze. The battery only should be stored with a full charge.

Tires

N00939200511

WARNING

●Driving with tires that are worn, damaged or improperly inflated is dangerous.
These type tire conditions will adversely affect vehicle performance.
These type tire conditions can also cause a tread separation or blowout which may result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
●Tires, including spare tire, degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms:

●Cold tire pressure:

• The measured pressure after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or
• The measured pressure when the vehicle is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours.

●Maximum inflation pressure: the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

●Recommended inflation pressure: the inflation pressure for optimum tire performance.

Vehicle care and maintenance

- Intended outboard sidewall:

• The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
• The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

●Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less.
●Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
●Tread: portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
●Tread rib: a tread section running circumferentially around a tire.
●Tread separation: pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.
●Carcass: the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.
- Sidewall: portion of a tire between the tread and bead.
- Section width: the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
●Bead: the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
●Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

●Cord: the strands forming the plies in the tire.
●Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
●Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the bead seat.
●Groove: the space between two adjacent tread ribs.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Tire Markings

Size Designation

EXAMPLE:P215/65R15

P	Passenger car tire size based on U.S.A. design standards
215 Section width in millimeters (MM.)
65	Aspect ratio in percent (%)Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
R	Construction code“R” means radial construction.“D” means diagonal or bias construction.
15 Rim diameter in inches (in)

NOTE

●European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based on European/Japanese design standards. Tires designed to these standards have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

●LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based on U.S.A. design standards. The size designation for LT-metric tires is the same as for P-metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

●Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter "T" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

Service Description

EXAMPLE: 95H

95	Load indexA numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H	Speed symbolA symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions.The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits)

Maximum Load

Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.

WARNING

●Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

Maximum Pressure

Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire but the date code may only be on one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504

DOT	Department of TransportationThis symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA	Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9ABCD	Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
15	Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
04	Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

Vehicle care and maintenance

Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1^1/_2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire inflation pressures

N00939300743

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause problems in three major areas:

●Safety

Too little pressure increases flexing in the tire and can cause tire failure. Too much pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and potholes could then cause tire damage that may result in tire failure.

Economy

The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven wear patterns in the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce the tread life, and the tire will have to be replaced sooner. Too little pressure also makes it harder for the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.

●Ride comfort and vehicle stability

The superior riding experience built into your vehicle partly depends on the correct tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to respond. Unequal tire pressures can make steering your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.

The correct tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on the placard attached to the driver's door sill.

(Refer to "Tire and loading information placard" on page 9-3.)

The recommended inflation pressures should be used for the tires listed below.

Item	Tire size	Front	Rear	Spare
Normal tire	P235/65R17P255/55R18	220 KPA,32 PSI	220 KPA,32 PSI	220 KPA,32 PSI
Compact spare tire	T135/90R16T155/90D16	420 KPA, 60 PSI —

Tire pressures should be checked, and adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.

Pressures should be checked more often whenever weather temperatures change severely, because tire pressures change with outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed are always "cold inflation pressure".

Cold inflation pressure is measured after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours.

Cold inflation pressure must not go above the maximum values molded into the tire sidewall. After driving several miles, your tire inflation pressure may increase 14 to 41 KPA, 2 to 6 PSI from the cold inflation pressure. Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the specified cold pressure, or your tire pressure will be too low.

Check your tires each time you refuel. If one tire looks lower than the others, check the pressure for all of them.

You should also take the following safety precautions:

- Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures. (See the tire and loading information placard attached to the driver's door sill.)

●Stay within the recommended load limits.

Vehicle care and maintenance

●Make sure that the weight of any load in your vehicle is evenly distributed.
●Drive at safe speeds.
●After inflating your tires to the correct pressure, check them for damage and air leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the valve stems.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Replacing tires and wheels

N00939600283

CAUTION

• Avoid using different size tires from the one listed and the combined use of different types of tires, as this can affect driving safety. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 9-7.
  ●On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires of the same size, type, and brand that have no wear differences. Using tires of different size, type, brand or degree of wear, will increase the differential oil temperature, and result in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drivetrain will be subjected to excessive loading, possibly leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or other serious problems.
• As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, use only Mitsubishi genuine wheels. Other wheels do not permit correct installation of tire inflation pressure sensors and can cause air leakage and sensor failure, which would not be covered by your vehicle's warranty.

See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer when you replace a tire or wheel.

Tire maintenance

N00939700138

The following maintenance steps are recommended:

●Check tire pressures regularly.

●Have regular maintenance done on the wheel balance and front and rear suspension alignment.
- Rotate your tires regularly as described in the “Tire rotation” section on page 7-27.

Tread wear indicators

N00939800168

1- Location of the tread wear indicator
2- Tread wear indicator

Tread wear indicators are built into the original equipment tires on your vehicle to help you know when your tires should be replaced. Many states have laws requiring that you replace your tires at this point.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear when the tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

When the bands appear next to one another in two or more places, replace your tires.

NOTE

●Tire wear indicators can have different marks and locations depending on the tire manufacturer.

Tire rotation

N00939900475

To even out the wear on your tires and make them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corporation recommends that you rotate your tires at the mileage listed in the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

However, the timing for tire rotation may vary according to your vehicle condition, road surface conditions, and your own personal driving habits. Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pressure, wheels that are not aligned properly, wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe braking.

Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find out the reason for uneven tread wear.

The first tire rotation is the most important one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.

graph TD
    A["Spare tire used*"] --> B["Top tire arrangement"]
    B --> C["Bottom tire arrangement"]
    C --> D["Left tire arrangement"]
    D --> E["Right tire arrangement"]
    E --> F["Left tire arrangement"]
    F --> G["Right tire arrangement"]
    G --> H["Left tire arrangement"]
    H --> I["Right tire arrangement"]
    I --> J["Left tire arrangement"]
    J --> K["Right tire arrangement"]
    K --> L["Left tire arrangement"]
    L --> M["Right tire arrangement"]
    M --> N["Left tire arrangement"]
    N --> O["Right tire arrangement"]
    O --> P["Left tire arrangement"]
    P --> Q["Right tire arrangement"]
    Q --> R["Left tire arrangement"]
    R --> S["Right tire arrangement"]
    S --> T["Left tire arrangement"]
    T --> U["Right tire arrangement"]
    U --> V["Left tire arrangement"]
    V --> W["Right tire arrangement"]
    W --> X["Left tire arrangement"]
    X --> Y["Right tire arrangement"]
    Y --> Z["Left tire arrangement"]
    Z --> AA["Right tire arrangement"]
    AA --> AB["Left tire arrangement"]
    AB --> AC["Right tire arrangement"]
    AC --> AD["Left tire arrangement"]
    AD --> AE["Right tire arrangement"]
    AE --> AF["Left tire arrangement"]
    AF --> AG["Right tire arrangement"]
    AG --> AH["Left tire arrangement"]
    AH --> AI["Right tire arrangement"]
    AI --> AJ["Left tire arrangement"]
    AJ --> AK["Right tire arrangement"]
    AK --> AL["Left tire arrangement"]

*- If the spare tire wheel differs from the standard tire, do not perform tire rotation using a spare wheel.

Vehicle care and maintenance

CAUTION

●A compact spare tire can be fitted temporarily in place of a tire that has been removed during the tire rotation. However, it must not be included in the regular tire rotation sequence.
- If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the correct direction of rotation, swap the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle and the front and rear tires on the right-hand side of the vehicle separately. Keep each tire on its original side of the vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure the arrows point in the direction in which the wheels will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tire whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not perform to its full potential.

CAUTION

●Avoid the combined use of different types of tires. Using different types of tires can affect vehicle performance and safety.

Snow tires

N00940000405

In some areas of the country, snow tires are required for winter driving. If snow tires are required in your area, you must choose snow tires of the same size and type as the original tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires should also be installed on all four wheels. Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling can be reduced.

Even where laws may permit it, snow tires should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).

AA0013073

CAUTION

●As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, use only Mitsubishi genuine wheels.
Other wheels do not permit correct installation of tire inflation pressure sensors and can thus cause air leakage and sensor failure, which would not be covered by your vehicle's warranty.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer when you replace a tire or wheel.

Tire chains

N00940100073

CAUTION

●Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. The clearance between the chains and the body is not sufficient to allow proper clearance, and the vehicle body might be damaged.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Brake pedal free play

N00940300235

To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn off the engine and press the brake pedal several times with your foot. Then press the pedal down with your fingers until you first feel resistance.

Brake pedal free play:

.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)

If the free play is not within these limits, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for adjustment.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Parking brake

N00900400016

Parking brake pedal stroke

N00900500017

Check the parking brake pedal travel occasionally. To check this, depress the pedal slowly and count the number of clicks of the ratchet. You should feel the parking brake pedal movement of one notch (click).

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever pressing a button and a brake pedal (no text or symbols)

Parking brake break-in

ND0900700019

Break-in the parking brake linings whenever the brake performance of the parking brake is insufficient or whenever the parking brake linings and/or discs are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be carried out by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

WARNING

●Continued operation of the vehicle with the parking brake pedal out of adjustment may result in the vehicle moving when unattended.

Wiper blades

N00940700011

Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean them regularly to remove deposits of salt and road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the blades and glass areas.

Replace the blades if they continue to streak or smear.

NOTE

- Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long time. This wears out the rubber and can scratch the glass.

During cold weather

If the blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

Emission-control system maintenance

N00940800315

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-control system that meets all the requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and Environment Canada. The emission-control system is made of:

●a positive crankcase ventilation system
●an evaporative emission-control system
●an exhaust emission-control system

The maintenance services listed in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL” must be performed at the times or mileages listed to keep the emission-control system working properly. These, and all the other “general” maintenance services listed in this manual, need to be performed to keep your vehicle running properly and reliably.

You may need more frequent maintenance if you drive your vehicle in harsh conditions such as dusty areas or do a lot of start-and-stop driving.

To be sure the emission-control system works properly, have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice following the schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

You should also have an inspection and service any time you suspect a malfunction.

Vehicle care and maintenance

NOTE

- To meet government regulations and promote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD). The engine electronic control module that controls OBD functions stores various data (especially about the exhaust emissions). This data will be erased if the battery cable is disconnected, which could make a rapid diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the battery cable when the engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is on.

Spark plugs

N00940900127

Spark plugs must fire properly for good engine performance and emission-control.

Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Change them at the mileage listed in the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

Your vehicle may be equipped with iridium tipped spark plugs, which are identified by marks on the ceramic. They do not require replacement as frequently as the conventional type spare plug and will last much longer.

NOTE

- Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine specifications” on page 9-6 or plugs that are exactly the same. Other plugs could cause engine damage, performance problems or radio noise.

Fuel hoses

N00941000011

Check the hose surfaces for any heat and mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay

special attention to the hoses closest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check all the hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure and that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or damage, replace the hoses immediately.

Fuel system (tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank filler tube cap)

N00941300131

Check these regularly for damage or leaks in the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel tank filler tube cap for damage or looseness. Pay special attention to the fuel lines closest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold.

WARNING

- If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel, do not run the engine. Any spark (including from the ignition), flame or smoking material could cause an explosion or fire. Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

Evaporative emission control system (except evaporative emission canister)

N00941400116

If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or damaged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, polluting the air. Have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

General maintenance

N00941500159

The next pages list the maintenance service recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. In addition to the general maintenance that needs to be performed at the times listed, there are other parts which do not usually need regular maintenance.

But, if any of these parts stops working properly, your vehicle performance could suffer. Have these items checked if you notice a problem with them.

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance, if you have any questions.

Disc brake pads

N00941600020

Good brakes are essential to safe driving. Check the brake pads for wear. For good braking performance, replace the brake pads with the same type pads as the originals.

Brake hoses

N00941700089

Brake hoses and tubing should be checked for:

●Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is showing through any cracks or worn spots in the rubber hose cover, the hose should be replaced. The brakes can fail if the hose wears through.
- Improper installation may cause twisting, or wheel, tire or chassis interference.

Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots

N00941800107

Check the following parts for damage and grease leaks:

●Ball joint boots of the front suspension and steering linkage
●Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft

Drive belt (for generator, power steering pump, air conditioning compressor)

N00941900137

graph LR
    1["1"] --> 2["2"]
    2 --> 3["3"]
    2 --> 4["4"]
    3 --> A["A"]
    4 --> B["B"]
    style 1 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 2 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 3 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 4 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    note right of 1: A
    note right of 2: B
    note right of 3: AA0006387

1- Power steering pump pulley
2- Crank shaft pulley
3- Generator pulley
4- Air conditioning pulley

Check the tension of the drive belt. The deflection must be within specifications, when pressed at a point halfway between

Vehicle care and maintenance

the pulleys as shown in the illustration with a force of about 22 pounds (100N).

Check the drive belt for cuts and cracks, and replace it if it is damaged.

When replacing the belt with a new belt, make sure that there is no interference between the belt and other engine components. Then, check the tension of the belt at the designated point. The deflection must be within the specifications.

Amount of belt deflection

	Standard value U	sed belt New belt
A	.48 to .64 inch(12.3 to 16.2 mm)	.52 to .59 inch(13.2 to 15.1 mm)	.38 to .48 inch(9.6 to 12.3 mm)
B	.33 to .42 inch(8.4 to 10.7 mm)	.35 to .40 inch(8.9 to 10.1 mm)	.24 to .30 inch(6.2 to 7.5 mm)

WARNING

●Do not check or touch the drive belt with the engine running, or serious injury or death may result.

Exhaust system

N00942200010

WARNING

- Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle's exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.

The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas from entering inside your vehicle is to have the engine exhaust system properly serviced.

Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and nearby body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts if you notice any of the following:

●A change in the sound of the exhaust system
●The smell of exhaust fumes inside the vehicle
●The underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged

Also check the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes, or required service. Any open seams or loose connections could let dangerous exhaust fumes seep into the luggage compartment and passenger compartments.

Check for any of the following conditions:

• Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks caused by corrosion or damage.
• Check the joints and connections for looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
• Check the rubber hangers and brackets for damage.

Timing belt

ND0942300037

The timing belt should be replaced with a new one at the mileage listed in the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".

Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch

N00942500042

The hood lock release mechanism and hood safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and oiled when needed for easy movement and to stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts of the hood latch

Vehicle care and maintenance

and release lever. Work the grease into the hood lock mechanism until all the movable surfaces are covered.

Also, put a light coat of the same grease on the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.

For cold and snowy weather

N00942600115

Ventilation slots

The ventilation slots in front of the windshield should be kept clear of leaves or brushed clear after a heavy snowfall, so that the operation of the heating and ventilation systems will not be impaired.

Weatherstripping

To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease.

Additional equipment (For regions where snow is encountered)

It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-handled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windshield, side and rear window are also useful.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Fuse links

N00942700099

The fuse links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current attempts to flow through certain electrical systems. In case of a melted fuse link, see your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for inspection and replacement.

Fuses

N01942800830

Fuse block location

To prevent damage to the electrical system from short-circuiting or overloading, each individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The fuse blocks are located in the passenger compartment and in the engine compartment.

Passenger compartment

The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located in front of the driver's seat at the position shown in the illustration.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Engine compartment

In the engine compartment, the fuse blocks (A and B) are located as shown in the illustration.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Type A

1. Push the lock lever.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.

Vehicle care and maintenance

WARNING

- Do not touch the electronic control module (C). The module surface can be too hot. Wait for the electronic control module to cool down before replacing a fuse.

Type B

1. Pull the lock lever.
2. Open the cover.

Fuse load capacities

This fuse list shows the names of the electrical systems and their fuse capacities.

There are spare fuses in the cover of the instrument panel (driver's side). Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same capacity as the original.

Passenger compartment fuse location table

Vehicle care and maintenance

No.	Symbol	Electrical system Capacity
1		Rear air conditioning 5 A
2	—	— —
3		R a	d
4		Sunroof 20	A
5	Rear window	defogger 30 A
6	Heater |||	30 A
7	—	— —
8	—	—	—
9	Power outlet	15 A
10	Power door locks	15 A
11	Rear window wiper	15 A
12	—	—	—
13		Engine control	7.5 A
14	Outside rearview mirrors	7.5 A
15	—	—	—
16		Cigarette lighter	15 A
17		Engine control	7.5 A
18	—	—	—
19		Door mirror heater	7.5 A
20		Relay	7.5 A

Vehicle care and maintenance

No.	Symbol	Electrical system	Capacity
21 —	——
22 Back-up lights 7.5 A
23 Gauge 7.5 A
24 Ignition coil 10 A
25 —	Spare fuse	20 A
26 —	Spare fuse	30 A
27 —	Spare fuse	30 A

●Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.
●The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse.

The fuse box does not contain spare 7.5 A, 10 A and 15 A fuses. If a fuse of one of these capacities blows, replace it temporarily by borrowing the one that matches from:

7.5 A: Door mirror heater

10 A: Headlight high beam (left)

15 A: Cigarette lighter

Replace the borrowed fuse as soon as possible.

Engine compartment fuse location table

No.	Symbol	Electrical system	Capacity
1		Battery	80 A
2	Radiation fan	motor 50 A
3		Anti-lock braking system	60 A
4		Ignition switch	40 A
5		Power window control	30 A

Vehicle care and maintenance

No.	Symbol	Electrical system	Capacity
6	#0	Front fog lights/Daytime running lights	15 A
7 Heated seat 20		A
8 Horn 1#-A
9 Engine control		20 A
10 Air conditioning		10 A
11 Stop lights 15		A
12	TRAILER	Trailer 20	A
13		Alternator 7.5	A
14 Hazard warning flasher 10 A
15 Automatic transaxle 20 A
16 Headlight high beam (right) 10 A
17 Headlight high beam (left) 10 A
18		Headlight low beam (right)	10 A
19 Headlight low beam (left) 10 A
20 Tail light (right) 7.5 A
21 Tail light (left) 7.5 A
22 Dome light 15 A
23 Radio 月 15 A
24		Fuel pump 15 A

No.	Symbol	Electrical system	Capacity
25		Front wiper	30 A
26		Radio	40 A

●Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.

●The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse.

Identification of fuse

Capacity	Color
5 A	Yellowish brown
7.5 A	Brown
10 A	Red
15 A	Blue
20 A	Yellow
30 A Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusible link type)
40 A	Green
50 A	Red
60 A	Yellow
80 A	White

Vehicle care and maintenance

Fuse replacement

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical item connected to the fuse and turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position.
2. There is a fuse puller in the cover of the instrument panel (driver's side).
3. Remove the fuse puller from the cover.

Interior view of a car showing a door panel, a close-up of a device with a black arrow pointing to it, and no visible text or symbols.

1. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse block.

Line drawing of hands holding two electrical connectors (no text or symbols)

1. Use the fuse location diagrams and the matching tables, to check the fuse that is related to the problem. If the fuse is not blown, something else must be causing the problem. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to have the problem checked.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled point A (no text or symbols beyond label)

Line drawing of a mechanical device with labeled component B (no text or symbols beyond label)

AA0005377

A- Fuse is OK

B- Blown fuse

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity securely into the appropriate slot.

CAUTION

●Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring to heat up and could cause a fire.

- If the replacement fuse blows again after a short time, have the electrical system checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice to find and correct the cause.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Replacement of light bulbs

N00942900219

Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is off. Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy the bulb when it gets hot.

CAUTION

- Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being turned off. When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently before touching it. You could otherwise be burned.

NOTE

• If you are unsure of how to carry out the work as required, it is recommended that these procedures be carried out by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
  ●Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing a light and lens.
• When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem.

When the light is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the light, please have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Bulb capacity

ND0943000099

The bulb should only be replaced with a new bulb with the same rating and type. The type and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.

Outside

N00950300674

Description	Wattage or Candle power	ANSI Trade No. or Bulb type
1 - Headlight —		9007HB5
2 - Parking and front side- marker and front turn signal light	32/3 cp 1157NA
3 - Front fog light (if so equipped)	55 W H11

Vehicle care and maintenance

Description	Wattage or Candle power	ANSI Trade No. or Bulb type
4 - Tail and stop and rear side-marker light	32/3 cp 1157
5 - Back-up light 18 W 921
6 - Rear turn signal light 32	cp 1156NA
7 - License plate lights 5 W	W5W
8 - High-mounted stop lamp	—	—

NOTE

●The high-mounted stop light uses LEDs rather than bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Inside

N00950400486

Description Wattage
1 - Luggage room light 8 W
2 - Door light 5 W
3 - Dome light (front) 5 W
4 - Rear personal lights 8 W

Headlights

N00943100801

1. Depress the tab (A) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector toward you to remove it.

Technical line drawing of a car engine compartment with an inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. Remove the locking cap (B) by turning it counterclockwise.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

1. Remove the headlight bulb (C) with holder.

1. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Vehicle care and maintenance

CAUTION

●Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
●Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlights are used.
If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with alcohol and let it dry completely before installing the bulb.

Adjustment of headlight aim

N00943200121

The alignment of the headlights should be checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Parking and front side-marker and front turn signal lights

ND1917300349

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it. And remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counterclockwise while pressing in.

Line drawing of a car engine compartment with an inset showing a close-up of the engine component (no text or symbols present)

1. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Front fog lights (if so equipped)

N00943600398

To remove

1. Remove the six clips (A) by turning them counterclockwise or prying them, and remove the screw (B) by turning it counterclockwise, then remove the cover (C).

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. Depress the tab (D) on the harness connector and pull the harness connector to downward to remove it.

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. Remove the bulb (E) by turning it counterclockwise.

CAUTION

●Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
●Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the fog lights are used.

If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with alcohol and let it dry completely before installing the bulb.

Vehicle care and maintenance

To reinstall

I. Reverse the above removal procedure.
2. When installing the cover, start by fitting the two clips closest to the outside of the vehicle (the clips numbered 1 and 2 in the illustration) in the order of the numbers.
When fitting the clips, grasp the bottom edge of the cover and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle to align the clip holes in the cover with those in the body.
When reinstalling the clips of the cover, push the pin (F).

1. Fit the remaining four clips and the one screw.

Rear combination lights

N00943700373

1. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light unit.

AA0006114

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. Move the light unit toward the rear of the vehicle and remove the clips (B).

1. Remove each socket and bulb assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

C- Tail and stop and rear side-marker light Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counterclockwise while pressing in.

D- Back-up light Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

E- Rear turn signal light Remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counterclockwise while pressing in.

1. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

NOTE

- When mounting the light unit, align the clips (F) on the light unit with the hole in the body.

Vehicle care and maintenance

License plate lights

N00944000315

1. When removing the light unit (A), push it toward the left side of the vehicle body.

Vehicle care and maintenance

1. Use a screw driver to gently pry up the tab (B) and remove the lens.

NOTE

●Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to keep from scratching the lens.

1. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Vehicle care and maintenance

NOTE

- When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C) first then align tab (D) with its hole.

Dome light (front)

N00944100286

1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the light assembly. Pry gently to remove the lens, then remove the bulb from the light holder.

Line drawing of a car gear shift lever inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

NOTE

●Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to keep from scratching the lens.

1. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Reading lights

N00944400090

Have the reading light bulbs replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Rear personal lights

N00944700080

1. Insert the tip of a screwdriver at the edge of the lens, pry gently to remove the lens, and then remove the bulb from the light holder.

Line drawing of a hand inserting a device into a device (no text or symbols)

NOTE

●Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to keep from scratching the lens.
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Luggage room light

N00944900079

1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the light assembly and pry gently to remove the lens. Pull the light bulb out from the light holder.

NOTE

●Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to keep from scratching the lens.
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Door lights

N00945000077

1. Insert the tip of a screwdriver at the edge of the lens, pry gently to remove the lens. Pull the bulb from the light holder.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a screwdriver inserted, showing no text or symbols

NOTE

●Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screwdriver to keep from scratching the lens.

1. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.

Vehicle care precautions

N00945100153

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, perform regular maintenance using the proper materials and procedures. Be sure to use only those materials and procedures that meet your local environmental pollution control regulations. Choose the materials you will use carefully, to be sure that they do not contain corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help in choosing these materials.

CAUTION

• Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some are poisonous. Others are highly flammable. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything in a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the instructions. Always open your vehicle doors or windows when you're cleaning the inside. Never use the following chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
  • Carbon Tetrachloride
• Benzine
• Kerosene
  • Naphtha
• Acetone
• Turpentine
• Paint Thinner
  • Lacquer Thinner
  • Nail Polish Remover

Vehicle care and maintenance

These can all be dangerous, and they all can damage your vehicle.

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle

N00945200037

After washing the inside of your vehicle with any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well ventilated area.

CAUTION

- Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or cracking of the surface. If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.

NOTE

●Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts

ND0945300041

1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap and water.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.

NOTE

- Do not use cleaners, conditioners, or protectants containing silicone or wax. Such products may cause annoying reflections and obscure vision.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Upholstery

N00945500030

1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, maintain the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean.
   Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm water.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth and spot remover.

NOTE

- If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush over the surface in one direction.

Genuine leather (if so equipped)

N00945600217

1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gentle soap and water.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, wring it out well, and wipe off all the soap.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather protecting agent on the genuine leather surface.

NOTE

• If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it with a dry, soft cloth.
  If left damp, mildew may grow and damage the leather surface.

●The genuine leather surface can be damaged if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber brush.
●Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, acid or alkaline solvents can discolor the genuine leather surface and should not be used.
●Genuine leather can mildew if not kept clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
●The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as possible.
- When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in summer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather seat may deteriorate and stick to the seat.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

N00945700045

To protect your vehicle's finish, wash it often and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.

Foreign material

N00945800017

Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other foreign matters can damage the finish on your vehicle.

Generally, the longer any foreign material stays on the finish, the worse the damage. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible whenever the finish gets soiled.

Washing

N00945900568

Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from air, rain, snow or road surfaces can damage the paint and body of your vehicle if left on.

Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom.

Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a chamois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to remain.

CAUTION

- When washing the underside of your vehicle or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands.

●Never spray or splash water on the electrical parts in the engine compartment. This may damage them. Be careful also when washing the underbody. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

●Avoid automatic car washers that use rotating brushes. These brushes may scratch the paint surface and make it dull.

Scratches are more noticeable on darker colored vehicles.

- Some hot water washing equipment uses high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. This heated water may damage your vehicle's resin parts. It can flood the interior of the vehicle. Therefore, be sure of the following:

- Keep the washing nozzle at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the vehicle body.

- When washing around the door glass, hold the nozzle at a distance of more than 20 inches (50 cm) and at right angles to the glass surface.

●Make sure to do the following when using an automatic car wash to avoid damaging your vehicle:

- Fold the outside rearview mirrors.

- Remove the antenna.

- Tape or remove the rear wiper arm assembly.

- As your vehicle is equipped with roof rails, check with the car wash operator before using the car wash.

During cold weather

Salt and other chemicals spread on winter roads in some geographical areas can have a detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody. You should flush the underbody with a high pressure hose every time you wash the outside of your vehicle.

Take special care to remove mud or other debris which could trap and hold salt and moisture.

After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.

NOTE

- When the door is frozen, opening it by force may tear off or crack the rubber gasket installed around the door. Pour warm water to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe off the water after opening the door. To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubricant.

Waxing

N00946000074

Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or when water does not bead up on the paint.

Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax on the painted surfaces. After the wax has dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.

Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.

You should wax when the painted surfaces are cool.

CAUTION

●Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should not be used. These waxes remove rust and stain effectively from the paintwork, but are harmful to the finish of the paint, because they also remove paint/clearcoat. They are also harmful to other glossy surfaces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.

- Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzene or paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt from the vehicle surface.

- Do not put wax on the areas having black matte coating because it can cause uneven discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get wax on them, wipe the wax off right away with a soft cloth and warm water.

●On vehicles with sunroof, be careful not to apply any wax on the weatherstrip (black rubber) when waxing the area around the sunroof opening. If stained with wax, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal with the sunroof.

Polishing

N00946100017

If painted surfaces have been severely damaged and lost their original luster and color tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine polishing compound. Avoid limiting your polishing to the damaged surface only; polish a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush the compound from the surface and apply a coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.

Vehicle care and maintenance

Damaged paint

N00946200018

Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched up as soon as possible with touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. Check body areas facing the road or the tires carefully for damage to the paint caused by flying stones, etc. The paint code number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle information code plate in the engine compartment.

Cleaning plastic parts

N00946300048

Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.

If vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black rough surface of the bumper, moulding or lights, the surface may appear white in color. In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water and a soft cloth or chamois.

CAUTION

• Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough scrubber as these may damage the plastic surface.
  ●Do not use wax containing compounds (polishing powder) which may damage the plastic surface.
• Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gasoline, light oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint thinner and sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte). These fluids, etc., may stain, crack or discolor the plastic parts. If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a watery solution of gentle soap. Then rinse them immediately with water.

Chrome parts

N01946400010

To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a commercially available chrome polish.

Aluminum wheels

N00946500095

1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling water on the wheel.
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed easily with water. Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing the wheel.
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft cloth.

CAUTION

• Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the wheels. Doing so could scratch the wheels.
• Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become discolored or stained.
  ●Do not directly apply hot water using a steam cleaner or by any other means.
• Contact with seawater and road deicer can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible.

Window glass

N00946600012

The window glass can usually be cleaned using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.

Wiper blades

N00946700013

Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades.

Replace the wiper blades when they no longer clean the wind-shield and rear window properly.

Cleaning the sunroof (if so equipped)

N00946800014

Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped away with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral detergent solution. Wipe away the solution with a sponge dipped in fresh water.

NOTE

●The surface treatment on the inside of the glass may be removed if a hard cloth or organic solvent is used.

Engine compartment

N00947000084

Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the engine compartment, as this may cause damage.

Do not allow any nearby parts (such as plastic parts) come into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte), which may crack, stain, or discolour them.

If this occurs, wipe the parts with a soft cloth saturated with a mild detergent and water solution.

Then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.

	10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3	11.4	11.5	11.6	11.7	11.8	11.9	12.0
									10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Consumer information

(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) 8-2

Reporting Safety Defects....8-3

Important facts to know in case of an accident . . .8- 5

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

N01047100100

This information is provided in compliance with the requirements of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers with information on reporting safety defects.

Uniform tire quality grading

DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. The specific grade rating in each grade category is shown on the side wall of the tires on your vehicle.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1^1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

●The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

●The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Reporting Safety Defects

N01047200228

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

NHTSA Headquarters

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE

West Building

Washington, DC 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 6400

Cypress, CA 90630-0064

For vehicles sold in Canada

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. You may write to:

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

P.O. Box 41009

4141 Dixie Road

Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Inc. call 1-800-981-0452 or write to:

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, Inc.

Customer Service Department

P.O. Box 192216

SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

For vehicles sold in Guam

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc. call [phone] or write to:

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.

P.O. Box 6066

TAMUNING

GUAM 96931

For vehicles sold in Saipan

To contact Triple J Motors call [phone] or write to:

Triple J Motors

P.O. Box 500487

SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

For vehicles sold in American Samoa

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. call 684(699)9140 or write to:

Pacific Marketing, Inc.

P.O. Box 698

PAGO PAGO,

AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799

Important facts to know in case of an accident

N01047300098

We hope you will never be involved in an accident, but there is always that potential danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and drive safely.

In the event of an accident

• Remain calm.
• Check for injuries. Report all injuries to the police, and, if necessary, call for an ambulance.
  ●Record all the details of the accident. This will provide you with accurate records of the accident for discussions with your insurance company and other persons who may be acting on your behalf.

Key information to discuss with your insurance company

●Understand your repair estimate before approving repairs.
- Choosing the repair shop and the brands of parts that they use on your vehicle is your decision.
- Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. Many times, to save money, your insurance company will recommend imitation parts that do not meet the original specifications of fit, finish, corrosion resistance or workmanship.

Mitsubishi Motors built-in protection

The strength and integrity built into your Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific design referred to as “Energy Management”. Individual body parts are designed to act as one unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves are absorbed by protective panels or are channeled around the passenger compartment. This important feature is possible because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, something that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets are designed and constructed as important protection features in the event of an accident. By replacing body parts with imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet original equipment specifications.

Consumer rights (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

As a consumer requesting repair on your vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the country, State Insurance Commissioners have begun considering rules on the use of non-OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops will have to disclose to the consumer, when they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since regulations are not consistent on this point, remember you have a choice. So, if you want genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may have to specifically request them. Make certain your insurance company understands imitations are not to be used in the repair of your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built with the high quality and durability standards you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors replacements parts are your guarantee that your vehicle will have all the technological advantages and maintain the style and protection of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.

	10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3	11.4	11.5	11.6	11.7	11.8	11.9	12.0
									10.2	10.3	10.4	10.5	10.6	10.7	10.8	10.9	11.0	11.1	11.2	11.3

Specifications

Vehicle labeling....9-2

Vehicle dimensions 9-4

Vehicle weights 9-5

Engine specifications....9-6

Battery 9-7

Tires and wheels....9-7

Capacities. 9-8

Specifications

Vehicle labeling

N01147400540

Keep a record of the vehicle identification number as such information will assist the police if your vehicle is stolen.

1- Vehicle emission control information label

The vehicle emission control information label is affixed on the underside of the engine hood.

2- Vehicle identification number plate

The vehicle identification number is stamped on the plate riveted to the left front corner of the dashboard. It is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield.

3- Air conditioning label

The air conditioning label is affixed on the inside panel of the engine hood.

Engine serial number

The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with directional arrows and a small symbol (no text or labels)

*- Front of the vehicle

Tire and loading information placard

N01148100443

The tire and loading information placard is located on the inside sill of the driver's door.

A- Vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada (Type 1) B- Vehicles sold in Canada (Type 2)

Specifications

Type 1

Type 2

Specifications

Certification label

N01148200138

The certification label is located on the inside sill of the driver's door.

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Vehicle dimensions
N01147500437

Overall length 190.8 in (4,846 mm)
Overall width		73.6 in (1,870 mm)* ^1 74.2 in (1,885 mm)* ^2
Overall height	Without cross bars	69.6 in (1,769 mm)* ^1 ,69.8 in (1,774 mm)* ^2
	With cross bars 70.4	in (1,789 mm)
Wheel base 108.3 in (2,750 mm)

*1: Vehicles with 17 inch tires
^*2 : Vehicles with 18 inch tires

Vehicle weights
N01147600728

Item FWD AWD
Gross vehicle weight rating 5,159 lb (2,340 kg) 5,346 lb (2,425 kg)
Gross axle weight rating	Front 2,745 lb (1,245 kg)
	Rear 2,800 lb (1,270 kg)
Gross combination weight rating 8,309 lb (3,769 kg) 8,496 lb (3,854 kg)
Total trailer weight	Without Towing kit	Trailer without brake	1,500 lb (680 kg)
		Trailer with brake 2,000 lb (907 kg)
	With Towing kit	Trailer without brake	1,500 lb (680 kg)
		Trailer with brake 3,500 lb (1,588 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight			970 lb (440 kg)
Maximum roof load	Without crossbars	Vehicles with 17 inch tires	200 lb (91 kg)
		Vehicles with 18 inch tires	100 lb (45 kg)
	With crossbars		100 lb (45 kg)
Seating capacity			5 persons

NOTE
● Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 4-13.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the number of maximum occupants

Specifications

Engine specifications
N01147700253

Engine model 6G75
Engine displacement 233.6 CID (3,828 cm ^3 )
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 6-V60°
Bore 3.74 in (95.0 mm)
Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0
Thermostat valve opening temperature		190.4 °F (88.0 °C)
Spark plugs	NGK FR6EI
	DENSO K20PSR-B8
Spark plug gap .028 to .031 in (0.7 to 0.8 mm)
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
Ignition timing, idle speed, mixture Refer to the		“Vehicle emission control information label” under the engine hood.

Battery

N01147800153

BCI Group No.24

Battery is a 12 volt type.

NOTE

●There are various size of the batteries in the BCI Group No.24.

When you replace the battery, confirm the size of the replacement battery will not interfere with other components in the engine compartment.

Specifications

Tires and wheels

N01147900574

Tire		P235/65R17 103SP235/65R17 103T	P255/55R18 104T
Wheel	Size 17 x	7JJ 18 x 8JJ
	PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
	Offset 1.81 in (46 mm) 1.38 in (35 mm)

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)

NOTE

• Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
• These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owner's manual.

Specifications

Capacities
N01148000732

Item Capacity Lubricants
Fuel (approximate) 21.4 gal (81.0 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 1-2.
Engine oil	Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L)			Engine oils displaying ILSAC certification symbol or conforming to the API classification SM.
	Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Power steering As required Genuine Mitsubishi Power Steering Fluid
Automatic transaxle	Front-wheel drive 8.9 qt (8.4 L)			DIAMOND ATF SP III
	All-wheel drive 9.3 qt (8.8 L)
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive) .58 qt (0.55 L) Hypoid gear oil API classification GL-5 SAE 90
Differential (All-wheel drive) Rear axle			1.2 qt (1.1 L)	Hypoid gear oil API classification GL-5 or higherAbove -10 °F (-23 °C) SAE90,85W-90,80W-90From -30 °F (-34 °C) to -10 °F (-23 °C) SAE80W,80W-90Below -30 °F (-34 °C) SAE75W
Brake			As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch			As required	Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolantInclude .63 qt (0.6 L) in reserve tank	Front-wheel drive		9.5 qt (9.0 L)	Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or an equivalent
	All-wheel drive	Without Towing kit
		With Towing kit	10.1 qt (9.6 L)
Washer fluid			4.2 qt (4.0 L)	—
Refrigerant (air conditioning)			Refer to the air conditioning label on page 9-2.	HFC-134a

A

Accessory boxes 3-203

Accessory (installation) 1-7

Active stability control 3-58

Air cleaner filter 7-11

Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning 5-14

Important air conditioning operating tips 5-26

Manual air conditioning 5-6

Rear cooler 5-25

Refrigerant 9-8

All-wheel drive operation 3-48

Aluminum wheels 7-63

Antenna

SIRIUS antenna 5-77

Whip antenna 5-77

Anti-lock braking system 3-54

Warning light 3-55

Arm rest 2-11

Audio system 5-28

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with

CD autochanger-Type 2 5-43

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 15-30

AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with

CD autochanger-Type 3 5-43

Error codes 5-70

Handling of compact discs 5-74

Steering wheel remote control switch 5-68

Automatic transaxle 3-39

Fluid 7-12,9-8

Selector lever operation 3-40

Selector lever positions 3-43

Sports mode 3-44

B

Back-up lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-51

Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots 7-33

Battery 7-16

Charging system warning light 3-85

Checking battery electrolyte level 7-17

Disconnection and connection 7-18

During cold weather 7-18

Specification 9-7

Bottle holder 3-207

Brake

Anti-lock braking system 3-54

Braking 4-6

Fluid 7-15,9-8

Hoses 7-33

Parking brake 3-28

Parking brake pedal stroke 7-30

Pedal 3-53

Pedal free play 7-29

Power brakes 3-53

Alphabetical index

Service brake 3-53

Warning light 3-83

Break-in recommendations 3-2

Bulb capacity 7-44

C

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 1-9

Capacities 9-8

Cargo loads 4-12

Catalytic converter 7-3

Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive vehicles 3-51

Certification label 9-4

Charging system warning light 3-85

Child restraints 2-25

Child safety locks for rear door 3-15

Cleaning

Inside of your vehicle 7-58

Outside of your vehicle 7-60

Clock 3-197

Coat hook 3-210

Combination headlights and dimmer switch 3-153

Consumer information 8-2

Coolant (engine) 7-9, 9-8

Cruise control 3-63

Indicator 3-64

Cup holder 3-206

D

Defogger (rear window) 3-163

Digital clock 3-197

Dimensions 9-4

Dimmer (high/low beam change) 3-156

Disc brake pads 7-33

Dome light

Bulb capacity 7-46

Replacement 7-55

Switch 3-200

Door lights 3-202

Bulb capacity 7-46

Replacement 7-57

Doors

Locks 3-13

Power door locks 3-15

Warning light and buzzer 3-85

Drive belt 7-33

Driving during cold weather 4-5

Driving precaution 4-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-3

E

Electric rear window defogger switch 3-163

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) 3-3

Emission-control system maintenance 7-31

Engine

Block heater 3-39

Compartment 7-6

Coolant 7-9, 9-8

Coolant temperature gauge 3-81

Hood 7-4

Malfunction indicator 3-84

Oil and oil filter 7-6, 9-8

Overheating 6-5

Serial number 9-2

Specifications 9-6

Error codes 5-72

Exhaust system 7-34

F

Filling the fuel tank 1-4

Floor console box 3-204

Fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid 7-12, 9-8

Brake fluid 7-15, 9-8

Engine coolant 7-9, 9-8

Power steering fluid 7-16, 9-8

Washer fluid 7-14, 9-8

Fluid capacities and lubricants 9-8

Fog lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Indicator 3-83

Replacement 7-49

Switch 3-158

For cold and snowy weather 7-35

Front side-marker lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-48

Front turn signal lights

Alphabetical index

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-48

Fuel

Fuel economy 4-2

Fuel gauge 3-80

Fuel hoses 7-32

Fuel selection 1-2

Low-fuel warning light 3-80

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 1-8

Tank capacity 1-5, 9-8

Full-time all-wheel drive 3-47

Fuse links 7-36

Fuses 7-36

G

Gauges 3-77

General maintenance 7-33

General vehicle data 9-4, 9-5

Genuine parts 1-9

Glove compartment 3-204

H

Hands-free Bluetooth ^® cellular phone interface system with voice recognition 3-164

Hazard warning flasher switch 3-158

Hazard warning lights 3-83

Head restraints 2-12

Headlights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Alphabetical index

Dimmer 3-156

Headlight flasher 3-156

High beam indicator 3-83

Replacement 7-46

Switch 3-153

Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch 7-34

Horn switch 3-164

I

If the vehicle breaks down 6-2

Ignition switch 3-34

Important facts to know in case of an accident 8-5

Indicator 3-83

Indicator and warning light package 3-82

Inside day/night rearview mirror 3-30

Inside liftgate release 3-18

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation 3-50

Instrument cluster 3-77

Instrument panel light dimmer control 3-159

Interior lights 3-197

J

Jack 6-8

Storage 6-7

Jump-starting the engine 6-2

K

Key reminder buzzer 3-14, 3-35

Keyless entry system 3-7

Keys 3-2

L

Labeling 9-2

License plate lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-53

Liftgate 3-16

Loading information 4-8

Low-fuel warning light 3-80

Lubricants 9-8

Luggage hooks 3-209

Luggage room light

Bulb capacity 7-46

Replacement 7-56

Switch 3-202

M

Mirror

Inside day/night rearview mirror 3-30

Outside rearview mirrors 3-32

Modification of your vehicle 1-7

Multi center display 3-86

0

Octane number 1-2

Odometer 3-78

Oil

Engine oil 7-6, 9-8

Rear axle oil 7-14, 9-8

Transfer oil 7-13, 9-8

Oil pressure warning light 3-85

Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-25

Outside rearview mirrors 3-32

Overhead console control switch 3-165

Overheating 6-5

P

Parking 4-7

Parking brake 3-28

Parking brake pedal stroke 7-30

Parking brake 7-30

Parking brake break-in 7-30

Parking lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-48

Polishing 7-61

Power brakes 3-53

Power door locks 3-15

Power outlet 3-195

Power steering

Fluid 7-16,9-8

System 3-57

Power windows 3-23

Main switch 3-24

Sub switch 3-24

Timer function 3-24

Alphabetical index

Puncture (Tire changing) 6-12

R

Radiator cap 7-10

Radio

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with

CD autochanger-Type 2 5-43

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player-Type 15-30

AM/FM/Satellite electronically tuned radio with

CD autochanger-Type 3 5-43

General information about your radio 5-78

Reading lights

Replacement 7-55

Switch 3-200

Rear axle oil 7-14, 9-8

Rear cooler 5-25

Rear personal lights

Bulb capacity 7-46

Replacement 7-56

Switch 3-201

Rear side-marker light

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-51

Rear turn signal lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-51

Rear window defogger switch 3-163

Rear-view camera 3-75

Alphabetical index

Rearview mirror

Inside 3-30

Outside 3-32

Refrigerant (air conditioning) 9-8

Replacement of light bulbs 7-44

Reporting Safety Defects 8-3

S

Safe driving techniques 4-5

Safety mechanism 3-27

Seat 2-2

Arm rest 2-11

Front seats 2-3

Head restraints 2-12

Heated seats 2-9

Rear seats 2-10

Seats and restraint systems 2-3

Scat belt 2-15

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor 2-21

Maintenance and inspection 2-35

Seat belts

Driver's seat belt reminder/warning light 2-19

Front passenger seat belt warning light 2-20

Pre-tensioner and force limiter systems 2-23

Seat belt extender 2-22

Seat belt use during pregnancy 2-22

Service brake 3-53

Service precautions 7-2

Spark plugs 7-32

Speedometer 3-78

Starting 3-37

Steering

Power steering fluid 7-16,9-8

Tilt lock lever 3-29

Wheel lock 3-36

Steering wheel remote control switch 5-68

Stop lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-51

Sunvisors3-194

Sunglasses holder 3-207

Sunroof 3-26

Safety mechanism 3-27

Sunshade 3-28

Timer function 3-26

Sunshade 3-28

Supplemental Restraint System 2-35

How the Supplement Restraint System works 2-39

Servicing 2-58

Warning light 2-44

T

Tachometer 3-78

Tail lights

Bulb capacity 7-45

Replacement 7-51

Tank capacity 1-5, 9-8

Theft-alarm system 3-20

Alphabetical index

Timer function 3-24, 3-26

Timing belt 7-34

Tire pressure monitoring system 3-69

Tires 7-20

Compact spare tire 6-14

How to change a tire 6-12

Inflation pressure 7-24

Maintenance 7-26

Quality grading 8-2

Replacing tires and wheels 7-26

Rotation 7-27

Size (tire and wheel) 9-7

Snow tires 7-28

Spare tire information 6-13

Tire and loading information placard 4-9, 9-3

Tire chains 7-29

Tread wear indicators 7-26

Tissue holder 3-204

Tonneau cover 3-208

Tools 6-8

Storage 6-7

Towing 6-23

Trailer towing 4-15

Transfer oil 7-13, 9-8

Trip odometer 3-78

Turn signal light

Bulb capacity 7-45

Indicators 3-83

Lever 3-157

Replacement 7-48, 7-51

V

Vanity mirror 3-195

Vehicle care precautions 7-57

Vehicle dimensions 9-4

Vehicle labeling 9-2

Vehicle preparation before driving 4-3

Vehicle weights 9-5

Vents 5-2

W

Warning lights 3-83

Washer

Fluid 7-14,9-8

Rear window washer 3-161

Switch 3-161

Windshield washer 3-161

Waxing 7-61

Weights 9-5

Wheel

Specification 9-7

Wiper

Rear window wiper 3-161

Switch 3-159

Windshield 3-159

Wiper blades 7-31

How to calculate your gasoline mileage

You can calculate your miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre by using the following process:

1. Fill your vehicle's fuel tank and record the odometer mileage.

2. Drive your vehicle as you normally do.

3. Refill the fuel tank. Record the odometer mileage again, as well as the gallons/litres of fuel used.

4. Subtract the first mileage number from the second number to know how many miles/kilometers were driven. Divide the number of miles/kilometers driven by the number of gallons/litres of fuel used. This is your approximate miles-per-gallon or kilometers-per-litre.

Gas mileage record Gas mileage record

Date Odometer		Gallons /Litres This Fill	Cost Per Gallon /Litre	Cost This Fill	Miles Per Gallon/Kilometers Per Litre (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilometers/Litres)

Date Odometer	Gallons /Litres This Fill	Cost Per Gallon /Litre	Cost This Fill	Miles Per Gallon/Kilometers Per Litre (Miles/Gals.)/(Kilometers/Litres)

NOTE

Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number

Maintenance record

Service Performed Date		Kilometers Miles	Inspection and Maintenance Item